MY17 CLS Operator

CLS
Operator's Manual
CLS Operator's Manual
É2185848702ÀËÍ
2185848702
Order no. P218 0116 13 Part no. 218 584 87 02 Edition 2016-1
Symbols (Y This symbol tells you where you can find Publication details
Registered trademarks: page) more information about a topic.
Internet
YY This symbol indicates a warning or an
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-
instruction that is continued on the next
tooth SIG Inc. page. Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-
RDTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
Dis‐ This text indicates a message on the following websites:
RDolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks play multifunction display/multimedia dis-
of DOLBY Laboratories. play. http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are reg- http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
istered trademarks of Daimler AG.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of John-
son Controls. Editorial office
RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks
of Apple Inc. Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or
RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Harman
otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-
out written permission from Daimler AG.
International Industries.
RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are regis-
tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Vehicle manufacturer
RSIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius
XM Radio Inc. Daimler AG
RHD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq-
Mercedesstra e 137
uity Digital Corporation.
70327 Stuttgart
RGracenote® is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc. Germany
RZAGAT Survey® and related brands are regis-
tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-
lowing symbols:
G WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others.
H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal.
! Notes on material damage alert you to dan-

gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-
cle.
i Practical tips or further information that
could be helpful to you.
X This symbol indicates an instruction
that must be followed.
X Several of these symbols in succession
indicate an instruction with several
steps. As at 10.09.2015
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz Digital form via the Internet
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual The Operator's Manual on the Internet pro-
carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi- vides easy access to all information
cle before driving. For your own safety and a regarding your vehicle and multimedia sys-
longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and tem. It also provides helpful animations,
warning notices in this Operator's Manual. interesting background information and a
Ignoring them could result in damage to the wide array of search options.
vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Digital form as an App
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow Using the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, you
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes- can view all the information on your vehicle
Benz Limited Warranty. and multimedia system via mobile Internet
The equipment or product designation of your or download it independently of network
vehicle may vary depending on: access. Available for smartphones or tab-
lets.
RModel
ROrder
RCountry specification
RAvailability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
RDesign
REquipment
RTechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App
differ from that shown in the descriptions and may not yet be available in your country.
illustrations. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
The following are integral components of the Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
vehicle: A Daimler Company
RDigital Operator's Manual
RPrinted Operator's Manual
RMaintenance Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all
documents on to the new owner.
Your Operator's Manual:
Digital form inside the vehicle
The Digital Operator's Manual provides
comprehensive and specifically adapted
information on your vehicle's equipment
and multimedia system. It contains infor-
mative animations, individual language
settings and an intuitive search function.
Booklet inside the vehicle
In addition to this manual and the afore-
mentioned digital media, you also have the
option to obtain a comprehensive printed
version of the Supplement for your multi-
media system from your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
2185848702 É2185848702ÀËÍ
2 Contents
Welcome to the world of Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 93

Mercedes-Benz ...................................... 1 Correct driver's seat position ................ 93
Seats ..................................................... 93
Steering wheel ....................................... 98
Index ....................................................... 4
Mirrors ................................................. 101
Memory function ................................. 103
Digital Operator's Manual .................. 24
Introduction ........................................... 24 Lights and windshield wipers .......... 105
Operation ............................................... 24
Exterior lighting ................................... 105
Interior lighting .................................... 108
Introduction ......................................... 25 Replacing bulbs ................................... 109
Protection of the environment ............... 25 Windshield wipers ................................ 109
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ............... 25
Operator's Manual ................................. 26 Climate control ................................. 112
Service and vehicle operation ................ 26
Overview of climate control systems ... 112
Operating safety .................................... 28
Operating the climate control sys-
QR codes for the rescue card ................ 30
tems .................................................... 116
Data stored in the vehicle ...................... 30
Air vents .............................................. 121
Information on copyright ....................... 32
Driving and parking .......................... 122

At a glance ........................................... 33
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 122
Cockpit .................................................. 33
Driving ................................................. 122
Instrument cluster ................................. 34
Automatic transmission ....................... 129
Multifunction steering wheel ................. 35
Refueling ............................................. 138
Center console ...................................... 36
Parking ................................................ 141
Overhead control panel ......................... 39
Driving tips .......................................... 143
Door control panel ................................. 40
Driving systems ................................... 147
Safety ................................................... 41
On-board computer and displays .... 188
Panic alarm ............................................ 41
Important safety notes ........................ 188
Occupant safety .................................... 41
Displays and operation ........................ 188
Children in the vehicle ........................... 58
Menus and submenus ......................... 190
Pets in the vehicle ................................. 63
Display messages ................................ 203
Driving safety systems ........................... 64
Warning and indicator lamps in the
Protection against theft ......................... 74
instrument cluster ............................... 226
Opening and closing ........................... 76

Multimedia system ........................... 236
SmartKey ............................................... 76
General notes ...................................... 236
Doors ..................................................... 81
Trunk ..................................................... 83
Function restrictions ............................ 236
Side windows ......................................... 87
Operating system ................................ 237
Sliding sunroof ....................................... 90
Stowage and features ...................... 242

Stowage areas ..................................... 242
Contents 3
Features .............................................. 248
Maintenance and care ...................... 265

Engine compartment ........................... 265
Maintenance ........................................ 269
Care ..................................................... 270
Breakdown assistance ..................... 277

Where will I find...? .............................. 277
Flat tire ................................................ 278
Battery (vehicle) .................................. 282
Jump-starting ....................................... 285
Towing and tow-starting ...................... 287
Fuses ................................................... 290
Wheels and tires ............................... 292

Operation ............................................ 292
Winter operation .................................. 294
Tire pressure ....................................... 295
Loading the vehicle .............................. 302
All about wheels and tires ................... 305
Changing a wheel ................................ 312
Wheel and tire combinations ............... 317
Emergency spare wheel ....................... 317
Technical data ................................... 321

Information regarding technical data ... 321
Vehicle electronics .............................. 321
Identification plates ............................. 322
Service products and filling capaci-
ties ...................................................... 323
Vehicle data ......................................... 328
4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Parking .......................................... 167

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 72
4ETS (Electronic Traction System) Adaptive Brake Assist
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac- Function/notes ................................ 68
tion System) Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 160
4MATIC (permanent all-wheel
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
drive)
Display message ............................ 212
Function/notes ............................. 163
Function/notes ............................. 107
12 V socket
Switching on/off ........................... 108
see Sockets
Additives (engine oil) ........................ 326
360° camera
Address book
Cleaning ......................................... 274
see also Digital Operator's Man-
Display in the multimedia system .. 175
ual .................................................. 236
Function/notes ............................. 173
Adjusting the volume
Audio 20 ........................................ 237
A
COMAND ....................................... 237
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Air bags
Display message ............................ 204 Deployment ..................................... 53
Function/notes ................................ 64 Display message ............................ 210
Important safety notes .................... 64 Front air bag (driver, front
Warning lamp ................................. 229 passenger) ....................................... 47
Accident Important safety notes .................... 46
Automatic measures after an acci- Introduction ..................................... 46
dent ................................................. 58 Knee bag .......................................... 47
Activating media mode Occupant Classification System
General notes ................................ 241 (OCS) ............................................... 49
Activating/deactivating cooling PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-
with air dehumidification ................. 116 tor lamp ........................................... 42
Active Blind Spot Assist Pelvis air bag ................................... 48
Activating/deactivating (on- Side impact air bag .......................... 47
board computer) ............................ 196 Window curtain air bag .................... 49
Display message ............................ 217 AIR FLOW ........................................... 117
Function/information .................... 182 Air vents
Active Driving Assistance package .. 182 Glove box ....................................... 121
Active Lane Keeping Assist Important safety notes .................. 121
Activating/deactivating (on- Rear ............................................... 121
board computer) ............................ 197 Setting ........................................... 121
Display message ............................ 217 Setting the center air vents ........... 121
Function/information .................... 184 Setting the side air vents ............... 121
Active multicontour seat Air-conditioning system
Adjusting (on the seat) ..................... 97 see Climate control
Active Parking Assist AIRMATIC
Detecting parking spaces .............. 166 Display message ............................ 215
Display message ............................ 217 Function/notes ............................. 159
Exiting a parking space .................. 168 Alarm
Function/notes ............................. 165 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 75
Important safety notes .................. 165 Switching off (ATA) .......................... 75
Index 5
Switching the function on/off Automatic engine start (ECO start/

(ATA) ................................................ 75 stop function) .................................... 127
Alarm system Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) start/stop function) .......................... 126
Ambient lighting Automatic headlamp mode .............. 105
Setting the brightness (on-board Automatic transmission
computer) ...................................... 198 Accelerator pedal position ............. 133
Setting the color (on-board com- Automatic drive program ............... 135
puter) ............................................. 198 Changing gear ............................... 133
AMG adaptive sport suspension DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 130
system ................................................ 161 Display message ............................ 223
Anti-lock braking system Drive program display .................... 130
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Driving tips .................................... 133
Anti-Theft Alarm system Emergency running mode .............. 138
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Engaging drive position .................. 132
Ashtray ............................................... 252 Engaging neutral ............................ 131
Assistance display (on-board com- Engaging park position
puter) .................................................. 195 (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. 130
Assistance menu (on-board com- Engaging park position automati-
puter) .................................................. 195 cally ............................................... 131
ASSYST PLUS Engaging reverse gear ................... 131
Displaying a service message ........ 270 Engaging the park position ............ 131
Hiding a service message .............. 269 Kickdown ....................................... 133
Resetting the service interval dis- Manual drive program .................... 135
play ................................................ 270 Manual drive program (Mercedes-
Service message ............................ 269 AMG vehicles) ................................ 136
Special service requirements ......... 270 Manual drive program (vehicles
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) with Sports package AMG) ............ 136
Activating/deactivating ................... 75 Overview ........................................ 129
Function ........................................... 75 Problem (malfunction) ................... 138
Switching off the alarm .................... 75 Program selector button ................ 133
ATTENTION ASSIST Pulling away ................................... 125
Activating/deactivating ................. 196 Selector lever ................................ 129
Display message ............................ 215 Starting the engine ........................ 125
Function/notes ............................. 177 Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 135
Audio 20 Transmission position display ........ 129
Switching on/off ........................... 237 Transmission position display
Audio system (DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 130
see separate operating instructions Transmission positions .................. 132
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Automatic transmission emer-
see Qualified specialist workshop gency mode ....................................... 138
Authorized workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop B
AUTO lights
Back button ....................................... 237
Display message ............................ 212
see Lights BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 65
Automatic car wash (care) ............... 270
6 Index
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic

PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist Assist ............................................... 65
Function/notes ................................ 65 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 326
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist Display message ............................ 204
(Brake Assist PLUS with Cross- High-performance brake system .... 146
Traffic Assist) HOLD function ............................... 157
Important safety notes .................... 65 Important safety notes .................. 145
Battery (SmartKey) Maintenance .................................. 145
Checking .......................................... 79 Parking brake ................................ 142
Important safety notes .................... 78 Riding tips ...................................... 145
Replacing ......................................... 79 Warning lamp ................................. 228
Battery (vehicle) Breakdown
Charging ........................................ 284 Where will I find...? ........................ 277
Display message ............................ 214 see Flat tire
Important safety notes .................. 282 see Towing away
Jump starting ................................. 285 Brightness control (instrument
Belt cluster lighting) ................................... 34
see Seat belts
Blind Spot Assist C
Activating/deactivating (on-
California
board computer) ............................ 196
Display message ............................ 217 Important notice for retail cus-
Notes/function .............................. 179 tomers and lessees .......................... 26
Calling up a malfunction
see Active Blind Spot Assist
see Display messages
Blootooth®
Car
Connecting a different mobile
see Vehicle
phone ............................................ 241
Care
Bluetooth®
360° camera ................................. 274
Searching for a mobile phone ........ 240 Car wash ........................................ 270
see also Digital Operator's Man- Carpets .......................................... 276
ual .................................................. 236 Display ........................................... 274
Telephony ...................................... 239 Exhaust pipe .................................. 274
Box (trunk) ......................................... 246 Exterior lights ................................ 273
Brake Assist Interior ........................................... 274
see BAS (Brake Assist System) Matte finish ................................... 272
Brake fluid Notes ............................................. 270
Display message ............................ 206 Paint .............................................. 272
Notes ............................................. 326 Plastic trim .................................... 275
Brake force distribution Power washer ................................ 271
see EBD (electronic brake force Rear view camera .......................... 274
distribution) Roof lining ...................................... 276
Brake lamps Seat belt ........................................ 276
Display message ............................ 212 Seat cover ..................................... 275
Brakes Selector lever ................................ 275
ABS .................................................. 64 Sensors ......................................... 274
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 68 Steering wheel ............................... 275
BAS .................................................. 65 Trim pieces .................................... 275
Index 7
Washing by hand ........................... 271 Maximum cooling .......................... 119

Wheels ........................................... 273 Overview of systems ...................... 112
Windows ........................................ 273 Problem with the rear window
Wiper blades .................................. 273 defroster ........................................ 120
Wooden trim .................................. 275 Problems with cooling with air
Cargo tie down rings ......................... 246 dehumidification ............................ 117
CD Rear control panel ......................... 114
see also Digital Operator's Man- Refrigerant ..................................... 327
ual .................................................. 236 Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 328
CD player (on-board computer) ........ 193 Setting the air distribution ............. 118
Center console Setting the air vents ...................... 121
Lower section .................................. 37 Setting the airflow ......................... 118
Lower section (AMG vehicles) .......... 38 Setting the climate mode (AIR
Upper section .................................. 36 FLOW) ............................................ 117
Central locking Setting the temperature ................ 117
Automatic locking (on-board com- Setting the temperature with 3-
puter) ............................................. 199 zone automatic climate control ..... 117
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 76 Setting the temperature with dual-
Child zone automatic climate control ..... 117
Restraint system .............................. 59 Switching air-recirculation mode
Child seat on/off ............................................ 120
Forward-facing restraint system ...... 62 Switching on/off ........................... 116
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat Switching residual heat on/off ...... 120
anchors ............................................ 60 Switching the rear window
On the front-passenger seat ............ 61 defroster on/off ............................ 119
Rearward-facing restraint system .... 62 Switching the ZONE function on/
Top Tether ....................................... 60 off .................................................. 118
Child-proof locks Cockpit
Important safety notes .................... 62 Overview .......................................... 33
Rear doors ....................................... 63 see Instrument cluster
Children Collapsible spare wheel
Special seat belt retractor ............... 58 Inflating ......................................... 319
Cigarette lighter ................................ 252 see Emergency spare wheel
Cleaning COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
Mirror turn signal ........................... 274 PLUS
Climate control Activating/deactivating ................. 196
Automatic climate control (3- Display message ............................ 206
zone) .............................................. 114 Operation/notes .............................. 67
Controlling automatically ............... 117 COMAND
Cooling with air dehumidification .. 116 Switching on/off ........................... 237
Defrosting the windows ................. 119 COMAND display
Defrosting the windshield .............. 118 Cleaning ......................................... 274
Dual-zone automatic climate con- Combination switch .......................... 106
trol ................................................. 112 Connecting a USB device
General notes ................................ 112 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Indicator lamp ................................ 117 ual .................................................. 236
Information about using auto- Consumption statistics (on-board
matic climate control ..................... 115 computer) .......................................... 191
8 Index
Controller ........................................... 237 Daytime running lamps

Convenience box ............................... 246 Display message ............................ 212
Convenience closing feature .............. 88 Function/notes ............................. 105
Convenience opening feature ............ 88 Switching on/off (on-board com-
Coolant (engine) puter) ............................................. 198
Checking the level ......................... 268 Declarations of conformity ................. 28
Display message ............................ 213 Delayed switch-off
Filling capacity ............................... 327 Exterior lighting (on-board com-
Important safety notes .................. 326 puter) ............................................. 198
Temperature (on-board computer, Interior lighting .............................. 199
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 201 Diagnostics connection ...................... 29
Temperature gauge ........................ 188 Digital Operator's Manual
Warning lamp ................................. 232 Help ................................................. 24
Cooling Introduction ..................................... 24
see Climate control Digital speedometer ......................... 191
Copyright ............................................. 32 DIRECT SELECT lever
Cornering light function Automatic transmission ................. 130
Display message ............................ 212 Display messages
Function/notes ............................. 107 ASSYST PLUS ................................ 269
Cruise control Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 203
Activation conditions ..................... 148 Driving systems ............................. 215
Cruise control lever ....................... 148 Engine ............................................ 213
Deactivating ................................... 149 General notes ................................ 203
Display message ............................ 220 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 203
Driving system ............................... 148 KEYLESS-GO .................................. 225
Function/notes ............................. 148 Lights ............................................. 212
Important safety notes .................. 148 Safety systems .............................. 204
Setting a speed .............................. 149 SmartKey ....................................... 225
Storing and maintaining current Tires ............................................... 221
speed ............................................. 148 Vehicle ........................................... 223
Cup holder Distance recorder ............................. 190
Center console .............................. 249 Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 234
Center console in the rear com- Distance warning function
partment ........................................ 249 Function/notes ................................ 68
Important safety notes .................. 248 DISTRONIC PLUS
Rear compartment ......................... 249 Activating ....................................... 151
Customer Assistance Center Activation conditions ..................... 151
(CAC) ..................................................... 29 Deactivating ................................... 155
Customer Relations Department ....... 29 Display message ............................ 218
Displays in the multifunction dis-
D play ................................................ 154
Function/notes ............................. 149
Dashboard Important safety notes .................. 150
see Instrument cluster Setting the specified minimum
Data distance ......................................... 153
see Technical data Stopping ........................................ 153
Data carrier
Selecting ........................................ 193
Index 9
Doors Driving system

Automatic locking (on-board com- RACE START (Mercedes-AMG
puter) ............................................. 199 vehicles) ........................................ 158
Automatic locking (switch) ............... 82 Driving systems
Central locking/unlocking 360°camera .................................. 173
(SmartKey) ....................................... 76 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 182
Control panel ................................... 40 Active Driving Assistance pack-
Display message ............................ 224 age ................................................. 182
Emergency locking ........................... 83 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 184
Emergency unlocking ....................... 83 Active Parking Assist ..................... 165
Important safety notes .................... 81 AIRMATIC ...................................... 159
Opening (from inside) ...................... 81 AMG adaptive sport suspension
Drinking and driving ......................... 143 system ........................................... 161
Drive program ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 177
Automatic ...................................... 135 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 179
Display ........................................... 129 Cruise control ................................ 148
Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 130 Display message ............................ 215
Manual ........................................... 135 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 149
Manual (Mercedes-AMG vehi- DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering
cles) ............................................... 136 Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 155
Manual (vehicles with Sports HOLD function ............................... 157
package AMG) ............................... 136 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 181
SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 201 Lane Tracking package .................. 179
Drive program selector ..................... 134 PARKTRONIC ................................. 163
Driver's door Rear view camera .......................... 169
see Doors Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 178
Driving abroad Driving tips
Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 270 AMG ceramic brakes ..................... 146
Driving on flooded roads .................. 147 Automatic transmission ................. 133
Driving safety systems Brakes ........................................... 145
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 64 Break-in period .............................. 122
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 72 Downhill gradient ........................... 145
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 68 Drinking and driving ....................... 143
BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 65 Driving in winter ............................. 147
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Driving on flooded roads ................ 147
Assist ............................................... 65 Driving on wet roads ...................... 147
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST Exhaust check ............................... 144
PLUS ................................................ 67 Fuel ................................................ 143
Distance warning function ............... 67 General .......................................... 143
EBD (electronic brake force distri- Hydroplaning ................................. 147
bution) ............................................. 72 Icy road surfaces ........................... 147
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Limited braking efficiency on sal-
gram) ............................................... 69 ted roads ....................................... 145
Important safety information ........... 64 Snow chains .................................. 294
Overview .......................................... 64 Wet road surface ........................... 145
PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 72 DVD video
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 193
10 Index
see also Digital Operator's Man- Engine

ual .................................................. 236 Check Engine warning lamp ........... 232
Display message ............................ 213
E ECO start/stop function ................ 126
Engine number ............................... 323
EASY-ENTRY feature
Irregular running ............................ 128
Activating/deactivating ................. 199
Jump-starting ................................. 285
Function/notes ............................. 100
Starting problems .......................... 128
EASY-EXIT feature
Starting the engine with the
Crash-responsive ........................... 100
SmartKey ....................................... 125
Function/notes ............................. 100
Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 125
Switching on/off ........................... 199
Switching off .................................. 141
EASY-PACK trunk box ....................... 246
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 290
EBD (electronic brake force distri- Engine electronics
bution)
Problem (malfunction) ................... 128
Display message ............................ 205 Engine jump starting
Function/notes ................................ 72 see Jump starting (engine)
ECO display Engine oil
Function/notes ............................. 144 Adding ........................................... 267
On-board computer ....................... 191 Additives ........................................ 326
ECO start/stop function
Checking the oil level ..................... 267
Automatic engine start .................. 127 Checking the oil level using the
Automatic engine switch-off .......... 126 dipstick .......................................... 267
Deactivating/activating ................. 127 Display message ............................ 214
General information ....................... 126 Filling capacity ............................... 326
Important safety notes .................. 126 Notes about oil grades ................... 325
Introduction ................................... 126 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 267
Electronic Stability Program
Temperature (on-board computer,
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 201
Emergency Entering an address
Automatic measures after an acci- see also Digital Operator's Man-
dent ................................................. 58 ual .................................................. 236
Emergency release ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
Driver's door .................................... 83 gram)
Fuel filler flap ................................. 140 AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 201
Trunk ............................................... 86 Characteristics ................................. 70
Vehicle ............................................. 83 Deactivating/activating (button
Emergency spare wheel
in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............. 71
General notes ................................ 318 Deactivating/activating (except
Important safety notes .................. 317 Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) ................. 70
Removing ....................................... 318
Deactivating/activating (on-
Storage location ............................ 318
board computer, except
Stowing .......................................... 319
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 195
Technical data ............................... 318
Display message ............................ 204
Emergency Tensioning Devices
Function/notes ................................ 69
Activation ......................................... 53
General notes .................................. 69
Emissions control
Important safety information ........... 69
Service and warranty information .... 26
Trailer stabilization ........................... 72
Index 11
Warning lamp ................................. 229 Notes for CLS 400, CLS 400
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- 4MATIC .......................................... 325
tem) ...................................................... 69 Problem (malfunction) ................... 140
Exhaust check ................................... 144 Refueling ........................................ 138
Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc- Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 324
tions) .................................................. 274 Fuel filler flap
Exterior lighting Emergency release ........................ 140
Setting options .............................. 105 Opening ......................................... 139
see Lights Fuel level
Exterior mirrors Calling up the range (on-board
Adjusting ....................................... 101 computer) ...................................... 191
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 102 Fuel tank
Folding in when locking (on-board Capacity ........................................ 324
computer) ...................................... 200 Problem (malfunction) ................... 140
Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 102 Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool
Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 101 kit) ...................................................... 277
Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 102 Fuses
Setting ........................................... 101 Allocation chart ............................. 290
Storing settings (memory func- Before changing ............................. 290
tion) ............................................... 104 Fuse box in the engine compart-
Storing the parking position .......... 102 ment .............................................. 291
Eyeglasses compartment ................. 243 Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 291
Important safety notes .................. 290
F
G
Favorites
Overview ........................................ 238 Garage door opener
Filler cap Clearing the memory ..................... 263
see Refueling General notes ................................ 261
Flat tire Important safety notes .................. 261
MOExtended tires .......................... 278 Opening/closing the garage door .. 263
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 278 Problems when programming ........ 263
TIREFIT kit ...................................... 279 Programming (button in the rear-
see Emergency spare wheel view mirror) ................................... 261
Floormats ........................................... 264 Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 262
Frequencies Gasoline ............................................. 324
Mobile phone ................................. 321 Gear indicator (on-board com-
Two-way radio ................................ 321 puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 201
Fuel Genuine parts ...................................... 25
Additives ........................................ 325 Glove box ........................................... 243
Consumption statistics .................. 191 Google™ Local Search
Displaying the current consump- see also Digital Operator's Man-
tion ................................................ 191 ual .................................................. 236
Displaying the range ...................... 191
Driving tips .................................... 143 H
Fuel gauge ....................................... 34
Handbrake
Grade (gasoline) ............................ 324
see Parking brake
12 Index
Hazard warning lamps ...................... 107 Indicators

Head bags see Turn signals
Display message ............................ 209 Insect protection on the radiator .... 266
Head restraints Instrument cluster
Adjusting ......................................... 95 Overview .......................................... 34
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 95 Settings ......................................... 197
Adjusting (rear) ................................ 95 Warning and indicator lamps ........... 34
Installing/removing (rear) ................ 96 Instrument cluster lighting .............. 198
Luxury .............................................. 95 Interior lighting
see NECK-PRO head restraints Automatic control .......................... 109
see NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Control ........................................... 109
Headlamps Delayed switch-off (on-board
Fogging up ..................................... 108 computer) ...................................... 199
see Automatic headlamp mode Overview ........................................ 108
Heating Reading lamp ................................. 108
see Climate control Setting the brightness of the
High beam flasher ............................. 106 ambient lighting (on-board com-
High-beam headlamps puter) ............................................. 198
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 107 Setting the brightness of the dis-
Display message ............................ 212 play/switch (on-board computer) .. 198
Switching on/off ........................... 106 Setting the color of the ambient
Hill start assist .................................. 125 lighting (on-board computer) ......... 198
HOLD function iPod®
Activating ....................................... 158 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Deactivating ................................... 158 ual .................................................. 236
Display message ............................ 216
Function/notes ............................. 157 J
Home address
Jack
ual .................................................. 236 Storage location ............................ 277
Hood Using ............................................. 313
Closing ........................................... 266 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 285
Display message ............................ 224
Important safety notes .................. 265 K
Opening ......................................... 265 Key positions
Horn ...................................................... 33 KEYLESS-GO .................................. 123
Hydroplaning ..................................... 147 SmartKey ....................................... 123
KEYLESS-GO
I Activating ......................................... 76
Ignition lock Convenience closing feature ............ 89
Deactivation ..................................... 76
see Key positions
Display message ............................ 225
Immobilizer .......................................... 74
Locking ............................................ 76
Indicator and warning lamps
Removing the Start/Stop button ... 124
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
Start/Stop button .......................... 123
PLUS .............................................. 234
Starting the engine ........................ 125
Indicator lamps
Unlocking ......................................... 76
see Warning and indicator lamps
Index 13
Kickdown Switching the exterior lighting

Driving tips .................................... 133 delayed switch-off on/off (on-
Manual drive program .................... 137 board computer) ............................ 198
Knee bag .............................................. 47 Switching the surround lighting
on/off (on-board computer) .......... 198
L Turn signals ................................... 106
see Interior lighting
Lamps
Loading guidelines ............................ 242
see Warning and indicator lamps Locking
Lane Keeping Assist
see Central locking
Activating/deactivating ................. 197 Locking (doors)
Display message ............................ 217
Automatic ........................................ 82
Function/information .................... 181
Emergency locking ........................... 83
Lane Tracking package ..................... 179
From inside (central locking but-
Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 201 ton) .................................................. 82
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat Locking centrally
anchors ................................................ 60 see Central locking
License plate lamp (display mes- Locking verification signal (on-
sage) ................................................... 212 board computer) ............................... 199
Light function, active Low-beam headlamps
Display message ............................ 212 Display message ............................ 212
Light sensor (display message) ....... 212 Switching on/off ........................... 106
Lights Lumbar support
Activating/deactivating the inte- Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
rior lighting delayed switch-off ....... 199 port .................................................. 97
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 107 Luxury head restraints ....................... 95
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 105
Cornering light function ................. 107 M
Fogged up headlamps .................... 108
General notes ................................ 105 M+S tires ............................................ 294
Hazard warning lamps ................... 107 Malfunction message
High beam flasher .......................... 106 see Display messages
High-beam headlamps ................... 106 Matte finish (cleaning instruc-
Light switch ................................... 105 tions) .................................................. 272
Low-beam headlamps .................... 106 mbrace
Parking lamps ................................ 106 Call priority .................................... 257
Setting exterior lighting ................. 105 Display message ............................ 206
Setting the brightness of the Downloading destinations
ambient lighting (on-board com- (COMAND) ..................................... 257
puter) ............................................. 198 Downloading routes ....................... 260
Setting the brightness of the dis- Emergency call .............................. 255
play/switch (on-board computer) .. 198 General notes ................................ 254
Setting the color of the ambient Geo fencing ................................... 261
lighting (on-board computer) ......... 198 Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 259
Standing lamps .............................. 106 MB info call button ........................ 257
Switching the daytime running Remote fault diagnosis .................. 259
lamps on/off (on-board com- Remote vehicle locking .................. 259
puter) ............................................. 198 Roadside Assistance button .......... 256
14 Index
Search & Send ............................... 258 Mobile phone

Self-test ......................................... 254 Connecting (Bluetooth® inter-
Speed alert .................................... 260 face) .............................................. 239
System .......................................... 254 Connecting another mobile
Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 261 phone ............................................ 241
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 259 Frequencies ................................... 321
Mechanical key Installation ..................................... 321
Function/notes ................................ 78 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 194
General notes .................................. 78 Transmission output (maximum) .... 321
Inserting .......................................... 78 Modifying the programming
Locking vehicle ................................ 83 (SmartKey) ........................................... 77
Removing ......................................... 78 MOExtended tires .............................. 278
Unlocking the driver's door .............. 83 Mounting wheels
Media Interface Lowering the vehicle ...................... 316
USB port in the armrest of the Mounting a new wheel ................... 315
center console ............................... 244 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 313
see Digital Operator's Manual Raising the vehicle ......................... 313
Memory card (audio) ......................... 193 Removing a wheel .......................... 315
Memory function ............................... 103 Securing the vehicle against roll-
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive ing away ........................................ 313
360°camera .................................. 173 MP3
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 182 Operation ....................................... 193
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 184 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Active Parking Assist ..................... 165 ual .................................................. 236
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 177 Multicontour seat
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 179 Adjusting (on the seat) ..................... 96
Cruise control ................................ 148 Multifunction display
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 149 Function/notes ............................. 190
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Permanent display ......................... 197
Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 155 Multifunction steering wheel
General notes ................................ 147 Operating the on-board computer .. 189
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 181 Overview .......................................... 35
PARKTRONIC ................................. 163 Multimedia system
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu- see Separate operating instructions
pant protection) ............................... 56 Music files
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory see also Digital Operator's Man-
occupant protection PLUS) .............. 57 ual .................................................. 236
Rear view camera .......................... 169
Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 178 N
Message memory (on-board com-
Navigation
puter) .................................................. 203
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 192
Messages
see Display messages ual .................................................. 236
Mirrors NECK-PRO head restraints
see Exterior mirrors Operation ......................................... 55
see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) Resetting triggered .......................... 56
Index 15
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Displaying a service message ........ 270

Important safety notes .................... 55 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 154
Operation ......................................... 55 Factory settings submenu ............. 200
Resetting when triggered ................. 56 Important safety notes .................. 188
Notes on breaking-in a new vehi- Instrument cluster submenu .......... 197
cle ....................................................... 122 Lighting submenu .......................... 198
Menu overview .............................. 190
O Message memory .......................... 203
Navigation menu ............................ 192
Occupant Classification System
Operation ....................................... 189
(OCS)
RACETIMER ................................... 201
Conditions ....................................... 49 Service menu ................................. 197
Faults ............................................... 52 Settings menu ............................... 197
Operation ......................................... 49 Standard display ............................ 190
System self-test ............................... 51 Telephone menu ............................ 194
Occupant safety
Trip menu ...................................... 190
Air bags ........................................... 46 Vehicle submenu ........................... 199
Automatic measures after an acci- Video DVD operation ..................... 193
dent ................................................. 58 Operating safety
Children in the vehicle ..................... 58 Declaration of conformity ................ 28
Important safety notes .................... 41 Important safety notes .................... 28
Introduction to the restraint sys- Operating system
tem .................................................. 41 see On-board computer
Occupant Classification System Operation
(OCS) ............................................... 49 Digital Operator's Manual ................ 24
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator Operator's Manual
lamps ............................................... 42 Vehicle equipment ........................... 26
Pets in the vehicle ........................... 63 Outside temperature display ........... 188
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu- Overhead control panel ...................... 39
pant protection) ............................... 56 Override feature
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory Rear side windows ........................... 63
occupant protection PLUS) .............. 57
Restraint system warning lamp ........ 42 P
Seat belt .......................................... 42
OCS Paint code number ............................ 322
Conditions ....................................... 49 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 272
Faults ............................................... 52 Panic alarm .......................................... 41
Operation ......................................... 49 Parking
System self-test ............................... 51 Important safety notes .................. 141
Odometer ........................................... 190 Parking brake ................................ 142
Oil Parking position for the exterior
see Engine oil mirror on the front-passenger
On-board computer side ................................................ 102
AMG menu ..................................... 201 Rear view camera .......................... 169
Assistance menu ........................... 195 see PARKTRONIC
Audio menu ................................... 193 Parking aid
Convenience submenu .................. 199 Active Parking Assist ..................... 165
Display messages .......................... 203 see Exterior mirrors
16 Index
see PARKTRONIC Protection against theft

Parking assistance ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 75
see PARKTRONIC Immobilizer ...................................... 74
Parking brake Protection of the environment
Display message ............................ 205 General notes .................................. 25
Notes/function .............................. 142 Pulling away
Warning lamp ................................. 228 General notes ................................ 125
Parking lamps Pulling away (automatic transmis-
Switching on/off ........................... 106 sion) .................................................... 125
PARKTRONIC
Deactivating/activating ................. 165 Q
Driving system ............................... 163
QR code
Function/notes ............................. 163
Important safety notes .................. 163 Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1
Problem (malfunction) ................... 165 Rescue card ..................................... 30
Range of the sensors ..................... 163 Qualified specialist workshop ........... 29
Warning display ............................. 164
PASSENGER AIR BAG R
Display message ............................ 210 RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF cles) .................................................... 158
Indicator lamp .................................. 42 RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 201
Problems (malfunctions) ................ 210 Radiator cover ................................... 266
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 63 Radio
Phone book Selecting a station ......................... 193
see also Digital Operator's Man- see separate operating instructions
ual .................................................. 236 Radio mode
Plastic trim (cleaning instruc- see also Digital Operator's Man-
tions) .................................................. 275 ual .................................................. 236
Power washers .................................. 271 Radio-wave reception/transmis-
Power windows sion in the vehicle
see Side windows Declaration of conformity ................ 28
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant Reading lamp ..................................... 108
protection) Rear compartment
Display message ............................ 206 Setting the air vents ...................... 121
Operation ......................................... 56 Setting the airflow ......................... 118
PRE-SAFE® Brake Setting the temperature ................ 117
Activating/deactivating ................. 196 Rear fog lamp
Display message ............................ 207 Display message ............................ 212
Function/notes ................................ 72 Rear seat (folding the backrest for-
Important safety notes .................... 73 wards/back) ...................................... 245
Warning lamp ................................. 234 Rear seats
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory Display message ............................ 225
occupant protection PLUS) Rear view camera
Display message ............................ 207 Cleaning instructions ..................... 274
Operation ......................................... 57 Display in the multimedia system .. 170
Program selector button .................. 133 Function/notes ............................. 169
Switching on/off ........................... 170
Index 17
Rear window blind ............................ 251 Route guidance

Rear window defroster see also Digital Operator's Man-
Problem (malfunction) ................... 120 ual .................................................. 236
Switching on/off ........................... 119
Rear-view mirror S
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 102
Safety
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
Children in the vehicle ..................... 58
tem)
see Occupant safety
Safety system
Refueling
see Driving safety systems
Fuel gauge ....................................... 34
SD card
Inserting ........................................ 241
Refueling process .......................... 139
Inserting/removing ........................ 241
see Fuel
Removing ....................................... 241
Remote control
SD memory card
Garage door opener ....................... 261
Programming (garage door
ual .................................................. 236
opener) .......................................... 261
Selecting ........................................ 193
Replacing bulbs
Search & Send
General notes ................................ 109
Reporting safety defects .................... 29
ual .................................................. 236
Rescue card ......................................... 30 Seat belts
Reserve (fuel tank)
Adjusting the driver's and front-
see Fuel passenger seat belt ......................... 45
Reserve fuel
Adjusting the height ......................... 44
Display message ............................ 215 Cleaning ......................................... 276
Warning lamp ................................. 232 Correct usage .................................. 44
see Fuel Fastening ......................................... 44
Residual heat (climate control) ........ 120 Important safety guidelines ............. 43
Restraint system Introduction ..................................... 42
Display message ............................ 208 Releasing ......................................... 45
Introduction ..................................... 41 Switching belt adjustment on/off
Problem (malfunction) ................... 231 (on-board computer) ...................... 200
Warning lamp (function) ................... 42 Warning lamp ................................. 227
Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... 129 Warning lamp (function) ................... 45
Reversing feature Seats
Side windows ................................... 87 Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 94
Sliding sunroof ................................. 90 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
Trunk lid ........................................... 83 port .................................................. 97
Reversing lamps (display mes- Adjusting the active multicontour
sage) ................................................... 212 seat .................................................. 97
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 27 Adjusting the head restraint ............ 95
Roller sunblind Adjusting the multicontour seat ....... 96
Rear window .................................. 251 Cleaning the cover ......................... 275
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning Correct driver's seat position ........... 93
guidelines) ......................................... 276 Important safety notes .................... 93
Roof load (maximum) ........................ 328 Overview .......................................... 93
18 Index
Seat heating .................................... 97 Side windows

Seat heating problem ...................... 98 Cleaning ......................................... 273
Storing settings (memory func- Convenience closing feature ............ 88
tion) ............................................... 104 Convenience opening feature .......... 88
Switching seat heating on/off ......... 97 Important safety information ........... 87
Switching seat ventilation on/ Opening/closing .............................. 87
off .................................................... 98 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 89
Section Resetting ......................................... 89
Trunk ............................................... 83 Reversing feature ............................. 87
Securing a load SIRIUS services
see Securing cargo see also Digital Operator's Man-
Securing cargo .................................. 246 ual .................................................. 236
Selector lever Sliding sunroof
Cleaning ......................................... 275 Important safety notes .................... 90
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 274 Opening/closing .............................. 91
Service menu (on-board com- Problem (malfunction) ..................... 91
puter) .................................................. 197 Resetting ......................................... 91
Service message SmartKey
see ASSYST PLUS Changing the battery ....................... 79
Service products Changing the programming ............. 77
Brake fluid ..................................... 326 Checking the battery ....................... 79
Coolant (engine) ............................ 326 Convenience closing feature ............ 88
Engine oil ....................................... 325 Convenience opening feature .......... 88
Fuel ................................................ 324 Display message ............................ 225
Important safety notes .................. 323 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 76
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- Important safety notes .................... 76
tem) ............................................... 327 Loss ................................................. 80
Washer fluid ................................... 327 Mechanical key ................................ 78
Setting the air distribution ............... 118 Overview .......................................... 76
Setting the airflow ............................ 118 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 123
Setting the date/time format Problem (malfunction) ..................... 80
see also Digital Operator's Man- Starting the engine ........................ 125
ual .................................................. 236 SMS
Setting the language see also Digital Operator's Man-
see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 236
ual .................................................. 236 Snow chains ...................................... 294
Setting the time Sockets
see also Digital Operator's Man- Center console .............................. 253
ual .................................................. 236 General notes ................................ 253
Settings Rear compartment ......................... 254
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 200 Sound
On-board computer ....................... 197 Switching on/off ........................... 237
SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 201 Spare wheel
Side impact air bag ............................. 47 Stowing .......................................... 319
Side marker lamp (display mes- Special seat belt retractor .................. 58
sage) ................................................... 212 Specialist workshop ............................ 29
Speed, controlling
see Cruise control
Index 19
Speedometer Under driver's seat/front-

Digital ............................................ 191 passenger seat .............................. 244
In the Instrument cluster ................. 34 Stowage net ....................................... 245
Segments ...................................... 188 Stowage well beneath the trunk
Selecting the display unit ............... 197 floor .................................................... 247
SPORT handling mode Summer tires ..................................... 294
Deactivating/activating Sun visor ............................................ 250
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................ 71 Surround lighting (on-board com-
Warning lamp ................................. 231 puter) .................................................. 198
Standing lamps Suspension setting
Display message ............................ 212 AIRMATIC ...................................... 160
Switching on/off ........................... 106 AMG adaptive sport suspension
Start/stop function system ........................................... 161
see ECO start/stop function Suspension settings
Starting (engine) ................................ 124 SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 201
Steering Switching air-recirculation mode
Display message ............................ 225 on/off ................................................. 120
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot Switching on media mode
(DISTRONIC PLUS) Via the device list .......................... 241
Activating/deactivating ................. 196
Display message ............................ 220 T
Steering wheel
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 99 Tachometer ........................................ 188
Button overview ............................... 35 Tail lamps
Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 189 Display message ............................ 212
Cleaning ......................................... 275 Tank
Important safety notes .................... 98 see Fuel tank
Paddle shifters ............................... 135 Tank content
Steering wheel heating .................... 99 Fuel gauge ....................................... 34
Storing settings (memory func- Technical data
tion) ............................................... 104 Capacities ...................................... 323
Steering wheel heating Emergency spare wheel ................. 318
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 99 Information .................................... 321
Switching on/off .............................. 99 Tires/wheels ................................. 317
Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 135 Vehicle data ................................... 328
Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 201 Telephone
Stowage areas ................................... 242 Accepting a call (multifunction
Stowage compartments steering wheel) .............................. 194
Armrest (under) ............................. 244 Authorizing a mobile phone (con-
Center console .............................. 243 necting) ......................................... 240
Center console (rear) ..................... 244 Connecting a mobile phone (gen-
Cup holders ................................... 248 eral information) ............................ 239
Eyeglasses compartment ............... 243 Display message ............................ 225
Glove box ....................................... 243 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 194
Important safety information ......... 242 Number from the phone book ........ 194
Rear ............................................... 244 Redialing ........................................ 195
Stowage net ................................... 245 Rejecting/ending a call ................. 194
20 Index
see also Digital Operator's Man- Average weight of the vehicle

ual .................................................. 236 occupants (definition) .................... 310
Switching between mobile Bar (definition) ............................... 310
phones ........................................... 241 Changing a wheel .......................... 312
Temperature Characteristics .............................. 310
Coolant .......................................... 188 Checking ........................................ 292
Coolant (on-board computer, Curb weight (definition) ................. 311
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 201 Definition of terms ......................... 310
Engine oil (on-board computer, Direction of rotation ...................... 313
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 201 Display message ............................ 221
Outside temperature ...................... 188 Distribution of the vehicle occu-
Setting (climate control) ................ 117 pants (definition) ............................ 312
Through-loading feature ................... 245 DOT (Department of Transporta-
Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 201 tion) (definition) ............................. 310
Tire pressure DOT, Tire Identification Number
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 299 (TIN) ............................................... 309
Checking manually ........................ 298 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Display message ............................ 221 (definition) ..................................... 310
Maximum ....................................... 298 GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-
Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 281 inition) ........................................... 311
Notes ............................................. 297 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 281 ing) (definition) .............................. 311
Recommended ............................... 295 Important safety notes .................. 292
Using the TIREFIT kit ...................... 280 Increased vehicle weight due to
Tire pressure loss warning system optional equipment (definition) ...... 310
General notes ................................ 298 Information on driving .................... 292
Important safety notes .................. 298 Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 311
Restarting ...................................... 299 Labeling (overview) ........................ 307
Tire pressure monitor Load bearing index (definition) ...... 312
Checking the tire pressure elec- Load index ..................................... 309
tronically ........................................ 301 Load index (definition) ................... 311
Function/notes ............................. 299 Maximum load on a tire (defini-
General notes ................................ 299 tion) ............................................... 311
Important safety notes .................. 300 Maximum loaded vehicle weight
Radio type approval for the tire (definition) ..................................... 311
pressure monitor ........................... 302 Maximum permissible tire pres-
Restarting ...................................... 302 sure (definition) ............................. 311
Warning lamp ................................. 235 Maximum tire load ......................... 309
Warning message .......................... 301 Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 311
Tire-change tool kit ........................... 277 MOExtended tires .......................... 294
TIREFIT kit .......................................... 279 Optional equipment weight (defi-
Important safety notes .................. 279 nition) ............................................ 312
Storage location ............................ 277 PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-
Tire pressure not reached .............. 281 inition) ........................................... 311
Tire pressure reached .................... 281 Replacing ....................................... 312
Using ............................................. 280 Service life ..................................... 293
Tires Sidewall (definition) ....................... 311
Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 311 Speed rating (definition) ................ 311
Index 21
Storing ........................................... 313 Instrument cluster display ............. 178

Structure and characteristics Transfer case ..................................... 138
(definition) ..................................... 310 Transmission
Temperature .................................. 306 see Automatic transmission
TIN (Tire Identification Number) Transmission position display ......... 130
(definition) ..................................... 312 Transmission position display
Tire bead (definition) ...................... 311 (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 130
Tire pressure (definition) ................ 311 Transporting the vehicle .................. 289
Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 310 Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-
Tire size (data) ............................... 317 tions) .................................................. 275
Tire size designation, load-bearing Trip computer (on-board com-
capacity, speed rating .................... 307 puter) .................................................. 191
Tire tread ....................................... 293 Trip odometer
Tire tread (definition) ..................... 311 Calling up ....................................... 190
Total load limit (definition) ............. 312 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 191
Traction ......................................... 306 Trunk
Traction (definition) ....................... 312 Emergency release .......................... 86
Tread wear ..................................... 306 Important safety notes .................... 83
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Opening/closing (automatically
Standards ...................................... 305 from inside) ...................................... 85
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Opening/closing (automatically
Standards (definition) .................... 310 from outside) ................................... 84
Wear indicator (definition) ............. 312 Opening/closing (manually from
Wheel and tire combination ........... 317 outside) ............................................ 84
Wheel rim (definition) .................... 310 Trunk lid
see Flat tire Display message ............................ 224
Top Tether ............................................ 60 Opening dimensions ...................... 328
Tow-starting Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 328
Emergency engine starting ............ 290 Turn signals
Important safety notes .................. 287 Display message ............................ 212
Towing a trailer Switching on/off ........................... 106
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Two-way radio
gram) ............................................... 72 Frequencies ................................... 321
Towing away Installation ..................................... 321
Important safety guidelines ........... 287 Transmission output (maximum) .... 321
Installing the towing eye ................ 288 Type identification plate
Removing the towing eye ............... 289 see Vehicle identification plate
Transporting the vehicle ................ 289
With both axles on the ground ....... 289 U
With the rear axle raised ................ 289
Towing eye ......................................... 277 Unlocking
Traffic reports Emergency unlocking ....................... 83
see also Digital Operator's Man- From inside the vehicle (central
ual .................................................. 236 unlocking button) ............................. 82
Traffic Sign Assist Upshift indicator (on-board com-
Display message ............................ 216 puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 201
Function/notes ............................. 178
22 Index
USB devices W
Connecting to the Media Inter-
face ............................................... 241 Warning and indicator lamps
ABS ................................................ 229
V Brakes ........................................... 228
Check Engine ................................. 232
Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 251 Coolant .......................................... 232
Vehicle Distance warning ........................... 234
Correct use ...................................... 29 ESP® .............................................. 229
Data acquisition ............................... 30 ESP® OFF ....................................... 230
Display message ............................ 223 Fuel tank ........................................ 232
Equipment ....................................... 26 General notes ................................ 226
Individual settings .......................... 197 Overview .......................................... 34
Limited Warranty ............................. 30 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ............... 42
Loading .......................................... 302 Reserve fuel ................................... 232
Locking (in an emergency) ............... 83 Restraint system ............................ 231
Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 76 Seat belt ........................................ 227
Lowering ........................................ 316 SPORT handling mode ................... 231
Maintenance .................................... 27 Tire pressure monitor .................... 235
Parking for a long period ................ 143 Warranty .............................................. 26
Pulling away ................................... 125 Washer fluid
Raising ........................................... 313 Display message ............................ 225
Reporting problems ......................... 29 Weather display (COMAND)
Securing from rolling away ............ 313 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Towing away .................................. 287 ual .................................................. 236
Transporting .................................. 289 Wheel and tire combinations
Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 83 Tires ............................................... 317
Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 76 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 316
Vehicle data ................................... 328 Wheel chock ...................................... 313
Vehicle data ....................................... 328 Wheels
Vehicle dimensions ........................... 328 Changing a wheel .......................... 312
Vehicle emergency locking ................ 83 Checking ........................................ 292
Vehicle identification number Cleaning ......................................... 273
see VIN Emergency spare wheel ................. 317
Vehicle identification plate .............. 322 Important safety notes .................. 292
Vehicle level Information on driving .................... 292
AIRMATIC ...................................... 159 Interchanging/changing ................ 312
Vehicle level (display message) ....... 215 Mounting a new wheel ................... 315
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 277 Mounting a wheel .......................... 313
Video Removing a wheel .......................... 315
Operating the DVD ......................... 193 Storing ........................................... 313
see also Digital Operator's Man- Tightening torque ........................... 316
ual .................................................. 236 Wheel size/tire size ....................... 317
VIN Window curtain air bag
Seat ............................................... 323 Operation ......................................... 49
Type plate ...................................... 322 Windows
Voice Control System see Side windows
see See also Digital Operator's Manual
Index 23
Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 118
Windshield washer fluid
see Windshield washer system
Windshield washer system
Adding washer fluid ....................... 269
Windshield wipers
Problem (malfunction) ................... 111
Replacing the wiper blades ............ 110
Switching on/off ........................... 109
Winter driving
Slippery road surfaces ................... 147
Snow chains .................................. 294
Winter operation
Radiator cover ............................... 266
Winter tires
M+S tires ....................................... 294
Wiper blades
Cleaning ......................................... 273
Replacing ....................................... 110
Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 275
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
Z
ZONE function
Switching on/off ........................... 118
24 Digital Operator's Manual
Introduction Operating the Digital Operator's Man-

ual
The printed Operator's Manual provides infor-
mation about the safe operation of your vehicle. General notes
The Digital Operator's Manual provides compre-
Please observe the information about the oper-
hensive and specifically adapted information on
ation of the controller (Y page 237).
your vehicle's equipment and multimedia sys-
tem. You can call up the Digital Operator's Man-
ual via the multimedia system. Content pages
i You will not incur any costs when calling up The content pages can be accessed by means of
the Digital Operator's Manual. The Digital a visual search, a keyword search or using the
Operator's Manual works without connecting contents.
to the Internet.
There are three ways to access the topics of the
Digital Operator's Manual:
RVisual search
The visual search allows you to explore your
vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the
vehicle exterior view or interior view, you can
access many of the different topics covered
by the Digital Operator's Manual. To access
the vehicle interior section, select the "Vehi-
cle interior" view.
RKeyword search
X To scroll forward/backward: turn 3 the
The keyword search allows you to search for a
controller.
keyword by entering characters.
X To display in full-screen or animation: slide
RContents
8 the controller to the left :.
You can select individual sections in the con-
tents. X To select information text or save book-
marks: slide 9 the controller to the
i The Digital Operator's Manual is deactiva- right ;.
ted for safety reasons while driving.
X To select a link: slide 6 the controller
downwards =.
X To exit a content page: select the %
Operation symbol ?.
Calling up the Digital Operator's Man- X To call up the basic menu of the Digital
ual Operator's Manual: select Þ symbol A.
X To switch functions to the multimedia
X Press the Ø button on the center console. system using the buttons on the center
The overview relating to the vehicle appears. console: press the $, %, Õ or Ø
X Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item by button.
turning 3 or pressing 7 the controller. The selected menu appears. The Digital Oper-
X Confirm 7 the message about the warning ator's Manual remains open in the back-
and safety notes. ground.
The basic menu for the Digital Operator's
Manual appears.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts 25
Protection of the environment Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
General notes
Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
Introduction
H Environmental note Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-
Daimler's declared policy is one of compre- tion.
hensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this Environmental concerns and recom-
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner mendations
that takes the requirements of both nature Wherever the operating instructions require you
and humanity into account. to dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or
You too can help to protect the environment re-use them. Observe the relevant environmen-
by operating your vehicle in an environmental rules and regulations when disposing of
materials. In this way you will help to protect the
tally responsible manner.
environment.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors: Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Roperating conditions of your vehicle
Ryour personal driving style H Environmental note
You can influence both factors. You should Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
bear the following in mind: assemblies and parts which are of the same
Operating conditions: quality as new parts. They are covered by the
same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-
parts.
sumption.
Ralways make sure that the tire pressures ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-
are correct. ces, as well as control units and sensors for
these restraint systems, may be installed in
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.
the following areas of your vehicle:
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
Rdoors
them. Rdoor pillars
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute Rdoor sills
to environmental protection. You should Rseats
therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rcockpit
Ralways have service work carried out at a Rinstrument cluster
qualified specialist workshop. Rcenter console
Personal driving style: Do not install accessories such as audio sys-
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs
or welding. You could impair the operating
starting the engine. efficiency of the restraint systems.
Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle Have aftermarket accessories installed at a
is stationary. qualified specialist workshop.
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance You could jeopardize the operating safety of
from the vehicle in front. your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and well as accessories relevant to safety which
have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This
braking.
could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant
Z
26 Service and vehicle operation
systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu- Service and vehicle operation
ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual-
ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that Warranty
have been specifically approved for your vehi-
Introduction
cle. The Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies in

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to accordance with the warranty terms and condi-
strict quality control. Every part has been spe- tions in the Service and Warranty Information
cifically developed, manufactured or selected booklet.
for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts replace and repair all factory-installed parts in
should be used. accordance with the following warranty terms
More than 300,000 different genuine and conditions:
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
Mercedes-Benz models. REmission System Warranty
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain REmission Performance Warranty
a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-
necessary service and repair work. In addition, setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island
strategically located parts delivery centers pro- and Vermont Emission Control System War-
vide quick and reliable parts service. ranty
Always specify the vehicle identification number RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon
(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz laws)
parts (Y page 322).
Replacement parts and accessories are covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories
warranties. These are available at any author-
Operator's Manual ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Vehicle equipment i Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have an authorized
i This Operator's Manual describes all models Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replace-
and all standard and optional equipment of ment. The new Service and Warranty Infor-
your vehicle available at the time of publica- mation booklet will be posted to you.
tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-
cific differences are possible. Bear in mind
that your vehicle may not feature all functions
described here. This also applies to safety- Information for customers in Califor-
relevant systems and functions. The equip- nia
ment in your vehicle may therefore differ from Under California law you may be entitled to a
that shown in the descriptions and illustra- replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the
tions. purchase price or lease price, if after a reason-
The original purchase agreement lists all sys- able number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz
tems installed in your vehicle. USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service
Should you have any questions concerning facilities fail to fix one or more substantial
equipment and operation, please consult an defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. covered by its express warranty.
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book- During the period of 18 months from original
let are important documents and should be kept delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of
in the vehicle. 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first,
a reasonable number of repair attempts is pre-
sumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more
of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction
results in a condition that is likely to cause
Service and vehicle operation 27
death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is Change of address or change of own-
driven, that defect or malfunction has been ership
subject to repair two or more times, and you
have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, In the event of a change of address, please send
Introduction
LLC in writing of the need for its repair. us the "Notification of Address Change" in the
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the
of a less serious nature than category (1) Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
has been subject to repair four or more (USA) at the hotline number
times and you have directly notified 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
Mercedes-Benz in writing of the need for its Customer Service Center (Canada) at
repair. 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact-
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of ing you in a timely manner should the need arise.
repair of the same or different substantial If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all liter-
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative ature in the vehicle so that it is available to the
total of more than 30 calendar days. next owner.
Please send your written notice to: If you have purchased a used car, please send us
the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the
Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
3 Mercedes Drive (USA) at the hotline number
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Maintenance
Vehicle operation outside the USA
Always bring the Maintenance Booklet with you and Canada
when taking the vehicle to an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Your customer service When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe
advisor will enter every service into your Main- the following points:
tenance Booklet on your behalf. RService facilities or replacement parts may
not be readily available.
RLead-free fuel for vehicles with a catalytic
Roadside Assistance converter may not be available. Leaded fuel
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro- can cause damage to the catalytic converter.
gram offers technical help in the event of a RThe fuel may have a considerably lower
breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assis- octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause
tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 engine damage.
hours a day, 365 days a year. Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) delivery in Europe through our European Deliv-
(USA) ery Program. For details, consult an authorized
1-800-387-0100(Canada) Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the
following addresses.
For additional information, refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program In the USA
brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
section in the Service and Warranty Booklet European Delivery Department
(Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu- One Mercedes Drive
ment wallet. Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Z
28 Operating safety
Operating safety ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:

Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
Important safety notes curb or an unpaved road
Introduction
Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a

G WARNING
curb or a hole in the road
If you do not have the prescribed service/ Ra heavy object strikes the undercarriage or
maintenance work or any required repairs parts of the chassis
carried out, this can result in malfunctions or In situations like this, the body, the undercar-
system failures. There is a risk of an accident. riage, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be
Always have the prescribed service/mainte- damaged without the damage being visible.
nance work as well as any required repairs Components damaged in this way can unex-
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no
longer withstand the strain they are designed
to.
G WARNING If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or bustible materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with twigs can gather between the underbody and
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk the underbody paneling. If these materials
of fire. come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
system, they can catch fire.
When driving off road or on unpaved roads, In such situations, have the vehicle checked
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
particular, remove parts of plants or other cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-
flammable materials which have become ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,
trapped. In the case of damage, contact a pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,
qualified specialist workshop. paying attention to road and traffic condi-
tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
G WARNING
Modifications to electronic components, their
software as well as wiring can impair their Declaration of conformity for wireless
function and/or the function of other net- vehicle components
worked components. In particular, systems
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com-
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
result, these may no longer function as inten- subject to the two following two conditions: 1)
ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of These devices may not cause harmful interfer-
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an ence, and 2) These devices must accept any
accident and injury. interference received, including interference
Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec- that may cause undesired operation. Changes
or modifications not expressly approved by the
tronic components or their software. You party responsible for compliance could void the
should have all work to electrical and elec- user’s authority to operate the equipment."
tronic equipment carried out at a qualified Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
specialist workshop. comply with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) These devices may
not cause interference, and (2) These devices
must accept any interference, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired operation of
the device."
Operating safety 29
Diagnostics connection Always have the following work carried out at an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
The diagnostics connection is only intended for Rwork relevant to safety
the connection of diagnostic equipment at a
Introduction
qualified specialist workshop. Rservice and maintenance work
Rrepair work
G WARNING Ralterations, installation work and modifica-
If you connect equipment to a diagnostics tions
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the Rwork on electronic components
operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the
operating safety of the vehicle could be affec-
ted. There is a risk of an accident. Correct use
Only connect equipment to a diagnostics con- If you remove any warning stickers, you or oth-
nection in the vehicle, which is approved for ers could fail to recognize certain dangers.
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Leave warning stickers in position.
Observe the following information when driving
G WARNING your vehicle:
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the Rthe safety notes in this manual
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. Rtechnical data for the vehicle
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is Rtraffic rules and regulations
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are vehicles
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure Problems with your vehicle
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use If you should experience a problem with your
loose floormats and do not place floormats on vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
top of one another. affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi-
! If the engine is switched off and equipment ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti-
on the diagnostics connection is used, the fied. If the problem is not resolved to your sat-
starter battery may discharge. isfaction, please discuss the problem again with
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if nec-
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con- essary, contact us at one of the following
nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor- addresses.
mation being reset, for example. This may lead In the USA
to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of
the next emissions test during the main inspec- Customer Assistance Center
tion. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
3 Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Qualified specialist workshop In Canada
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali- Customer Relations Department
fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to 98 Vanderhoof Avenue
correctly carry out the work required on your Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
vehicle. This is especially the case for work rel-
evant to safety.
Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet. Reporting safety defects
USA only:
Z
30 Data stored in the vehicle
The following text is reproduced as required of content/asportal/en/communication/

all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. informationen_fuer/QRCode.html.
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of
Introduction
1966. Data stored in the vehicle

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury Data storage
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration A wide range of electronic components in your
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz vehicle contain data memories.
USA, LLC. These data memories temporarily or perma-
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may nently store technical information about:
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety Rthe vehicle's operating state
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order Rincidents
a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA Rmalfunctions
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz In general, this technical information docu-
USA, LLC. ments the state of a component, a module, a
system or the surroundings.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 These include, for example:
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// Roperating conditions of system components,
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, e.g. fluid levels
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of its
DC 20590. individual components, e.g. number of wheel
You can also obtain other information about revolutions/speed, deceleration in move-
motor vehicle safety from ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal
http://www.safercar.gov position
Rmalfunctions and defects in important system
components, e.g. lights, brakes
Limited Warranty Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in
special driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy-
! Follow the instructions in this manual about ment, intervention of stability control sys-
the proper operation of your vehicle as well as tems
about possible vehicle damage. Damage to Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature
your vehicle that arises from culpable contra-
ventions against these instructions is not cov- This data is of an exclusively technical nature
ered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited and can be used to:
Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle War- Rassist in recognizing and rectifying malfunc-
ranty. tions and defects
Ranalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-
dent
QR codes for the rescue card Roptimize vehicle functions
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's
The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap movements.
and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-
event of an accident, rescue services can use mation can be read from the event data memory
the QR code to quickly find the appropriate res- and malfunction data memory.
cue card for your vehicle. The current rescue Services include, for example:
card contains the most important information
about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the Rrepair services
routing of the electric cables. Rservice processes
You can find more information under http:// Rwarranties
portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/ Rquality assurance
Data stored in the vehicle 31
The vehicle is read out by employees of the ser- The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
vice network (including the manufacturer) using such data as:
special diagnostic testers. More detailed infor- RHow various systems in your vehicle were
mation is obtained from it, if required.
Introduction
operating
After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor- RWhether or not the driver and passenger
mation is deleted from the malfunction memory safety belts were buckled/fastened
or is continually overwritten.
RHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
When operating the vehicle, situations are con- accelerator and/or brake pedal and
ceivable in which this technical data, in connec-
RHow fast the vehicle was traveling.
tion with other information (if necessary, under
consultation with an authorized expert), could These data can help provide a better under-
be traced to a person. standing of the circumstances in which crashes
Examples include: and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situa-
Raccident reports tion occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
Rdamage to the vehicle under normal driving conditions and no personal
Rwitness statements data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location)
Further additional functions that have been con- are recorded. However, other parties, such as
tractually agreed upon with the customer allow law enforcement could combine the EDR data
certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi- with the type of personally identifying data rou-
cle as well. The additional functions include, for tinely acquired during a crash investigation.
example, vehicle location in case of an emer- Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed
gency. to read data that is recorded by an EDR, and
special equipment is required. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have
the special equipment, such as law enforce-
COMAND/mbrace ment, can read the information by accessing the
If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or vehicle or the EDR.
mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-
operation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit- ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-
uations, and the location of the vehicle may be dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash
compiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys- Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract
tem. data from the EDR is commercially available,
For additional information please refer to the Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly
COMAND User Manual or the Digital Owners disclaims any and all liability arising from the
Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Condi- extraction of this information by unauthorized
tions. Mercedes-Benz personnel.
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others
without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if
Event data recorders the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the
lessee. Exceptions to this representation
This vehicle is equipped with an event data include responses to subpoenas by law enforce-
recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with an ment; by federal, state or local government; in
event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of connection with or arising out of litigation involv-
an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy- as required by law.
ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will Warning: The EDR is a component of the
assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter-
performed. The EDR is designed to record data ing, modifying or removing the EDR component
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys-
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds tem Module and other systems.
or less. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.
This means that in the event of such conflict, the
Z
32 Information on copyright
federal regulation governs. As of February 2013,

13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.
Introduction
Information on copyright
General information
Information on license for free and open-source
software used in your vehicle and its electronic
components is available on the following web-
site:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
Cockpit 33
Cockpit
At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Steering wheel paddle shift- F Adjusts the steering wheel
ers 135 manually 98
; Combination switch 106 G Adjusts the steering wheel
electrically 98
= Instrument cluster 34
Steering wheel heating 99
? Horn
H Cruise control lever 148
A DIRECT SELECT lever 130
I Parking brake 142
B PARKTRONIC warning dis-
J Diagnostics connection 29
play 163
K Opens the hood 265
C Overhead control panel 39
L Releases the parking brake 142
D Climate control systems 112
M Light switch 105
E Ignition lock 123
Start/Stop button 123
34 Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
At a glance

: Fuel gauge (left) ; Speedometer with segments 188
Coolant temperature (right) 188 = Multifunction display 190
Warning and indicator lamps:
÷ ESP® 229 ? Tachometer 188
M SPORT handling mode Warning and indicator lamps:
in Mercedes-AMG vehicles 231 $ Brakes (USA only) 228
· Distance warning 234 J Brakes (Canada only) 228
å ESP® OFF 229 ! Turn signal, right 106
# Turn signal, left 106 ! ABS 229
? Coolant 232 6 Restraint system 42
K High-beam headlamps 106 ; Check Engine 232
L Low-beam headlamps 106 h Tire pressure monitor 235
T Parking lamps 106 ü Seat belt 227
R This lamp has no func- ÷ ESP® in Mercedes-
tion AMG vehicles 231
8 Reserve fuel 232
Fuel filler flap location indi-
cator: the fuel filler cap is on
the right-hand side.
Information on the display of the outside tem- Set the lighting in the instrument cluster, in the
perature in the multifunction display can be displays and the controls in the vehicle interior
found under "Outside temperature display" using the on-board computer (Y page 198).
(Y page 188).
Multifunction steering wheel 35
Multifunction steering wheel
At a glance
: Multifunction display 190 ? =;
; Multimedia system display Selects a menu 189
9:
= ? Selects a submenu or scrolls
Switches on voice-operated through lists 189
navigation or the Voice Con- a
trol System
Confirms a selection 189
8
Hides display messages 203
Mute
%
WX
Back 189
Adjusts the volume
Switches off voice-operated
~ navigation or the Voice Con-
Rejects or ends a call 194 trol System
Exits the telephone book/
redial memory
6
Makes or accepts a call
Switches to the redial mem-
ory
i Vehicles with multimedia system i Vehicles with multimedia system

Audio 20: COMAND:
Additional information can be found: Additional information can be found:
Ron the multimedia system in the Digital Ron the multimedia system in the Digital
Operator's Manual Operator's Manual
Ron voice-operated control for navigation in Ron the Voice Control System in the sepa-
the manufacturer's operating instructions rate operating instructions
36 Center console
Center console
Center console, upper section
At a glance

: Multimedia system (see the B 4 5 Indicator lamp 49
Digital Operator's Manual)
C £ Hazard warning lamps 107
; c Seat heating 97
D u Rear window roller sun-
= s Seat ventilation 98 blind 251
? c PARKTRONIC 163
A ¤ ECO start/stop func-
tion 126
Center console 37
Center console, lower section
At a glance
E Stowage compartment 242 H É Sets the vehicle level 159
Ashtray 252 I Stowage compartment with
Cigarette lighter 252 Media Interface 244
Socket 253
J Ú Selects the drive pro-
F Cup holder 248 gram 133
G e Adjusts the suspension K Multimedia system control-
settings 160 ler 237
38 Center console
Center console, lower section (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

At a glance

F Cup holder 248 K Stowage compartment with
Media Interface 244
G Engages park position P 141
L ß Calls up or saves the
H Selector lever 129 suspension settings 161
I Ashtray 252 M à Adjusts the suspension
Cigarette lighter 252 settings 161
Socket 253
N å ESP® 71
J Multimedia system control-
ler 237 O Drive program selector 134
Overhead control panel 39
Overhead control panel
At a glance
: u Switches the rear inte- D Buttons for the garage door
rior lighting on/off 108 opener 261
; | Switches the automatic E Microphone for mbrace
interior lighting control (emergency call system),
on/off 108 telephone and Voice Control
System (see the Digital Oper-
= p Switches the right- ator's Manual)
hand reading lamp on/off 108
F F Breakdown assistance
? ï Info call button 257 call button 256
A 3 Opens/closes the slid- G p Switches the left-hand
ing sunroof 91 reading lamp on/off 108
B G SOS button 255 H c Switches the front inte-
C Rear-view mirror rior lighting on/off 108
Automatic anti-glare 102
40 Door control panel
Door control panel

At a glance

: r45= B W Opens/closes the side
Stores seat, exterior mirror windows 87
and steering column adjust-
ment settings 103 C n Activates/deactivates
the override feature for the
; Adjusts the seats electrically 94 side windows in the rear
compartment 63
= % & Unlocks/locks
the vehicle 82 D p Opens/closes the
trunk lid 85
? Opens the door 81
A 7Zö\
Adjusts and folds the exterior
mirrors in/out electrically 101
Occupant safety 41
Panic alarm As the driver, you also have to make sure that
the steering wheel is adjusted correctly.
Observe the information relating to the correct
driver's seat position (Y page 93).
You also have to make sure that an air bag can
inflate properly if deployed (Y page 46).
An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat
belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag
increases the level of protection for vehicle
Safety
occupants in the event of an accident. For exam-
ple, if, in the event of an accident, the protection
offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags
are not deployed. When an accident occurs, only
the air bags that increase protection in that par-
ticular accident situation are deployed. How-
X To arm: press ! button : for approx- ever, seat belts and air bags generally do not
imately one second. protect against objects penetrating the vehicle
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the from the outside.
alarm system is armed. Information on restraint system operation can
X To disarm: press ! button : again. be found under "Triggering of the Emergency
or Tensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 53).
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. For information on children traveling with you in
or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO: the vehicle and on child restraint systems, see
X Press the Start/Stop button.
"Children in the vehicle" (Y page 58).
The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
Important safety notes
Occupant safety G WARNING
Introduction to the restraint system Modifications to the restraint system may
cause it to no longer work as intended. The
The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi- restraint system may then not perform its
cle occupants coming into contact with parts of intended protective function and may fail in an
the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.
accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.
The restraint system can also reduce the forces
to which vehicle occupants are subjected during This poses an increased risk of injury or even
an accident. fatal injury.
The restraint system comprises: Never modify parts of the restraint system.
Rseat belt system Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic
Rair bags components or their software.
Rchild restraint system If it is necessary to modify components of the
Rchild seat securing systems restraint system to accommodate a person
The components of the restraint system work in with disabilities, contact an authorized
conjunction with each other. They can only Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only:
deploy their protective function if, at all times, all for further information contact our Customer
vehicle occupants: Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly (1‑800‑367‑6372).
(Y page 44)
Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraint Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
properly (Y page 93). driving aids which have been approved specifi-
cally for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Z
42 Occupant safety
Restraint system warning lamp PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp : is
part of the Occupant Classification System
The functions of the restraint system are (OCS).
checked after the ignition is switched on and at The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
regular intervals while the engine is running. informs you about the status of the front-
Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in passenger front air bag.
good time.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
The 6 restraint system warning lamp in the lamp:
instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is
Ris lit: the front-passenger front air bag is
Safety
switched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-

onds after the vehicle is started. The compo- deactivated. It will then not be deployed in the
nents of the restraint system are in operational event of an accident.
readiness. Ris not lit: the front-passenger front air bag is
A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint enabled. If, in the event of an accident, all
system warning lamp: deployment criteria are met, the front-
passenger front air bag is deployed.
Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched
on Depending on the person in the front-passenger
seat, the front-passenger front air bag must
Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the
either be deactivated or enabled; see the fol-
engine running lowing points. You must make sure of this both
Rlights up again while the engine is running before and during a journey.
G WARNING RChildren in a child restraint system:
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, whether the front-passenger front air bag is
enabled or deactivated depends on the instal-
restraint system components may be trig- led child restraint system, and the age and
gered unintentionally or may not deploy as size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe
intended during an accident. This can affect the notes on the "Occupant Classification
for example the Emergency Tensioning System (OCS)" (Y page 49) and on "Chil-
Device or the air bag. This poses an increased dren in the vehicle" (Y page 58). There you
risk of injury or even fatal injury. will also find instructions on rearward and
forward-facing child restraint systems on the
Have the restraint system checked and front-passenger seat.
repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as RAll other persons: depending on the classi-
soon as possible. fication of the person in the front-passenger
seat, the front-passenger front air bag is ena-
bled or deactivated (Y page 49). Be sure to
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator observe the notes on "Seat
belts“ (Y page 42) and "Air bags"
lamp (Y page 46). There you can also find infor-
mation on the correct seat position.
Seat belts
Introduction
Seat belts are the most effective means of
restricting the movement of vehicle occupants
in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling
over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants
coming into contact with parts of the vehicle
interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Fur-
thermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle
Occupant safety 43
occupant in the best position in relation to the incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause
air bag. injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-
The seat belt system comprises: dent or when braking or changing direction
RSeat belts abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury
REmergency Tensioning Devices for the front or even fatal injury.
seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
RSeat belt force limiters for the front seat belts
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-
and the outer seat belts in the rear
ting properly.
Safety
If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet
quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt
retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extrac- G WARNING
ted any further. The seat belt does not offer the intended level
The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the of protection if you have not moved the back-
seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
against the body. However it does not pull the ing or in the event of an accident, you could
vehicle occupant back in the direction of the slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
backrest.
abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
The Emergency Tensioning Device does not cor-
rect an incorrect seat position or the routing of poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
an incorrectly fastened seat belt. injury.
When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps to Adjust the seat properly before beginning
reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
vehicle occupant. is in an almost vertical position and that the
The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
synchronized with the front air bags, which across the center of your shoulder.
absorb part of the deceleration force. This can
reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occu-
pants during an accident. G WARNING
Persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot
! If the front-passenger seat is not occupied, wear the seat belt correctly without an addi-
do not engage the seat belt tongue in the
buckle on the front-passenger seat. Other- tional and suitable restraint system. If the
wise, in the event of an accident, the Emer- seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot per-
gency Tensioning Device and front-passenger form its intended protective function. An
front air bag may be triggered and would need incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause
to be replaced. injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-
dent or when braking or changing direction
Important safety notes abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury
The use of seat belts and child restraint systems or even fatal injury.
is required by law in: For this reason, always secure persons under
Rall 50 states 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable additional restraint
Rthe U.S. territories systems.
Rthe District of Columbia
If a child younger than twelve years old and
Rall Canadian provinces
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle vehicle:
occupants should correctly fasten their seat
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint
belts before starting the journey.
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi-
G WARNING
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot
perform its intended protective function. An
Z
44 Occupant safety
cle. The child restraint system must be appro- When fastening the seat belt, always make sure
priate to the age, weight and size of the child that:
Ralways observe the instructions and safety Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the belt
notes on "Children in the vehicle" buckle belonging to that seat.
(Y page 58) in addition to the child restraint Rthe seat belt is tight across your body.
system manufacturer's installation and oper-
ating instructions Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
coat.
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety
Rthe seat belt is not twisted.
notes on the "Occupant classification system
Safety
(OCS)" (Y page 49) Only then can the forces which occur be dis-
tributed over the area of the belt.
G WARNING Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always
The seat belts may not perform their intended routed across the center of your shoulder.
protective function if: The shoulder section of the belt must not
come into contact with your neck or be routed
Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely under your arm. Where possible, adjust the
dirty, bleached or dyed seat belt to the appropriate height.
Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down as
extremely dirty possible across your lap.
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt The lap belt must always be routed across
anchorages or inertia reels have been modi- your hip joints and not across your abdomen.
This applies particularly to pregnant women.
fied.
If necessary, push the lap belt down to your
Seat belts may be damaged in an accident, hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder
although the damage may not be visible, e.g. section of the belt.
due to splinters of glass. Modified or damaged Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, poin-
seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident. ted or fragile objects.
Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices If you have such items located on or in your
could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store
when necessary. This poses an increased risk these in a suitable place.
Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a time.
of injury or even fatal injury.
Infants and children must never travel sitting
Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-
on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event
sioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertia of an accident, they could be crushed
reels. Make sure that the seat belts are between the vehicle occupant and seat belt.
undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow- Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if
ing an accident, have the seat belts checked the seat belt is also being used by one of the
immediately at a qualified specialist work- vehicle's occupants.
shop. Also ensure that there are never objects
between a person and the seat, e.g. cushions.
Only use seat belts that have been approved for Seat belts are only intended to secure and
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the
"Loading guidelines" for securing objects, lug-
Proper use of the seat belts gage or loads (Y page 242).
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt Fastening and adjusting the seat belts
(Y page 43).
All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also (Y page 43) and the notes on correct use of seat
make sure that all vehicle occupants are always belts (Y page 44).
wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle
is in motion.
Occupant safety 45
and must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.
X Press the release button in the belt buckle,
hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the belt
back.
Seat belt adjustment

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of
Safety
the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This func-
tion adjusts the driver's and front-passenger
seat belt to the upper body of the occupants.
Basic illustration
The belt strap is tightened slightly when:
X Adjust the seat (Y page 93). Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle and
The seat backrest must be in an almost ver-
tical position. Rthe ignition is switched on
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outlet The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain
and engage belt tongue ; into belt retraction force if any slack is detected between
buckle :. the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not
The seat belt on the driver’s seat and the hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjust-
front-passenger seat may be tightened auto- ing.
matically, see "Belt adjustment" You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on and
(Y page 45). off in the on-board computer (Y page 200).
X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder
section of the seat belt to tighten the belt Belt warning for the driver and front
across your body. passenger
The shoulder section of the seat belt must The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-
always be routed across the center of the shoul- ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu-
der. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary. pants must wear their seat belts. It may light up
X To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards. continuously or flash. In addition, there may be
The belt outlet will engage in various posi- a warning tone.
tions. Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has
X To lower: hold belt outlet release = and slide already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warn-
belt outlet downwards. ing lamp lights up for six seconds each time the
X Let go of belt outlet release = in the desired engine is started. If, after six seconds, the driver
position and make sure that the belt outlet or front-passenger seat belt has not been fas-
engages. tened and the doors are closed, the 7 seat
belt warning lamp lights up. As soon as the driv-
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are er's and front-passenger seat belts are fastened
equipped with a special seat belt retractor to or a front door is opened again, the 7 seat
securely fasten child restraint systems in the belt warning lamp goes out.
vehicle. Further information can be found under If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the
"Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 58). engine is started, an additional warning tone will
sound. The warning tone switches off after six
Releasing seat belts seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fas-
tened.
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph
Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be
(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-
trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.
passenger seat belts are not fastened, a warning
This could damage the door, the door trim
tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with
panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts
increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the
can no longer fulfill their protective function
Z
46 Occupant safety
driver or front passenger have fastened their the head restraint must support the head at
seat belts. about eye level.
If the driver or front passenger unfasten their RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats
seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warn- as far back as possible. The driver's seat posi-
ing is activated again. tion must allow the vehicle to be driven safely.
ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside.
This allows the air bag to be fully deployed.
Air bags RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-
ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against the
Safety
Introduction door or side window. You may otherwise be in

the deployment area of the air bags.
The installation point of an air bag can be rec-
RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front
ognized by the AIR BAG symbol.
of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash-
An air bag complements the correctly fastened board, for example. Your feet may otherwise
seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. The be in the deployment area of the air bag.
air bag provides additional protection in appli-
RFor this reason, always secure persons less
cable accident situations.
than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint sys-
Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot
different air bag systems function independ- be worn correctly.
ently from one another (Y page 53).
If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also
However, no system available today can com- observe the following notes:
pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
RAlways secure children under twelve years of
It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury
caused by an air bag due to the high speed at age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable
which the air bag must be deployed. child restraint systems.
RChild restraint systems should be installed on
Important safety notes the rear seats.

ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing child
G WARNING restraint system on the front-passenger seat
when the front-passenger front air bag is
If you do not sit in the correct seat position, deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
the air bag cannot protect as intended and indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-
could even cause additional injury when passenger front air bag is deactivated
deployed. This poses an increased risk of (Y page 42).
injury or even fatal injury. RAlways observe the instructions and safety
To avoid hazardous situations, always make notes on the "Occupant Classification System
(OCS)" (Y page 49) and on "Children in the
sure that all of the vehicle's occupants: vehicle" (Y page 58) in addition to the child
Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly, restraint system manufacturer's installation
including pregnant women and operating instructions.
Rare sitting correctly and maintain the great-
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent
an air bag from functioning correctly. Before
est possible distance to the air bags starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting
Rfollow the following instructions from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make
Always make sure that there are no objects sure that:
between the air bag and the vehicle's occu- Rthere are no people, animals or objects
pants. between the vehicle occupants and an air
bag.
RAdjust the seats properly before beginning Rthere are no objects between the seat, door
your journey. Always make sure that the seat and B-pillar.
is in an almost upright position. The center of Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on
the grab handles or coat hooks.
Occupant safety 47
Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-
attached to the vehicle within the deployment tional head and thorax protection for the occu-
area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows, pants in the front seats.
rear side trim or side walls. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in informs you about the status of the front-
the pockets of your clothing. Store such passenger front air bag (Y page 42).
objects in a suitable place. The front-passenger front air bag will only
deploy if:
G WARNING
Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensor
Safety
If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects
readings, detects that the front-passenger
such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer seat is occupied (Y page 49)
function correctly. There is an increased risk Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
of injury. does not light up (Y page 49)
Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a
to it. high accident severity
G WARNING Knee bags

Sensors to control the air bags are located in
the doors. Modifications or work not per-
formed correctly to the doors or door panel-
ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the
function of the sensors being impaired. The air
bags might therefore not function properly
anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot
protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. There is an increased risk of
injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
Always have work on the doors or door pan- Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering
eling carried out at a qualified specialist work- column and front-passenger knee bag ; under
shop. the glove box. The driver's and front-passenger
knee bags are triggered together with the front
air bags.
Front air bags The driver's and front-passenger knee bags
offer additional thigh, knee and lower leg pro-
tection for the occupants in the front seats.
Side impact air bags

G WARNING
Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre-
vent deployment of the air bags integrated
into the seats. Consequently, the air bags
cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. In addition, the operation of
the occupant classification system (OCS)
Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steer-
ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag ; could be adversely affected. This poses an
deploys in front of and above the glove box. increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Z
48 Occupant safety
You should only use seat covers that have could be adversely affected. This poses an
been approved for the respective seat by increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Mercedes-Benz. You should only use seat covers that have
been approved for the respective seat by
Mercedes-Benz.
Safety
Front side impact air bags : and rear side

impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer bol-
ster of the seat backrest.
Pelvis air bags : deploy below next to the outer
When deployed, the side impact air bag offers seat cushions.
additional thorax protection. However, it does
When activated, the pelvis air bag enhances the
not protect the:
level of protection of the vehicle occupants on
Rhead the side of the vehicle on which the impact
Rneck occurs.
Rarms The pelvis air bag is deployed on the side of the
In the event of a side impact, the side impact air impact.
bag is deployed on the side on which the impact The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side
occurs. does not deploy under the following conditions:
The side impact air bag on the front-passenger Rthe OCS detects that the front-passenger
side deploys under the following conditions: seat is unoccupied or
Rthe OCS system detects that the front- Rthe belt tongue is not engaged in the belt
passenger seat is occupied or buckle of the front-passenger seat.
Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,
of the front-passenger seat the pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side
If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, deploys if an appropriate accident situation
the side impact air bag on the front-passenger occurs. In this case, deployment is independent
side deploys if an appropriate accident situation of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied
occurs. In this case, deployment is independent or not.
of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied
or not.
Pelvis air bags

G WARNING
Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre-
vent deployment of the air bags integrated
into the seats. Consequently, the air bags
cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. In addition, the operation of
the occupant classification system (OCS)
Occupant safety 49
Window curtain air bags Requirements

To be classified correctly, the front passenger
must sit:
Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly
Rin an almost upright position with their back
against the seat backrest
Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible
If the front passenger does not observe these
Safety
conditions, OCS may produce a false classifica-
tion, e.g. because the front passenger:
Rtransfers their weight by supporting them-
selves on a vehicle armrest
Window curtain air bags : are integrated into Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised
the side of the roof frame and deployed in the from the seat cushion
area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar. If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
When deployed, the window curtain air bag restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be
enhances the level of protection for the head. sure to observe the correct positioning of the
However, it does not protect the chest or arms. child restraint system. Never place objects
In the event of a side impact, the window curtain under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. a
air bag is deployed on the side on which the cushion. The entire base of the child restraint
impact occurs. system must always rest on the seat cushion of
If the system determines that they can offer the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the
additional protection to that provided by the forward-facing child restraint system must lie as
seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be flat as possible against the backrest of the front-
deployed in other accident situations passenger seat.
(Y page 53). The child restraint system must not touch the
roof or be subjected to a load by the head
restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest
and the head restraint position accordingly.
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function
correctly. Always observe the child restraint sys-
Introduction tem manufacturer's installation and operating
instructions.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat-
egorizes the person in the front-passenger seat. Occupant Classification System opera-
Depending on that result, the front-passenger tion (OCS)
front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are
either enabled or deactivated.
The system does not deactivate:
Rthe side impact air bag
Rthe pelvis air bag
Rthe window curtain air bag
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices
Z
50 Occupant safety
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp : bled in accordance with the person in the
shows you whether the front-passenger front air front-passenger seat
bag is deactivated.
Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
back as far back as possible.
ignition lock or on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,
press the Start/Stop button once or twice. Rthe person is seated correctly.
The system carries out self-diagnostics. Make sure, both before and during the jour-
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ney, that the status of the front-passenger
must light up for approximately six seconds. front air bag is correct.
Safety
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

then displays the status of the front-passenger G WARNING
front air bag. If the status of the front-passenger
front air bag changes while the vehicle is in If you secure a child in a child restraint system
motion, an air bag display message may appear on the front-passenger seat and the
in the instrument cluster (Y page 210). When PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
the front-passenger seat is occupied, always off, the front-passenger front air bag can
pay attention to the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF deploy in the event of an accident. The child
indicator lamp. Be aware of the status of the could be struck by the air bag. This poses an
front-passenger front air bag both before and
during the journey. increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator Make sure that the front-passenger front air
lamp: bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR
Ris lit: the front-passenger front air bag is BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
deactivated. It will then not be deployed in the
event of an accident. G WARNING
Ris not lit: the front-passenger front air bag is If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
enabled. If, in the event of an accident, all restraint system on the front-passenger seat
deployment criteria are met, the front- and you position the front-passenger seat too
passenger front air bag is deployed. close to the dashboard, the child could, in the
G WARNING event of an accident:
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-
lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of cator lamp is lit, for example
an accident and cannot perform its intended Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER
protective function. A person in the front- AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off
passenger seat could then, for example, come
This poses an increased risk of injury or even
into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-
fatal injury.
cially if the person is sitting too close to the
dashboard. This poses an increased risk of Move the front-passenger seat as far back as
injury or even fatal injury. possible. Always make sure that the shoulder
belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
belt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide on
always ensure that:
the child restraint system. The shoulder belt
Rthe classification of the person in the front- strap must be routed forwards and down-
passenger seat is correct and the front- wards from the vehicle belt sash guide. If nec-
passenger front air bag is enabled or disa- essary, adjust the vehicle belt sash guide and
the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always
observe the child restraint system manufac-
turer's installation instructions.
Occupant safety 51
If OCS determines that: repaired immediately at a qualified specialist

Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
lights up after the system self-test and for this purpose.
remains lit. This indicates that the front- If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the
passenger front air bag is deactivated. seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary
Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a repair work carried out at a qualified specialist
child of up to twelve months old, in a standard workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that
child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Safety
BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the for this purpose.
system self-test and remains lit. This indi- For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
cates that the front-passenger front air bag is mends that you only use seat accessories that
deactivated. have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
But even in the case of a twelve-month-old If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not
child, in a standard child restraint system, the mean that the front-passenger front air bag will
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp can also deploy. The Occupant Classification Sys-
go out after the system self-test. This indi- tem (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the front-
cates that the front-passenger front air bag is passenger seat. Depending on that result, the
activated. The result of the classification is front-passenger front air bag is either enabled or
dependent on, among other factors, the child deactivated.
restraint system and the child's stature. It is
recommended that you install the child System self-test
restraint system on a suitable rear seat.
Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a per- G DANGER
son of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lamp does not light up during the system self-
indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after
the system self-test depending on the result test, then the system is malfunctioning. The
of the classification or, alternatively, goes out. front-passenger front air bag might be trig-
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator gered unintentionally or might not be trig-
lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat gered at all in the event of an accident with
as far back as possible. Alternatively, a per- high deceleration. This poses an increased
son of smaller stature can sit on a rear seat. risk of injury or even fatal injury.
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
In this case the front-passenger seat may not
lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature be used. Do not install a child restraint system
should not use the front-passenger seat.
on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-
Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an
adult or a person of adult stature, the pant Classification System (OCS) checked
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
goes out after the system self-test. This indi- cialist workshop.
cates that the front-passenger front air bag is
activated. G WARNING
If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle"
lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the
(Y page 58).
front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will
When the occupant classification system (OCS)
is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint system not be deployed in the event of an accident. In
warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the this case, the front-passenger front air bag
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp light cannot perform its intended protective func-
up simultaneously. The front-passenger front air tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-
bag is deactivated in this case and does not passenger seat.
deploy during an accident. Have the Occupant
Classification System (OCS) checked and
Z
52 Occupant safety
That person could, for example, come into G WARNING

contact with the vehicle's interior, especially Objects between the seat surface and the
if the person is sitting too close to the dash- child restraint system could affect OCS oper-
board. This poses an increased risk of injury or ation. This could result in the front-passenger
even fatal injury. air bag not functioning as intended during an
When the front-passenger seat is occupied, accident. This poses an increased risk of
always ensure that: injury or even fatal injury.
Rthe classification of the person in the front- Do not place any objects between the seat
Safety
passenger seat is correct and the front- surface and the child restraint system. The
passenger front air bag is enabled or disa- entire base of the child restraint system must
bled in accordance with the person in the always rest on the seat cushion of the front-
front-passenger seat passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-
Rthe person is seated properly with a cor- facing child restraint system must, as far as
rectly fastened seatbelt possible, be resting on the backrest of the
front-passenger seat. Always comply with the
Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved
child restraint system manufacturer's instal-
as far back as possible
lation instructions.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit when it should not, the front- After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR
passenger seat may not be used. Do not BAG OFF indicator lamp displays the status of
install a child restraint system on the front- the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 49).
passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi- For more information about the OCS, see "Prob-
cation System (OCS) checked and repaired lems with the Occupant Classification System"
(Y page 52).
immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 51).
Occupant safety 53
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor-
BAG OFF indicator lamp rect.
lights up and remains lit, X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person
even though the front- on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 49).
passenger seat is occu-
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-
pied by an adult or a per-
passenger seat may not be used.
son of a stature corre-
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-
Safety
sponding to that of an
adult. Benz Center.
The PASSENGER AIR OCS is malfunctioning.

BAG OFF indicator lamp X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child
does not light up and/or seat.
does not stay on.
X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on
The front-passenger seat the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the
is: forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible
Runoccupied against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary,
Roccupied with the adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
weight of a child up to X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat
twelve months old in a belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger
child restraint system seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child
restraint system being pulled too tightly.
X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.
Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child
restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accord-
ingly.
X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the
seat.
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off, do not
install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is
recommended that you install the child restraint system on a suit-
able rear seat.
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Deployment of Emergency Tensioning G WARNING

Devices and air bags A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-
tection and cannot provide the intended pro-
tection in an accident. There is an increased
G WARNING risk of injury.
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-
been deployed. There is a risk of injury. ist workshop in order to have a deployed air
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a bag replaced.
deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-
It is important for your safety and that of your
cialist workshop as soon as possible. passenger to have deployed air bags replaced
and to have any malfunctioning air bags
repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags
Z
54 Occupant safety
continue to perform their protective function for An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be
the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash. triggered, if:
G WARNING Rthe ignition is switched on
Rthe components of the restraint system are
Emergency Tensioning Devices that have
operational. You can find further information
deployed pyrotechnically are no longer opera- under: "Restraint system warning lamp"
tional and are unable to perform their inten- (Y page 42)
ded protective function. This poses an Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. the respective front-passenger seat
Safety
Have pyrotechnically triggered Emergency The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rear
Tensioning Devices replaced immediately at a compartment are triggered independently of the
qualified specialist workshop. lock status of the seat belts.
If the restraint system control unit detects a
An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trig- more severe accident, further components of
ger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous the restraint system are activated independ-
situations. This procedure is reversible. ently of each other in certain frontal collision
If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered situations:
or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang, RFront air bags and driver's knee bag
and a small amount of powder may also be RWindow curtain air bag, if the system deter-
released. The 6 restraint system warning mines that deployment can offer additional
lamp lights up. protection to that provided by the seat belt
Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear- The front-passenger front air bag is activated or
ing. The powder that is released generally does deactivated depending on the person on the
not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front
short-term breathing difficulties in people with air bag can only deploy in an accident if the
asthma or other respiratory problems. Provided PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.
it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR
immediately or open the window in order to pre- BAG OFF indicator lamp (Y page 42).
vent breathing difficulties. Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. During
Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning the first deployment stage, the front air bag is
Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material, filled with propellant gas to reduce the risk of
which may require special handling and regard injuries. The front air bag is fully deployed with
for the environment. National guidelines must the maximum amount of propellant gas if a sec-
be observed during disposal. In California, see ond deployment threshold is reached within a
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ few milliseconds.
Perchlorate/index.cfm. The activation threshold of the Emergency Ten-
sioning Devices and the air bag are determined
Method of operation by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or
acceleration which occurs at various points in
During the first stage of a collision, the restraint the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in
system control unit evaluates important physi- nature. Deployment should take place in good
cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel- time at the start of the collision.
eration, such as: The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration
Rduration and the direction of the force are essentially
Rdirection determined by:
Rintensity Rthe distribution of forces during the collision
Based on the evaluation of this data, the Rthe collision angle
restraint system control unit triggers the Emer- Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle
gency Tensioning Devices during a frontal or Rthe characteristics of the object with which
rear collision. the vehicle has collided
Factors which can only be seen and measured
after a collision has occurred do not play a deci-
Occupant safety 55
sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-
they provide an indication of air bag deploy- PRO luxury head restraints
ment.
The vehicle can be deformed considerably, with- Important safety notes
out an air bag being deployed. This is the case if
only parts which are relatively easily deformed G WARNING
are affected and the rate of deceleration is not The function of the head restraint may be
high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed even
though the vehicle suffers only minor deforma- impaired if you:
Safety
tion. This is the case if, for example, very rigid Rattach objects such as coat hangers to the
vehicle parts such as longitudinal body mem- head restraints, for example
bers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs
as a result. Ruse head restraint covers
If the restraint system control unit detects a side If you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfill
impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicable their intended protective function in the event
components of the restraint system are activa- of an accident. In addition, objects attached
ted independently of each other depending on to the head restraints could endanger other
the apparent type of accident.
vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk
RSide impact air bags and pelvis air bag on the
of injury.
side the impact takes place, independently of
the Emergency Tensioning Device and the use Do not attach any objects to the head
of the seat belt on the driver's seat and outer restraints and do not use head restraint cov-
seats in the second row ers.
- the OCS system detects that the front-
passenger seat is occupied or
Method of operation
- the belt tongue is engaged in the belt
buckle of the front-passenger seat NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury
RWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact, head restraints offer additional protection
independently of the use of the seat belt and against head and neck injuries. In the event of a
independently of whether the front- rear collision of a certain severity, the NECK-
passenger seat is occupied PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head
REmergency Tensioning Devices, if the system restraints on the driver's and front-passenger
determines that deployment can offer addi- seats are moved forwards and upwards. This
tional protection in this situation provides better head support.
RWindow curtain air bags on the driver's and If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO
front-passenger side in certain situations luxury head restraints have been triggered in an
when the vehicle rolls over, if the system accident, reset the NECK-PRO head restraints/
determines that deployment can offer addi- NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driver's
tional protection to that provided by the seat seat and the front-passenger seat
belt (Y page 56). Otherwise, the additional protec-
tion will not be available in the event of another
i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. rear-end collision. You can see that a NECK-PRO
The different air bag systems work independ- head restraint/NECK-PRO luxury head restraint
ently of each other. has been triggered if it is tilted forward and can
How the air bag system works is determined no longer be adjusted.
by the severity of the accident detected, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
especially the vehicle deceleration or accel- functionality of the NECK-PRO head restraints/
eration and the apparent type of accident: NECK-PRO luxury head restraints checked at a
RFrontal collision
qualified specialist workshop after a rear-end
collision.
RSide impact
RRollover
Z
56 Occupant safety
Resetting a triggered NECK-PRO head Do not insert your finger between the cushion of
restraint/NECK-PRO luxury head the head restraint and the cover. Pay particular
restraint attention while resetting the NECK-PRO luxury
head restraints.
NECK-PRO head restraints X Remove resetting tool : from the vehicle
document wallet.
X Slide resetting tool : into guide ; between
the NECK-PRO luxury head restraint and the
rear cover of the head restraint.
Safety
X Push resetting tool : downwards until you

hear the head restraint deployment mecha-
nism engage.
X Pull out resetting tool :.
X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECK-
PRO luxury head restraint cushion backwards
in the direction of arrow = until it engages.
X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-
Do not insert your finger between the cushion of PRO luxury head restraint.
the head restraint and the cover. Pay particular X Put resetting tool : back into the vehicle
attention while resetting the NECK-PRO head document wallet.
restraints.
X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint
i If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-
cushion forwards in the direction of arrow :. PRO luxury head restraints, have this work
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion
down as far as it will go in the direction of
arrow ;.
X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECK-
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
PRO head restraint cushion backwards in the protection system)
direction of arrow = until it engages.
X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-
Introduction
PRO head restraint. In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE®
takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehi-
i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints cle occupants.
requires a lot of strength. If you have difficulty
resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints, have
this work carried out at a qualified specialist Important safety notes
workshop.
! Make sure that there are no objects in the
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints footwell or behind the seats. There is a danger
that the seats and/or objects could be dam-
aged when PRE-SAFE® is activated.
Although your vehicle is equipped with PRE-
SAFE®, the possibility of injury in the event of an
accident cannot be ruled out. Always adapt your
driving style to suit the prevailing road and
weather conditions and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
Occupant safety 57
Function uations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes pre-emptive

measures to protect the vehicle occupants.
PRE-SAFE® intervenes:
Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when Important safety notes
BAS is activated
Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when physi- The intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS cannot
cal limits are exceeded and the vehicle under- prevent an imminent collision.
steers or oversteers severely The driver is not warned about the intervention
Ron vehicles with the Driving Assistance pack- of PRE-SAFE® PLUS.
Safety
age: if BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully or the PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene if the vehi-
radar sensor system detects an imminent cle is backing up.
danger of collision in certain situations When driving, or when parking or exiting a park-
PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures ing space with assistance from Active Parking
depending on the hazardous situation detected: Assist, PRE-SAFE® PLUS will not apply the
Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned. brakes.
Rthe front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in
an unfavorable position. Function
Rif the vehicle skids, the side windows and the
PRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situa-
sliding sunroof are closed. tions if the radar sensor system detects an
Rvehicles with a multicontour seat or active imminent head-on or rear-end collision.
multicontour seat: the air pressure in the side
PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following measures
bolsters of the backrest is increased.
depending on the hazardous situation detected:
If the hazardous situation passes without result-
Rif the radar sensor system detects that a
ing in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the belt
pre-tensioning. On vehicles with multicontour head-on collision is imminent, the seat belts
seats or active multicontour seats, the air pres- are pre-tensioned.
sure in the side bolsters is reduced again. All Rif the radar sensor system detects that a rear-
settings made by PRE-SAFE® can then be end collision is imminent:
reversed. - the brake pressure is increased if the driver
If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced: applies the brakes when the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly
- the seat belts are pre-tensioned.
when the vehicle is stationary.
The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application is can-
the locking mechanism is released. celed:
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed when a
the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Informa- gear is engaged
tion about the convenience function can be Rif the risk of a collision passes or is no longer
found under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 45). detected
Rif DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intention to
pull away
PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu- If the hazardous situation passes without result-
pant protection system PLUS) ing in an accident, the original settings are
restored.
Introduction
PRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicles
with the Driving Assistance package.
Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE®
PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-end
collision is imminent. In certain hazardous sit-
Z
58 Children in the vehicle
Automatic measures after an acci- In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
dent ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
Immediately after an accident, the following an accident and injury.
measures are implemented, depending on the When leaving the vehicle, always take the
type and severity of the impact: SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Rthe emergency lighting is activated
Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked G WARNING
Safety
Rthe front side windows are lowered If persons, particularly children are subjected
Rvehicles with a memory function: the electri- to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cally adjustable steering wheel is raised cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel supply fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
is cut off vehicle.
Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency
call G WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
Children in the vehicle dren may burn themselves on these parts,
Important safety notes particularly on the metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
Accident statistics show that children secured
in the rear seats are safer than children secured If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, you, always ensure that the child restraint
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
are generally better protected there. restraint system has been exposed to direct
If a child younger than twelve years old and sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the child in it. Never leave children unattended in
vehicle:
the vehicle.
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
The child restraint system must be appropri- their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting
ate to the age, weight and size of the child properly. Particular attention must be paid to
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety children.
notes in this section in addition to the child Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
restraint system manufacturer's installation (Y page 43) and the notes on correct use of seat
instructions belts (Y page 44).
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
notes on the "Occupant classification system proper seat belt positioning for children over
(OCS)" (Y page 49) 41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a
three-point seat belt can be properly fastened
G WARNING without a booster seat.
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Rrelease the parking brake. Special seat belt retractor
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the G WARNING
parking position P.
If the seat belt is released while driving, the
Rstart the engine. child restraint system will no longer be
Children in the vehicle 59
secured properly. The special seat belt retrac- You can obtain further information about the
tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a correct child restraint system from any author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot
be immediately refastened. There is an G WARNING
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. If the child restraint system is installed incor-
Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten- rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as
tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate intended. The child cannot then be restrained
the special seat belt retractor and secure the in the event of an accident, heavy braking or
Safety
child restraint system properly. sudden changes of direction. There is an
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are Make sure that you observe the child restraint
equipped with a special seat belt retractor.
When activated, the special seat belt retractor system manufacturer's installation instruc-
ensures that the seat belt will not slacken once tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,
the child restraint system has been secured. that the base of the child restraint system is
Installing a child restraint system: always resting completely on the seat cush-
X Always comply with the child restraint system
ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under
manufacturer's installation instructions. or behind the child restraint system. Only use
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt out- child restraint systems with the original cover
let. designed for them. Only replace damaged
X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle. covers with genuine covers.
Activating the special seat belt retractor:
G WARNING
X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia If the child restraint system is installed incor-
reel retract it again.
While the seat belt is retracting, you should rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in
hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt the event of an accident, heavy braking or a
retractor is activated. sudden change in direction. The child
X Push the child seat restraint system down so restraint system could be thrown about, strik-
that the seat belt is tight and does not loosen. ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased
Removing a child restraint system and deacti- risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
vating the special seat belt retractor: Always install child restraint systems prop-
X Always comply with the child restraint system erly, even if they are not being used. Make
manufacturer's installation instructions. sure that you observe the child restraint sys-
X Press the release button of the belt buckle, tem manufacturer's installation instructions.
hold the belt tongue firmly and guide it back
towards the belt outlet. You will find further information on stowing
The special seat belt retractor is deactivated. objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guide-
lines" (Y page 242).
G WARNING
Child restraint system Child restraint systems or their securing sys-
The use of seat belts and child restraint systems tems which have been damaged or subjected
is required by law in: to a load in an accident can no longer protect
Rall 50 states as intended. The child cannot then be
Rthe U.S. territories restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
Rthe District of Columbia braking or sudden changes of direction. There
Rall Canadian provinces is an increased risk of injury, possibly even
fatal.
Z
Replace child restraint systems which have systems with which the child is also secured
been damaged or subjected to a load in an with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the
accident as soon as possible. Have the secur- child restraint system with the Top Tether
ing systems on the child restraint system belt, if available.
checked at a qualified specialist workshop,
before you install a child restraint system Always comply with the manufacturer's instal-
again. lation and operating instructions for the child
restraint system used.
Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-
Safety
The securing systems of child restraint systems

are: type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged
correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
Rthe seat belt system rings
Rthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings
Rthe Top Tether anchorages
If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on
the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the
information on the "Occupant Classification
System (OCS)" (Y page 49). There you will also
find information on deactivating the front-
passenger front air bag.
All child restraint systems must meet the fol-
lowing standards:
RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 225
RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards When installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
213 and 210.2 restraint system, fold protective caps ; of
Confirmation that the child restraint system cor- securing rings : inwards.
responds to the standards can be found on an X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
instruction label on the child restraint system. system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
This confirmation can also be found in the instal- rings :.
lation instructions that are included with the ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for
child restraint system. specially designed child restraint systems on
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte- the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rior and on the child restraint system. rings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
systems are installed on the left and right of the
rear seats.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur- Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also
ing system be used and can be installed using the vehicle's
seat belt system. Install the child seat according
G WARNING to the manufacturer's instructions.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems
do not offer sufficient protective effect for
children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs Top Tether
(22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt Introduction
integrated in the child restraint system. In the
event of an accident, a child might not be Top Tether provides an additional connection
restrained correctly. This poses an increased between the child restraint system secured with
a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and the vehicle.
risk of injury or even fatal injury. This helps reduce the risk of injury even further.
If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg), If the child restraint system is equipped with a
only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint Top Tether belt, this should always be used.
Children in the vehicle 61

G WARNING
If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they
could fold forwards in the event of an acci-
dent, heavy braking or sudden changes of
direction. As a result, child restraint systems
cannot perform their intended protective
Safety
function. Rear seat backrests that are not
locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.
in the event of an accident. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. X Route Top Tether belt A under head
Always lock rear seat backrests after instal- restraint : between the two head restraint
bars.
ling a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock veri-
X Hook Top Tether hook ? into Top Tether
fication indicator. Adjust the rear seat backr- anchorage =.
ests so that they are in an upright position.
X Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not twis-
ted.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
locked, this will be shown in the multifunction X Tension Top Tether belt A. Always comply
display in the instrument cluster. A warning tone with the child restraint system manufactur-
also sounds. er's installation instructions when doing so.
X Fold down cover ; of Top Tether anchorage
Top Tether anchorages =.
X Move head restraint : back down again
slightly if necessary (Y page 95).
Make sure that you do not interfere with the
correct routing of Top Tether belt A.
Child restraint system on the front-

passenger seat
General notes
Accident statistics show that children secured
in the rear seats are safer than children secured
Top Tether anchorage points = are installed in in the front-passenger seat. For this reason,
the rear compartment behind the outer head Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install
restraints. the child restraint system on a rear seat.
X Move head restraint : upwards. If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
X Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =. restraint system on the front-passenger seat,
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
always observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant Classification System
system with Top Tether. Always comply with
(OCS)" (Y page 49).
the child restraint system manufacturer's
installation instructions when doing so.
Z
You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as Child-proof locks
a result of:
Ran incorrectly categorized person in the front- Important safety notes
passenger seat
Rthe unintentional deactivation of the front-
G WARNING
passenger front air bag If children are traveling in the vehicle, they
Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child could:
restraint system, e.g. too close to the dash- Ropen doors, thus endangering other people
board
Safety
or road users
Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming
Rearward-facing child restraint system
traffic
If it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward- Roperate vehicle equipment and become
facing child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat, always make sure that the trapped
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator Always activate the child-proof locks and
lamp is permanently lit (Y page 42) is the front-
override feature if children are traveling in the
passenger front air bag deactivated.
vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take
Always observe the child restraint system man-
ufacturer's installation and operating instruc- the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
tions. leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Override feature for:

Forward-facing child restraint system
Rthe rear doors (Y page 63)
If it is absolutely necessary to install a forward- Rthe rear side windows (Y page 63)
facing child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat, always move the front- G WARNING
passenger seat as far back as possible. The
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
entire base of the child restraint system must
always rest on the seat cushion of the front- cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
passenger seat. The backrest of the child Rrelease the parking brake.
restraint system must lie as flat as possible
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
against the backrest of the front-passenger
seat. The child restraint system must not touch parking position P.
the roof or be subjected to a load by the head Rstart the engine.
restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
and the head restraint position accordingly.
Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to an accident and injury.
the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint When leaving the vehicle, always take the
system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
outlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt out-
let and the front-passenger seat accordingly.
Always observe the child restraint system man- G WARNING
ufacturer's installation and operating instruc- If persons, particularly children are subjected
tions. to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
Pets in the vehicle 63
G WARNING Override feature for the rear side win-

If the child restraint system is subjected to dows
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
dren may burn themselves on these parts,
particularly on the metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
you, always ensure that the child restraint
Safety
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
restraint system has been exposed to direct
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
child in it. Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle. X To activate/deactivate:press button ;.
If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the rear
side windows is disabled. Operation is only
Child-proof locks for the rear doors possible using the switches in the driver's
door. If indicator lamp : is off, operation is
possible using the switches in the rear com-
partment.
Pets in the vehicle
G WARNING
If you leave animals unattended or unsecured
in the vehicle, they could press buttons or
switches, for example.
You secure each door individually with the child- As a result, they could:
proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured
Ractivate vehicle equipment and become
with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked, trapped, for example
the door can be opened from the outside. Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby
X To activate: press the child-proof lock lever endangering other road users
up in the direction of arrow :. Unsecured animals could also be flung around
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are work- the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-
ing properly. den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-
X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock
cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident
lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
and injury.
Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-
cle. Always secure animals properly during
the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-
port box.
Z
64 Driving safety systems
Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Overview of driving safety systems General information
In this section, you will find information about ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that
the following driving safety systems: the wheels do not lock when you brake. This
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) allows you to continue steering the vehicle when
(Y page 64) braking.
RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 65) The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
Safety
RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) with

on. It goes out when the engine is running.
Cross-Traffic Assist (Y page 65)
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph
RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions.
(Y page 67) ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) only brake gently.
(Y page 69)
REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) Important safety notes
(Y page 72)
RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 72) i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 64).
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 72)
G WARNING
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
Important safety notes braking. The steerability and braking charac-
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-
inattentive, the driving safety systems can nei- ally, further driving safety systems are deac-
ther reduce the risk of an accident nor override tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-
the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are ding and accidents.
merely aids designed to assist driving. You are
Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-
responsible for maintaining the distance to the
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in diately at a qualified specialist workshop.
good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt
your driving style to suit the prevailing road and When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
weather conditions and maintain a safe distance including driving safety systems, will also
from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. become inoperative. Observe the information
on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 229) and dis-
The driving safety systems described only work
play messages which may be shown in the
as effectively as possible when there is ade-
instrument cluster (Y page 204).
quate contact between the tires and the road
surface. Pay particular attention to the informa-
tion regarding tires, recommended minimum Braking
tire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tires" X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
section (Y page 292).
brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter uation is over.
tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains.
X To make a full brake application: depress
Only in this way will the driving safety systems
described in this section work as effectively as the brake pedal with full force.
possible. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
pulsing in the brake pedal.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication
of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a
reminder to take extra care while driving.
Driving safety systems 65
BAS (Brake Assist System) With the help of a sensor system and a camera
system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles:
General information Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for an
BAS operates in emergency braking situations. extended period of time

If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS Rthat cross the path of your vehicle
automatically boosts the braking force, thus In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi-
shortening the stopping distance. cle can be detected.
BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by using typical
Important safety notes characteristics such as the body contours and
Safety
posture of a person standing upright.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- If the radar sensor system or the camera system
tion (Y page 64). is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functions are
G WARNING restricted or no longer available. The brake sys-
tem is still available with complete brake boost-
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance ing effect and BAS.
in an emergency braking situation is
increased. There is a risk of an accident.
i Observe the restrictions described in the
"Important safety notes" section
In an emergency braking situation, depress (Y page 65).
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents
the wheels from locking. Important safety notes
Braking G WARNING
BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify
X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until objects and complex traffic situations.
the emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking. In such cases, BAS PLUS may:
The brakes will function as usual once you Rintervene unnecessarily
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. Rnot intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) with Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
Cross-Traffic Assist uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
General information
G WARNING
BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of a
collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian and BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify peo-
reduce the effects of such a collision. If BAS ple, this is especially the case if they are mov-
PLUS detects a danger of collision, you are ing. BAS PLUS cannot intervene in these
assisted when braking. cases. There is a risk of an accident.
i Pay attention to the important safety notes Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
in the "Driving safety systems" section uation and be ready to brake.
(Y page 64).
BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with the G WARNING
Driving Assistance package.
BAS PLUS does not react:
For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the
radar sensor system and the camera system Rto small people, e.g. children
must be operational. Rto animals
Rto oncoming vehicles
Rwhen cornering
Z
As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all Function

critical situations. There is a risk of an acci- To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the
dent. brake force necessary if:
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- Ryou approach an obstacle, and
uation and be ready to brake. RBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision
At speeds of under20 mph(30 km/h): if you
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-
depress the brake pedal, BAS PLUS is activated.
ognition can be impaired.
The increase in brake pressure will be carried
Safety
Recognition by the radar sensor system is also out at the last possible moment.
impaired if:
At speeds of above20 mph(30 km/h): if you
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else depress the brake pedal sharply, BAS PLUS
covering the sensors automatically increases the brake pressure to a
Rthere is interference by other radar sources degree suited to the traffic situation.
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam- BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz-
ple in parking garages ardous situations with vehicles in front within a
Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and
motorbike 155 mph (250 km/h).
Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
Rvehicles quickly move into the radar sensor
(70 km/h), BAS PLUS may react to:
system detection range Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle,
Recognition by the camera system is also e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
impaired in the event of: Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle
Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered Robstacles crossing your path, which move in
Rglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun

the detection range of the sensors and are
recognized by them
being low in the sky
Rdarkness i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high brak-
Ror if: ing force, preventative passenger protection
- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simulta-
of the vehicle neously.
- the camera system no longer recognizes a X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
pedestrian as a person due to special cloth- emergency braking situation is over.
ing or other objects ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func-
- the typical outline of a person is not distin- tion as usual, if:
guishable from the background Ryou release the brake pedal.
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.
have the configuration and operation of the Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-
radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist cle.
workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
speeds where there is no visible damage to the
front of the vehicle. Ryou activate kickdown.
Following damage to the windshield, have the
configuration and operation of the camera sys-
tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating

PLUS The COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is
automatically active after switching on the igni-
General information tion.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- You can activate or deactivate COLLISION PRE-
tion (Y page 64). VENTION ASSIST PLUS in the on-board com-
puter (Y page 196). When deactivated, the dis-
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS consists tance warning function and the autonomous
of a distance warning function with an autono- braking function are also deactivated.
Safety
mous braking function and adaptive Brake
Assist. If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is
deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can help assistance graphics display.
you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision
with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of
such a collision. Distance warning function
If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will General information
be warned visually and acoustically. If you do not The distance warning function can help you to
react to the visual and audible collision warning, minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a
autonomous braking can be initiated in critical vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a
situations. If you apply the brake yourself in a collision. If the distance warning function
critical situation, the COLLISION PREVENTION detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will
ASSIST PLUS adaptive Brake Assist assists you. be warned visually and acoustically.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be tion for driving safety systems (Y page 64).
impaired if:
G WARNING
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors The distance warning function does not react:
Rthere is snow or heavy rain Rto people or animals
Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rto oncoming vehicles
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-
Rto crossing traffic
ple in parking garages
Rwhen cornering
Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike Thus, the distance warning function cannot
Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line provide a warning in all critical situations.
Rnew vehicles or after a service on the COLLI- There is a risk of an accident.
SION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS system Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
Observe the notes in the section on breaking- uation and be ready to brake.
in (Y page 122).
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, G WARNING
have the configuration and operation of the
radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist The distance warning function cannot always
workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow clearly identify objects and complex traffic
speeds where there is no visible damage to the situations.
front of the vehicle. In such cases, the distance warning function
may:
Rgive an unnecessary warning
Rnot give a warning
Z
There is a risk of an accident. Adaptive Brake Assist

Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- General information
uation and do not rely solely on the distance
warning function. i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 64).
Function With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the dis-
At and above a speed of approximately 4 mph tance warning signal can detect obstacles that
(7 km/h), the distance warning function warns are in the path of your vehicle for an extended
period of time.
Safety
you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An

intermittent warning tone will then sound, and If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of colli-
the · distance warning lamp will light up in sion with the vehicle in front, it calculates the
the instrument cluster. braking force necessary to avoid a collision. If
X Brake immediately in order to increase the
you apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive Brake
Assist will automatically increase the braking
distance from the vehicle in front.
force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions.
or
Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis-
X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do tance in hazardous situations at speeds above
so. 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technology
Due to the nature of the system, particularly to assess the traffic situation.
complicated but non-critical driving conditions Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph
may also cause the system to display a warning. (250 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist is capable of
With the help of the radar sensor system, the reacting to moving objects that have already
distance warning function can detect obstacles been detected as such at least once over the
that are in the path of your vehicle for an exten- period of observation.
ded period of time. Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist reacts to sta-
(70 km/h), the distance warning function can tionary obstacles.
also react to stationary obstacles, such as stop- If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly
ped or parked vehicles. high braking force, preventative passenger pro-
tection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated
Autonomous braking function simultaneously (Y page 56).
X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
If the driver does not react to the distance warn- emergency braking situation is over.
ing signal in a critical situation, COLLISION PRE- ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
VENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist with the
autonomous braking function. The brakes will work normally again if:
The autonomous braking function is available in Ryou release the brake pedal.
the following speed ranges: Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.
Rfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 65 mph Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-
(105 km/h) for moving objects cle.
Rfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 31 mph Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.
(50 km/h) for stationary objects
Due to the nature of the system, particularly Important safety notes
complicated but non-critical driving conditions i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
may also cause the Autonomous Braking Func- tion for driving safety systems (Y page 64).
tion to intervene.
If the autonomous braking function requires a G WARNING
particularly high braking force, preventative Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly
passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) identify objects and complex traffic situa-
are activated simultaneously. tions.
In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can: ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
Rintervene unnecessarily ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehicles
Rnot intervene with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®.
There is a risk of an accident. Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-
vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for
uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the example if the road surface is slippery on one
intervention in a non-critical driving situation. side. In addition, more drive torque is transfer-
Safety
red to the wheel or wheels with traction.
G WARNING Traction control remains active, even if you
deactivate ESP®.
Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:
Rto people or animals Important safety notes
Rto oncoming vehicles
Rto crossing traffic tion (Y page 64).
Rwhen cornering
G WARNING
As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not
intervene in all critical conditions. There is a If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to
risk of an accident. stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-
ing safety systems are deactivated. This
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
uation and be ready to brake.
Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a
Due to the nature of the system, particularly qualified specialist workshop.
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may also cause Brake Assist to intervene. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or perform-
If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a ance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axle
malfunction in the radar sensor system, the dynamometer. Before you operate the vehicle
brake system remains available with full brake on such a dynamometer, please consult a
boosting effect and BAS. qualified workshop. You could otherwise
damage the drive train or the brake system.
Vehicles without 4MATIC: observe the notes on
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ESP® (Y page 289) when towing the vehicle
with a raised rear axle.
General notes If the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- continuously, then ESP® is deactivated.
tion (Y page 64). If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and the å
ESP® OFF warning lamp are lit continuously,
ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e.
power transmission between the tires and the ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.
road surface. Observe the information on warning lamps
(Y page 229) and display messages which may
If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from
be shown in the instrument cluster
the direction desired by the driver, one or more
(Y page 204).
wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The
engine output is also modified to keep the vehi- i Only use wheels with the recommended tire
cle on the desired course within physical limits. sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.
ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on
wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilize
the vehicle during braking.
Z
Characteristics of ESP® It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow-

ing situations:
General information Rwhen using snow chains
If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before Rin deep snow
beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically Ron sand or gravel
active.
Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action
If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp which provides better grip.
flashes in the instrument cluster.
i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations
Safety
If ESP® intervenes:
described above no longer apply. ESP® will
X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum- otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if
stances. the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to
X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as spin.
necessary when pulling away.
Deactivating/activating ESP®
X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing
road and weather conditions. You can deactivate or activate ESP® via the on-
board computer (Y page 195).
ECO start/stop function ESP®deactivated:
The ECO start/stop function switches the The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instru-
engine off automatically when the vehicle stops ment cluster lights up.
moving. The engine starts automatically when ESP®activated:
the driver wants to pull away again. ESP®
remains in its previously selected status, e.g. if The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instru-
ESP® was deactivated before the engine was ment cluster goes out.
automatically switched off.
Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
Deactivating/activating ESP® (except
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) instrument cluster flashes. In such situations,
ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP®:
tion (Y page 64). RESP® no longer improves driving stability.
REngine torque is no longer limited and the
You can select between the following states of
ESP®: drive wheels are able to spin.
RTraction control is still activated.
RESP® is activated. RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longer
RESP® is deactivated. available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly
G WARNING with assistance from ESP®.
RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is it
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-
activated if you brake firmly and ESP® inter-
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk venes.
of skidding and an accident. RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, it is
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri- also not activated if you brake firmly and ESP®
bed in the following. intervenes.
RESP® still provides support when you brake
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an firmly.
extended period with ESP® deactivated. You
could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
Deactivating/activating ESP® the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to

(Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) spin.
tion (Y page 64).
You can select between the following states of
ESP®:
Safety
RESP® is activated.
RSPORT handling mode is activated.
RESP® is deactivated.
G WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is activated,
there is a greater risk of skidding and acci- X To activate SPORT handling mode: briefly
dents. press button :.
Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit- The M SPORT handling mode warning
uations described in the following. lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The
SPORT handling mode message appears in
the multifunction display.
G WARNING
X To deactivate SPORT handling mode:
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta- briefly press button :.
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk The M SPORT handling mode warning
of skidding and an accident. lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri- X To deactivate ESP®: press button : until
bed in the following. the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster.
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an The ÷ OFF message appears in the multi-
extended period with ESP® deactivated. You function display.
could otherwise damage the drivetrain. X To activate ESP®: briefly press button :.
In the following situations, it may be better to The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ESP®
ESP®: ON message appears in the multifunction dis-
Rwhen using snow chains play.
Rin deep snow
Characteristics of activated SPORT han-
Ron sand or gravel
dling mode
Ron specially designated roads when the vehi-
cle's own oversteering and understeering If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or
characteristics are desired more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warn-
Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action ing lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP®
which provides better grip. only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited degree.
Driving in SPORT handling mode or without When SPORT handling mode is activated:
ESP® requires an extremely qualified and expe- RESP® no longer improves driving stability.
rienced driver. REngine torque is no longer limited and the
i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations drive wheels are able to spin.
RTraction control is still activated.
described above no longer apply. ESP® will
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if RESP® still provides support when you brake
firmly.
Z
Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated ESP® trailer stabilization is active above speeds
of about 65 km/h.
IfESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the ESP® trailer stabilization does not work if ESP®
instrument cluster does not flash. In such situa- is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunc-
tions, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. tion.
If you deactivate ESP®:
RESP® no longer improves driving stability. EBD (electronic brake force distribu-
REngine torque is no longer limited and the tion)
Safety
drive wheels are able to spin.

RTraction control is still activated. General information
RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longer EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure
available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly on the rear wheels to improve driving stability
with assistance from ESP®. while braking.
RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is it
activated if you brake firmly and ESP® inter- Important safety notes
venes.
RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, it is i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
also not activated if you brake firmly and ESP® tion for driving safety systems (Y page 64).
intervenes. G WARNING
RESP® still provides support when you brake
If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can
firmly. lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the
risk of skidding and an accident.
ESP® trailer stabilization
You should therefore adapt your driving style
General information to the different handling characteristics. Have
the brake system checked at a qualified spe-
ESP® trailer stabilization is not available in
Mercedes-AMG vehicles. cialist workshop.
If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to Observe information regarding indicator and
swerve, ESP® assists you in this situation. ESP® warning lamps (Y page 229) as well as display
slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting messages (Y page 205).
the engine output until the vehicle/trailer com-
bination has stabilized.
Important safety notes ADAPTIVE BRAKE
G WARNING i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
If road and weather conditions are poor, tion (Y page 64).
trailer stabilization will not be able to prevent ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and
the vehicle/trailer combination from swerv- offers increased braking comfort. In addition to
ing. Trailers with a high center of gravity can the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has
the HOLD function (Y page 157) and hill start
tip over before ESP® can detect this. There is assist (Y page 125).
a risk of an accident.
Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-
ing road and weather conditions. PRE-SAFE® Brake
If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer com- General information
bination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilize
the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize the
the brake firmly. risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or a
pedestrian, and reduce the effects of such a
collision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected a risk In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:
of collision, you will be warned visually and
acoustically as well as by automatic braking. Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
brake the vehicle
i Pay attention to the important safety notes
in the "Driving safety systems" section Rnot give a warning or intervene
(Y page 64). There is a risk of an accident.
PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles Always pay particular attention to the traffic
with the Driving Assistance Plus package. situation and be ready to brake, especially if
Safety
For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driving, PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the
the radar sensor system and the camera system intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
must be switched on and be operational.
With the help of the radar sensor system and the G WARNING
camera system, PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect
obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden-
extended period of time. tify people, especially if they are moving. In
In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi- these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot inter-
cle can be detected. vene. There is a risk of an accident.
PRE-SAFE® Brake detects pedestrians using Always pay particular attention to the traffic
typical characteristics such as the body con- situation and be ready to brake, especially if
tours and posture of a person standing upright.
PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you.
i Observe the restrictions described in the
"Important safety notes" sec- In order to maintain the appropriate distance to
tion“ (Y page 73). the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision,
you must apply the brakes yourself.
Important safety notes G WARNING
G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:
PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehi- Rto small people, e.g. children
cle by a partial application of the brakes if a Rto animals
danger of collision is detected. There may be Rto oncoming vehicles
a collision unless you brake yourself. Even
Rto crossing traffic
after subsequent full application of the brakes
Rwhen cornering
a collision cannot always be avoided, partic-
ularly when approaching at too high a speed. As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neither
There is a risk of an accident. give warnings nor intervene in all critical sit-
Always apply the brakes yourself and try to uations. There is a risk of an accident.
take evasive action, provided it is safe to do Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
so. uation and be ready to brake.
In the event of a partial application of the brakes, In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-
the vehicle is braked with up to 50% of the full ognition can be impaired.
braking pressure. Recognition by the radar sensor system is also
impaired if:
G WARNING
PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden- covering the sensors
tify objects and complex traffic conditions. Rthere is interference by other radar sources
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-
ple in parking garages
Z
74 Protection against theft
Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicle
motorbike automatically under the following conditions:
Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line Rthe driver and front passenger have their seat
relative to the center of your vehicle belts fastened
Recognition by the camera system is also Rthe vehicle speed is between approximately
impaired in the event of: 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h)
Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
Rglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun (70 km/h), PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect:
being low in the sky
Safety
Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle,

Rdarkness e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
Ror if: Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle
- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path
of the vehicle i If there is an increased risk of a collision,
preventive passenger protection measures
- the camera system no longer recognizes a
(PRE-SAFE®) are triggered (Y page 56).
pedestrian as a person due to special cloth-
ing or other objects If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front
- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects remains and you do not brake, take evasive
- the typical outline of a person is not distin-
action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle
may perform automatic emergency braking, up
guishable from the background
to the point of full brake application. Automatic
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, emergency braking is not performed until imme-
have the configuration and operation of the diately prior to an imminent accident.
radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist
You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-
workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow
speeds where there is no visible damage to the SAFE® Brake at any time by:
front of the vehicle. Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further.
Following damage to the windshield, have the Ractivating kickdown.
configuration and operation of the camera sys- Rreleasing the brake pedal.
tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is ended
automatically if:
Function
Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.
X To activate/deactivate: activate or deacti- Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.
vate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board com- Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in
puter (Y page 196). front of your vehicle.
If the PRE-SAFE® Brake is not activated, the
æ symbol appears in the multifunction dis-
play. Protection against theft
At or above a speed of approximately 4 mph
(7 km/h), this function warns you if you rapidly Immobilizer
approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent
warning tone will then sound and the · dis- The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from
tance warning lamp will light up in the instru- being started without the correct SmartKey.
ment cluster. X To activate with the SmartKey: remove the
X Brake immediately to defuse the situation. SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the
or
ignition off and open the driver's door.
X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
so. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone
can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been
left inside the vehicle.
Protection against theft 75
i The immobilizer is always deactivated when X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
you start the engine. Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
In the event that the engine cannot be started (Y page 124).
(yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the sys- X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
tem is not operational. Contact an authorized The alarm is stopped.
Mercedes-Benz Center or call X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). must be outside the vehicle.
The alarm is stopped.
Safety
or
ATA (anti-theft alarm system) X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-
board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehi-
cle.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you close
the open door that triggered it, for example.
i If the alarm continues for more than
30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call sys-
tem automatically notifies the Customer
Assistance Center. This is done either by text
message or data connection.
The emergency call system sends the mes-
X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or sage or data provided that:
KEYLESS-GO. Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace service.
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system Rthe mbrace service has been activated
is armed after approximately 15 seconds. properly.
X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the Smart- Rthe necessary mobile phone network is
Key or KEYLESS-GO. available.
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
or
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: press the
Start/Stop button.
The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed and you open:
Ra door
Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key
Rthe trunk lid
Rthe hood
X To stop the alarm with the SmartKey:
press the % or & button on the Smart-
Key.
or
Z
76 SmartKey
SmartKey SmartKey functions

G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Opening and closing
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they: : & To lock the vehicle
; F To unlock the trunk lid
Rrelease the parking brake. = % To unlock the vehicle
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of X To unlock centrally: press the % button.
park position P
If you do not open the vehicle within approx-
RStart the engine. imately 40 seconds of unlocking:
There is a risk of an accident and injury. Rthe vehicle is locked again.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the Ranti-theft protection is reactivated.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never X To lock centrally: press the & button.
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:
reach of children. Rthe doors
Rthe trunk lid
G WARNING Rthe fuel filler flap
If you attach heavy or large objects to the The turn signals flash once when unlocking and
SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten- three times when locking.
tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could You can also set an audible signal to confirm
that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
cause the engine to be switched off. There is a
signal can be activated and deactivated using
risk of an accident. the on-board computer (Y page 199).
Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes
SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before on if it is activated in the on-board computer
inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. (Y page 198).
! Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag-

netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control KEYLESS-GO
function could be affected.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin- General notes
ity of powerful electrical installations.
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by
Do not keep the SmartKey: any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEY-
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone LESS-GO key in the vehicle (Y page 125).
or another SmartKey.
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil. Locking/unlocking centrally
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case. You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
This can affect the functionality of the Smart- KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the
Key. SmartKey with you. You can combine the func-
SmartKey 77
tions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conven- X To deactivate: press the & button on the
tional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using SmartKey twice in rapid succession.
KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the The battery check lamp of the SmartKey
& button on the SmartKey. (Y page 79) flashes twice briefly and lights
When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, up once, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated.
the distance between the SmartKey and the cor- X To activate: press any button on the Smart-
responding door handle must not be greater Key.
than 3 ft (1 m). or
A brief radio connection between the vehicle X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
and the SmartKey determines whether a valid KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features
SmartKey is in, or in the direct vicinity of, the are available again.
vehicle. This occurs, for example:
Opening and closing

Rwhen the external door handles are touched
Rwhen starting the engine Changing the settings of the locking
Rwhile the vehicle is in motion system
You can change the settings of the locking sys-
tem. This means that only the driver's door and
the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle
is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel
alone.
X To change the setting: press and hold down
the % and & buttons simultaneously
for approximately six seconds until the bat-
tery check lamp (Y page 79) flashes twice.
If the setting of the locking system is changed
within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing
the & or % button:
X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur-
Rlocks or
face of the door handle.
X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur- Runlocks the vehicle
face :. The SmartKey now functions as follows:
X Convenience closing feature: touch X To unlock: press the % button once.
recessed sensor surface ; for an extended X To unlock centrally: press the % button
period. twice.
Further information on the convenience clos- X To lock centrally: press the & button.
ing feature (Y page 88).
X To unlock the trunk lid: pull the handle on The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol-
the trunk lid. lows:
The vehicle only unlocks the trunk lid. X To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner
surface of the door handle on the driver's
Deactivating and activating door.
X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface
If you do not intend to use a SmartKey for an of the door handle on the front-passenger
extended period of time, you can deactivate the door or the rear door.
KEYLESS-GO function of the SmartKey. The X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor
SmartKey will then use very little power, thereby surface on one of the door handles.
conserving battery power. For the purposes of
activation/deactivation, the vehicle must not be X To restore the factory settings: press and
nearby. hold the % and & buttons simultane-
ously for approximately six seconds until the
Z
78 SmartKey
battery check lamp (Y page 79) flashes SmartKey battery

twice.
Mechanical key G WARNING

Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
General notes ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal
unlocked with the SmartKey, use the mechani- injury.
cal key. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
Opening and closing
open the driver's door or the trunk lid, the anti- immediately.
theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off
the alarm (Y page 75).
If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked auto- Batteries contain dangerous
matically. substances. It is against the
X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
law to dispose of them with
SmartKey into the ignition lock. the household rubbish. They
must be collected separately
and recycled to protect the
Removing the mechanical key
environment.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop or a special
collection point for used bat-
teries.
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate

material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. National guide-
X Push release catch : in the direction of the lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal-
arrow and at the same time remove mechan- ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
ical key ; from the SmartKey. HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
For further information about: Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
batteries replaced at a qualified specialist work-
Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 83) shop.
Runlocking the trunk (Y page 86)
Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 83)
Inserting the mechanical key

X Push mechanical key ; completely into the
SmartKey until it engages and release
catch : is back in its basic position.
SmartKey 79
Checking the battery X Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey

opening in the direction of the arrow until bat-
tery compartment cover : opens. Do not
hold battery compartment cover : closed
while doing so.
X Remove battery compartment cover :.
Opening and closing

X Press the & or % button.
The battery is working properly if battery
check lamp : lights up briefly.
The battery is discharged if battery check
lamp : does not light up briefly.
X Change the battery (Y page 79). X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
If the SmartKey battery is checked within the
X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-
signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing
the & or % button: minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to
do so.
Rlocks or
X Make sure that the surface of the battery is
Runlocks the vehicle free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
i You can get a battery at any qualified spe- X Insert the front tabs of battery compartment
cialist workshop. cover : into the housing and then press to
close it.
Replacing the battery X Insert mechanical key ; into the SmartKey
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. (Y page 78).
X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on
X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey
(Y page 78). the vehicle.
Z
80 SmartKey
Problems with the SmartKey

You can no longer lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle using X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 79) and replace it if necessary
the SmartKey. (Y page 79).
If this does not work:
X Unlock (Y page 83) or lock (Y page 83) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
Opening and closing
mechanical key.
The SmartKey is faulty.
mechanical key.
X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock or KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.

unlock the vehicle using X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 76).
KEYLESS-GO.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 79) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 79).
mechanical key.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
mechanical key.
KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.
X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the
SmartKey.
X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote con-
trol function:
mechanical key.
X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Doors 81

The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.
started using the Smart- X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
Key. lighting, and try to start the engine again.
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 284).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 285).
or
Opening and closing

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be The vehicle is locked.

started using KEYLESS- X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.
GO. The SmartKey is in
the vehicle. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
You have lost a Smart- X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
Key. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
mechanical key. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
Doors leave children or animals unattended in the

vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
Important safety notes reach of children.
G WARNING
they could: Unlocking and opening doors from
the inside
people or road users. You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked.
If the vehicle has previously been locked from
Roperate the vehicle's equipment. the outside, opening a door from the inside will
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off
motion if, for example, they: the alarm (Y page 75).
You can only open the rear doors from inside the
Rrelease the parking brake. vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of locks (Y page 63).
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
Z
82 Doors
You can only open the rear doors from inside the
vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof
locks (Y page 63).
If a locked door is opened from the inside, the
previous unlock status of the vehicle will be
taken into consideration if:
Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking but-
ton for the central locking, or
Rif the vehicle was locked automatically
The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previ-
ously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's
door had been previously unlocked, only the
Opening and closing
X To unlock and open a front door: pull door door which has been opened from the inside is
handle ;. unlocked.
If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up.
The door is unlocked and opens.
X To unlock a rear door: pull up locking knob Automatic locking feature
on the rear door.
The rear door is unlocked and can be opened.
X To open a rear door: pull the rear door han-
dle.
Centrally locking and unlocking the

vehicle from the inside
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from
the inside. The switches are on the driver’s door.
X To deactivate: press and hold button : for

about five seconds until a tone sounds.
X To activate: press and hold button ; for
about five seconds until a tone sounds.
If you press one of the two buttons and do not
hear a tone, the relevant setting has already
been selected.
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn-
ing.
X To unlock: press button :. You could therefore lock yourself out if:
X To lock: press button ;. Rthe vehicle is being pushed.
If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks. Rthe vehicle is being towed.
Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.
or unlocked. You can also switch the automatic locking func-
If the vehicle has been locked from the outside, tion on and off using the on-board computer
it cannot be centrally unlocked from the inside. (Y page 199).
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked.
Trunk 83
Locking/unlocking driver's door with occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-

the mechanical key larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-
den change in direction.
i If you want to centrally lock the vehicle using
the mechanical key, begin by pressing the Always store objects so that they cannot be
locking button for the interior locking mech- flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
anism while the driver's door is open. Then loads against slipping or tipping before the
lock the driver's door using the mechanical journey.
key.
! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.
Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient
clearance above the trunk lid.
Opening and closing

The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 328).
You should preferably place luggage or loads in
the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines
(Y page 242).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You
could otherwise lock yourself out.
Vehicles without the trunk lid remote clos-
X To unlock: turn the mechanical key counter- ing feature: the trunk lid can be:
clockwise as far as it will go to position 1.
X To lock: turn the mechanical key clockwise as Ropened and closed manually from outside
far as it will go to position 1. Ropened automatically from outside
Ropened automatically from inside
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys- Rlocked separately
tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm Ropened with the emergency release button
(Y page 75). Runlocked with the mechanical key
Vehicles with the trunk lid remote closing
feature: the trunk lid can be:
Trunk Ropened and closed manually from outside
Important safety notes Ropened/closed automatically from outside
Ropened/closed automatically from inside
G WARNING Rlocked separately
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust Ropened with the emergency release button
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust Runlocked with the mechanical key
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a Trunk lid reversing feature
risk of poisoning.
The trunk lid is equipped with an automatic
Always switch off the engine before opening reversing feature. It reacts if a solid object
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid obstructs or restricts the trunk lid during the
open. closing procedure. The trunk lid opens again
automatically. The automatic reversing feature
G WARNING is only an aid and is not a substitute for your
attentiveness when closing the trunk.
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
Z
84 Trunk
G WARNING Closing
The reversing feature does not respond:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
Rover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closing
movement
The reversing feature cannot prevent some-
one being trapped in these situations in par-
ticular. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure.
Opening and closing
If somebody becomes trapped:

X Pull the trunk lid down using recess :.
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey, or
X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the &
Rpull or press the remote operating switch button on the SmartKey (Y page 76) or with
on the driver's door or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 76).
Rpress the closing or locking button on the If KEYLESS-GO detects only one SmartKey in the
trunk lid, or trunk after it closed, the trunk lid opens again. If
Rpull on the trunk lid handle KEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKey out-
side the vehicle, the trunk lid remains closed.
Opening/closing from outside Opening/closing automatically from

Opening outside
G WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped dur-
ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. More-
over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in
the closing area or may enter the closing area
during the closing process. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process.
X Press the % button on the SmartKey. Use one of the following options to stop the
X Pull handle :. closing process:
X Raise the trunk lid.
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey.
Rpull or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door.
Rpress the closing or locking button on the
trunk lid.
Rpull the trunk lid handle
Trunk 85
G WARNING If KEYLESS-GO detects only one SmartKey in the

trunk after it closed, the trunk lid opens again. If
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust KEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKey out-
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust side the vehicle, the trunk lid remains closed.
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a Opening/closing automatically from
risk of poisoning. inside
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open. G WARNING
Opening and closing

Parts of the body could become trapped dur-
Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. In addi-
clearance above the trunk lid. tion, people may be standing in the closing
The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be area or may enter the closing area, e.g. chil-
found in the "Vehicle data" section dren, during the closing procedure. There is a
(Y page 328). risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
Opening closing area during the closing process.
You can open the trunk lid automatically using Release the remote operating switch imme-
the SmartKey or the handle in the trunk lid. diately if somebody becomes trapped. To re-
X Press and hold the F button on the Smart-
open the trunk lid, pull on the remote operat-
Key until the trunk lid opens. ing switch.
or
X If the trunk is unlocked, pull the trunk lid han-
G WARNING
dle and release it again immediately The trunk lid can be automatically opened or
(Y page 84). closed even if the SmartKey is not in the vehi-
cle. If children are left unsupervised in the
Closing vehicle, they could activate the functions.
There is a risk of injury.
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
X Press closing button : in the trunk lid. risk of poisoning.
Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing fea- Always switch off the engine before opening
ture: you can simultaneously close the trunk lid the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
and lock the vehicle. The KEYLESS-GO key must open.
be in the rear detection range of the vehicle.
X Press locking button ; in the trunk lid.
If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks.
Z
86 Trunk

The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 328).
Opening and closing

Opening and closing
X Turn the mechanical key from position 1

counter-clockwise as far as it will go to posi-
tion 2. Simultaneously pull the trunk lid han-
dle.
The trunk is unlocked.
X Turn the mechanical key back to position 1
and remove it.
X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey.
X To open: pull remote operating switch for

trunk lid : until the trunk lid opens. Emergency release for the trunk
X To close:press remote operating switch for
trunk lid : until the trunk lid is completely You can open the trunk lid from inside the vehi-
closed. cle with the emergency release button.
You can open and close the trunk lid from the
driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and
unlocked.
Unlocking the trunk

If the trunk cannot be unlocked with the Smart-
Key or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and X Press emergency release button : briefly.
open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system The trunk lid unlocks and opens.
will be triggered. Switch off the alarm The trunk lid can be unlocked and opened with
(Y page 75). the trunk lid emergency release when the vehi-
X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey cle is stationary or while driving.
(Y page 78). The trunk lid emergency release does not open
X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid the trunk lid if the battery is disconnected or
lock as far as it will go. discharged.
Trunk lid emergency release light:
REmergency release button : flashes for
30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened.
REmergency release button : flashes for
60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed.
Side windows 87
Side windows G WARNING

The reversing feature does not react:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
G WARNING gers
While opening the side windows, body parts Rover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing
could become trapped between the side win- movement
dow and the door frame as the side window Rduring resetting
moves. There is a risk of injury.
Rwhen closing the side window again man-
Make sure that nobody touches the side win-
ually immediately after automatic reversing
dow during the opening procedure. If some-
Opening and closing

body becomes trapped, release the switch or This means that the reversing feature cannot
pull the switch to close the side window again. prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
uations. There is a risk of injury.
G WARNING Make sure that no body parts are in close
While closing the side windows, body parts in proximity during the closing procedure. If
the closing area could become trapped. There someone becomes trapped, press the switch
is a risk of injury. to open the side window again.
When closing make sure that no parts of the
body are in the closing area. If somebody
becomes trapped, release the switch or press Opening and closing the side win-
the switch to open the side window again. dows
The switches for all side windows are located on
G WARNING the driver's door. There is also a switch on each
door for the corresponding side window.
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they are The switches on the driver's door take prece-
dence.
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-
cle. Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
Side window reversing feature

The side windows are equipped with an auto-
matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
or restricts a side window during the closing : Front left
process, the side window opens again automat- ; Front right
ically. However, the automatic reversing feature = Rear right
is only an aid and is not a substitute for your ? Rear left
attentiveness when closing a side window.
ignition lock.
X To open manually: press and hold the cor-
responding switch.
Z
88 Side windows
X To open fully: press the switch beyond the Convenience closing feature
point of resistance and release it.
Automatic operation is started. Important safety notes
X To close manually: pull and hold the corre-
sponding switch. Information on the side window reversing fea-
ture (Y page 87).
X To close fully: pull the corresponding switch
beyond the pressure point. G WARNING
Automatic operation is started. When the convenience closing feature is oper-
X To interrupt automatic operation: press/ ating, parts of the body could become trapped
pull the corresponding switch again. in the closing area of the side window and the
If you press/pull the switch beyond the point of sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Opening and closing
resistance, automatic operation is started in the

Observe the complete closing procedure
corresponding direction. You can stop auto-
matic operation by pressing/pulling the switch when the convenience closing feature is oper-
again. ating. Make sure that no body parts are in
You can continue to operate the side windows close proximity during the closing procedure.
after you switch off the engine or remove the
SmartKey. This function is available for up to five Proceed as follows if someone is trapped:
minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger With the SmartKey:
door is opened.
X Release the & button.
When the override feature for the side windows
is activated, the side windows cannot be oper-
X Press the % button until the side windows
ated from the rear (Y page 63). and the sliding sunroof reopen.
With KEYLESS-GO:
X Release the sensor surface on the door han-
Convenience opening dle.
X Immediately pull and hold the door handle
General notes and keep the door handle pulled.
You can ventilate the vehicle before you start The side windows and the sliding sunroof
driving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry open.
out the following functions simultaneously:
Runlock the vehicle General notes
Ropen the side windows
When you lock the vehicle, you can simultane-
Ropen the sliding sunroof ously:
Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver's Rclose the side windows
seat
Rclose the sliding sunroof
The convenience opening feature can only be
operated using the SmartKey. The SmartKey
must be in close proximity to the vehicle. Using the SmartKey
The "convenience opening" feature is also avail- X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point the tip
able when the vehicle is unlocked. of the SmartKey at the door handle on the
driver's door.
Convenience opening X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the SmartKey
must be in close proximity to the vehicle.
X Press and hold the % button until the side
windows and the sliding sunroof are in the X Press and hold the & button until the side
desired position. windows and the sliding sunroof are fully
X To interrupt convenience opening: release closed.
the % button. X Press and hold the & button until the side
windows are fully closed.
Side windows 89
X Make sure that all the side windows and the X Make sure that all the side windows and the
sliding sunroof are closed. sliding sunroof are closed.
X Make sure that all the side windows are X Make sure that all the side windows are
closed. closed.
X To interrupt convenience closing: release X To interrupt convenience closing:release
the & button. recessed sensor surface : on the door han-
dle.
Using KEYLESS-GO
The driver's door and the door at which the han- Resetting the side windows
dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey
must be outside the vehicle. The gap between If a side window can no longer be closed fully,
Opening and closing

the SmartKey and the corresponding door han- you must reset it.
dle should not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). X Close all the doors.
ignition lock.
X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is com-
pletely closed (Y page 87).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:

X Immediately pull the corresponding switch on
the door control panel until the side window is
completely closed (Y page 87).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the X If the respective side window remains closed
door handle until the side windows and the after the button is released, then it has been
sliding sunroof are fully closed. set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the
X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the steps above again.
door handle until the side windows are fully
closed.
i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor
surface :.
Problems with the side windows

G WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window
closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release
the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.
Z
90 Sliding sunroof

A side window cannot be X Remove the objects.
closed because it is X Close the side window.
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
A side window cannot be If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
closed and you cannot slightly:
see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch
again until the side window has closed.
Opening and closing
The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch
again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing feature.
Sliding sunroof ! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of

snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may
Important safety notes occur.
Do not allow anything to protrude from the
G WARNING sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, damaged.
body parts in close proximity could become ! The weather can change abruptly. It could
trapped. There is a risk of injury. start to rain or snow. Make sure that the slid-
Make sure that no body parts are in close ing sunroof is closed when you leave the vehi-
proximity during the opening and closing pro- cle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if
water enters the vehicle interior.
cedures.
If somebody becomes trapped: Resonance noises can occur in addition to the
usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is
Rrelease the switch immediately, or open. They are caused by minor pressure fluc-
Rduring automatic operation, push the tuations in the vehicle interior. Change the posi-
tion of the sliding sunroof or open a side window
switch briefly in any direction slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises.
The opening or closing procedure will be stop-
ped.
Sliding sunroof reversing feature
G WARNING
The sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-
If children operate the sliding sunroof they matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
could become trapped, particularly if they are or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. process, the sliding sunroof opens again auto-
When leaving the vehicle, always take the matically. However, the automatic reversing
feature is only an aid and is not a substitute for
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never your attentiveness when closing the sliding sun-
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. roof.
Sliding sunroof 91
G WARNING X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.
The reversing feature does not react:
X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- sponding direction.
gers If you press the 3 switch beyond the point of
Rover the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closing resistance, an automatic opening/closing proc-
movement ess is started in the corresponding direction.
You can stop automatic operation by pressing/
Rduring resetting
pulling the switch again. The automatic opening
Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again man- and raising feature is available only when the
ually immediately after automatic reversing sliding sunroof is closed.
The sun protection cover automatically opens
Opening and closing

This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these sit- along with the sliding sunroof. You can open or
close the sun protection cover manually when
uations. There is a risk of injury. the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.
Make sure that no body parts are in close You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof
proximity during the closing procedure. after switching off the engine or removing the
If somebody becomes trapped: SmartKey from the ignition lock. This function
remains active for five minutes or until you open
Rrelease the switch immediately, or a front door.
Rpress the switch in any direction during the
automatic closing process Resetting
The closing process is stopped. ! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened
or closed fully after resetting, contact a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
Operating the sliding sunroof Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move
smoothly.
Opening and closing X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear
(Y page 91).
X Keep the 3 switch pressed for another
second.
X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be fully
opened and closed again (Y page 91).
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above.
: To raise
; To open
= To close/lower
Problems with the sliding sunroof

G WARNING
If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding
sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts
Z
92 Sliding sunroof
of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rpress the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process
The closing process is stopped.
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
Opening and closing

The sliding sunroof can- If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again
not be closed and you slightly:
cannot see the cause. X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the
point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and then
reopens slightly:
X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the
point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed without the automatic reversing fea-
ture.
Seats 93
Correct driver's seat position Ryou should have a good overview of traffic
conditions.
Rthe seat belt is pulled snugly against the body
G WARNING and is routed across the center of your shoul-
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do der and across your hips in the pelvic area.
the following while driving: Further related subjects:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, RAdjusting the seats electrically (Y page 94).
steering wheel or mirrors RAdjusting the steering wheel electrically
Rfasten the seat belt (Y page 99).
RFastening the seat belt correctly (Y page 44).
RAdjusting the rear-view mirror and exterior
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- mirrors (Y page 101).
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt RStoring the seat, steering wheel and exterior
before starting the engine. mirror settings using the memory function
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

(Y page 104).
Seats
G WARNING
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
The seats can still be adjusted when there is no

SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Observe the following when adjusting steering G WARNING
wheel :, seat belt ; and driver's seat =: If the head restraints are not installed or not
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-
possible. tection as intended. There is an increased risk
Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position. of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
Ryour thighs are slightly supported by the seat event of an accident or when braking.
cushion. Always drive with the head restraints instal-
Ryour legs are not entirely stretched and you
led. Before driving off, make sure for every
can depress the pedals properly.
vehicle occupant that the center of the head
Rthe back of your head is supported at eye level
restraint supports the back of the head at
by the center of the head restraint.
about eye level.
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent. Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"
Ryou can move your legs freely. (Y page 46) and "Children in the Vehicle"
Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument (Y page 58).
cluster clearly.
Z
94 Seats
G WARNING als, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers,

child seats or booster seats.
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving: ! Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell under or behind the seats when mov-
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, ing the seats back. There is a risk that the
steering wheel or mirrors seats and/or the objects could be damaged.
Rfasten the seat belt
i The head restraints in the front seats are
There is a risk of an accident. installed with the NECK-PRO system
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- (Y page 55). For this reason, it is not possible
to remove the head restraints from the front
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt seats.
before starting the engine.
For more information, contact a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
G WARNING
i Further related subjects:
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or

other vehicle occupants could be trapped and RRear bench seat through-loading feature
thereby injured. Children in particular could (Y page 245)
accidentally press the electrical seat adjust-
ment buttons and become trapped. There is a
Adjusting the seats electrically
risk of injury.
While moving the seats, make sure that your
hands or other body parts do not get under the
lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-
tem.
G WARNING
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. : Head restraint height
; Seat cushion angle
! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat = Seat height
heating, observe the following information: ? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If A Backrest angle
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
soon as possible. i If PRE-SAFE® is activated and the front-
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
passenger seat is in an unfavorable position,
switch on the seat heating. The seat heat- it is moved to a better position.
ing should also not be used to dry the seats. i You can store the seat settings using the
Rclean the seat covers as recommended; memory function (Y page 104).
see "Interior care".
i Vehicles with the through-loading feature: if
Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats.
you fold down a rear seat backrest, the
Do not place sharp objects on the seat respective front seat is moved forwards
cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The slightly if necessary. This prevents the seats
seats should only be occupied by passen- from colliding.
gers, if possible.
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
not cover the seats with insulating materi-
Seats 95
Adjusting the head restraints Adjusting the head restraint height

electrically
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt

before starting the engine. X Slide switch for head restraint height adjust-
ment : up or down in the direction of the
arrow.
G WARNING
If the head restraints are not installed or not
Adjusting the luxury head restraints
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-
tection as intended. There is an increased risk
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints instal-
restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.
Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and

rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the
height and angle of the head restraints to the X To adjust the side bolsters of the head
correct position. restraint: push or pull right and/or left-hand
Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the side bolster : into the desired position.
head restraint so that it is as close as possible to X To adjust the angle of the head restraint:
your head. push or pull the head restraint in the direction
Observe the important safety notes regarding of arrow ;.
the seats (Y page 93). i Adjust the head restraint so that the back of
your head is as close to the head restraint as
possible.
Rear seat head restraints

G WARNING
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraints so that they are as
close as possible to your head. This will
Z
96 Seats
reduce the potential for injury to the head and

neck in the event of an accident or similar sit-
uation.
Whenever the rear seats are occupied, only
drive the vehicle with the head restraints
installed and engaged. Head restraints are
intended to help reduce injuries during an
accident.
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint

angle
The head restraints can only be removed if the

rear seat folds forward.
X To remove:press release catch : and pull

the head restraint out of the guides.
X To re-install: insert the head restraint so that
the notches on the bar are on the left when
viewed in the direction of travel.
X Push the head restraint down until you hear it
engage in position.
X Pull or push the top of the head restraint until Adjusting the multicontour seat
it is in the desired position.
The multicontour seat function is only available
Removing and installing the rear seat for vehicles in Canada.
head restraints
G WARNING
If the head restraints are not installed or not
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-
tection as intended. There is an increased risk
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints instal-
restraint supports the back of the head at : To adjust the thigh cushion
about eye level. ; To adjust the backrest contour in the lumbar
region
! Make sure that the rear window roller sun- = To adjust the backrest contour in the upper
blind has been retracted before the rear head back region
restraints are removed. You could otherwise ? To adjust the side bolsters of the seat back-
damage the roller sunblind. rest
You can adjust the contour of the front seat
individually so as to provide optimum support
for your back and sides.
Seats 97
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition

lock (Y page 123).
Adjusting the active multicontour

seat
The active multicontour seat is only available for
the driver's side.
You can adjust the active multicontour seat via
the multimedia system (see the Digital Opera-
tor's Manual).
Driver's and front-passenger seat
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

Rear seats
The three red indicator lamps in the button indi-
: To raise the backrest contour cate the heating level you have selected.
; To soften the backrest contour Driver's and front-passenger seat: the sys-
tem automatically switches down from level 3 to
= To lower the backrest contour
level 2 after approximately eight minutes.
? To harden the backrest contour
Rear seat: the system automatically switches
You can adjust the contour of the front seat down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately
backrests individually to provide optimum sup- five minutes.
port for your back.
The system automatically switches down from
level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes.
Seat heating and seat ventilation The system automatically switches off approx-
Switching the seat heating on/off imately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1.
G WARNING ignition lock (Y page 123).
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to until the desired heating level is set.
become very hot. The health of persons with X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
limited temperature sensitivity or a limited until all the indicator lamps go out.
ability to react to excessively high tempera-
tures may be affected or they may even suffer
burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.
Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on
repeatedly.
Z
98 Steering wheel
Switching the seat ventilation on/off X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 123).
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired ventilation level is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
ventilation may switch off.
i You can open the side windows and the slid-
ing sunroof using the "Convenience opening"
feature (Y page 88). The seat ventilation of
the driver's seat automatically switches to the
Driver's and front-passenger seat highest level.
The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons

indicate the ventilation level you have selected.
Problems with the seat heating or seat ventilation

The seat heating or seat The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-
ventilation has switched ers are switched on.
off prematurely or can- X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
not be switched on. rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating or seat
ventilation can be switched back on manually.
Steering wheel When leaving the vehicle, always take the

Important safety notes leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G WARNING
The electrically adjustable steering wheel can
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in
the following while driving: the ignition lock.
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
G WARNING
Children could injure themselves if they
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of
injury.
Steering wheel 99
Adjusting the steering wheel electri- X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
cally lock (Y page 123).
X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direc-
tion of arrow : or ;.
Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out.
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when you
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock, the
steering wheel heating is deactivated.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch off
the ignition and open the driver's door, the
steering wheel heating is deactivated.
i The steering wheel heating may switch off
temporarily if:
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior is

: To adjust the steering wheel height
above 86 ‡ (30 †)
; To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-
Rthe temperature of the steering wheel is
and-aft adjustment)
above 95 ‡ (35 †)
i Further related subjects: Indicator lamp = remains on.
REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 100)
RStoring settings (Y page 104)
Steering wheel heating

Switching on/off
Problems with the steering wheel heating

The steering wheel heat- The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-
ing has switched off pre- ers are switched on.
maturely or cannot be X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
switched on. rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the steering wheel heating
will switch back on automatically.
Z
100 Steering wheel
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature Position of the steering wheel when the

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active
The steering wheel swings upwards when you:
G WARNING Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts Rwith KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door;
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle KEYLESS-GO must be in position 1
occupants – particularly children – could Rwith the SmartKey: open the driver's door;
become trapped. There is a risk of injury. the SmartKey is in position 0 or 1 must be in
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak- the ignition lock (Y page 123).
ing adjustments, make sure that no one has i The steering wheel only moves upwards if it
any body parts in the sweep of the steering has not already reached the upper stop.
wheel.
Position of the steering wheel for driv-
Move the steering wheel adjustment lever if

there is a risk of entrapment by the steering ing
wheel. The adjustment process is stopped. The steering wheel is moved to the last selected
position when:
You can stop the adjustment process by press-
Rthe driver's door is closed
ing one of the memory function's position but-
tons. This function is only available on vehicles Rwith KEYLESS-GO: you press the Start/Stop
with the memory function (Y page 103). button once
or
G WARNING
Rwith the SmartKey:you insert the SmartKey
If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea- into the ignition lock
ture, they can become trapped, particularly When you close the driver's door with the igni-
when unattended. There is a risk of injury. tion switched on, the steering wheel is also
When leaving the vehicle, always take the automatically moved to the previously set posi-
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never tion.
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The last position of the steering column is stored
when you switch off the ignition or when you
store the setting with the memory function
G WARNING (Y page 104).
If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature is making adjustments, you could lose Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident. If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is trig-
gered in an accident, the steering column will
Always wait until the adjustment process is move upwards when the driver's door is opened.
complete before driving off. This occurs irrespective of the position of the
SmartKey in the ignition lock. This makes it eas-
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in ier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants.
and out of your vehicle easier. The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only
You can activate and deactivate the EASY- operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is
ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 199). (Y page 199).
Mirrors 101
Mirrors mirror using button = as long as the indicator

lamp is lit.
Exterior mirrors X Press button = up, down, or to the right or
left until you have adjusted the exterior mirror
Adjusting the exterior mirrors to the correct position. You should have a
good overview of traffic conditions.
G WARNING
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do of vision.
the following while driving: After the engine has been started, the exterior
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, mirrors are automatically heated if the rear win-
steering wheel or mirrors dow defroster is switched on and the outside
temperature is low. Heating takes a maximum of
Rfasten the seat belt ten minutes.
There is a risk of an accident. i You can also heat up the exterior mirrors

Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- manually by switching on the rear window
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt defroster.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
G WARNING electrically
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side reduces the size of the image. Visible
objects are actually closer than they appear.
This means that you could misjudge the dis-
tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.
when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
For this reason, always make sure of the
actual distance from the road users traveling
behind by glancing over your shoulder.

X Briefly press :.
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are
always folded out fully while driving. They
could otherwise vibrate.
i If you are driving faster than 30 mph
(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exte-
rior mirrors.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the Resetting the exterior mirrors

X Press button : for the left exterior mirror or
If the battery has been disconnected or com-
button ; for the right exterior mirror. pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be
The indicator lamp in the corresponding but- reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not
ton lights up in red. fold in when you switch on the "Fold in mirrors
when locking" function in the on-board com-
The indicator lamp goes out again after some puter (Y page 200).
time. You can adjust the selected exterior
Z
102 Mirrors
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition If you come into contact with the electrolyte,
lock (Y page 123). observe the following:
X Briefly press :.
RRinse off the electrolyte from your skin
immediately with water.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of
automatically
your eyes thoroughly with clean water.
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately
activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 200): rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not
Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
induce vomiting.
soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside. RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your
Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automati- skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical
cally as soon as you unlock the vehicle and attention immediately.
then open the driver's or front-passenger RImmediately change out of clothing which
door.
has come into contact with electrolyte.
i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
manually, they do not fold out. attention immediately.
Exterior mirror pushed out of position The exterior mirror on the driver's side and the
rear-view mirror automatically go into anti-glare
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of mode if:
position, proceed as follows:
Rthe ignition is switched on and
X Vehicles without electrically folding exte-
Rincident light from headlamps strikes the sen-
rior mirrors: manually move the exterior mir-
ror into the correct position. sor in the rear-view mirror
X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if
mirrors: press and hold button : until you reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting
hear a click and then the mirror engaging in is switched on.
position (Y page 101).
The mirror housing is engaged again and you
can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual Parking position for the exterior mir-
(Y page 101). ror on the front-passenger side
Setting and storing the parking position
Automatic anti-glare mirrors You can set the front-passenger side exterior
mirror such that you can see the rear wheel on
G WARNING that side as soon as you engage reverse gear.
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto- You can store this position.
matic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte
is harmful and causes irritation. It must not
come into contact with your skin, eyes, res-
piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.
Memory function 103
Using reverse gear X Press memory button M ? and one of the

arrows on button = within three seconds.
The parking position is stored if the exterior
mirror does not move.
X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat
these steps.
Calling up a stored parking position set-

ting
lock (Y page 123).
X Select the exterior mirror on the front-
: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror passenger side by pressing button ;.

; Button for the front-passenger side exterior X Engage reverse gear.
mirror The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
= Button for the exterior mirror setting side moves to the stored parking position.
? Memory button M The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side
moves back to its original position:
X Park the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to
position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 123). Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph
(15 km/h)
X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on the
Rif you press button : for the exterior mirror
front-passenger side.
on the driver's side
X Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the preset parking position.
X Use button = to adjust the exterior mirror to
Memory function
a position that allows you to see the rear Important safety notes
wheel and the curb.
The parking position is stored. G WARNING
i If you shift the transmission to another posi- If you use the memory function on the driver's
tion, the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side returns to the driving position. side while driving, you could lose control of
the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
Using the memory button being made. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the memory function on the driver's
You can store the parking position of the exte- side when the vehicle is stationary.
rior mirror on the front-passenger side using
memory button M ?. The reverse gear must not
be engaged. G WARNING
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition Children could become trapped if they acti-
lock (Y page 123). vate the memory function, particularly when
X When the exterior mirror on the front- unattended. There is a risk of injury.
passenger side is active, press button = to When leaving the vehicle, always take the
adjust the exterior mirror. In the exterior mir- SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
ror, the rear wheel and the curb should be
visible.
G WARNING
When the memory function adjusts the seat or
steering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-
Z
104 Memory function
pants – particularly children – could become Calling up a stored setting

trapped. There is a risk of injury. XPress and hold the relevant memory position
While the memory function is making adjust- switch 1, 2 or 3, until the seat, steering wheel
ments, make sure that no one has any body and exterior mirrors are in the stored position.
parts in the sweep of the seat or steering i The setting procedure is interrupted as soon
wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme- as you release the storage position button.
diately release the memory function position
button. The adjustment process is stopped.
The memory function can be used at any time,

e.g. even when the SmartKey is not in the igni-
tion lock.
Storing settings
With the memory function, you can store up to
three different settings, e.g. for three different
people.
The following settings are stored as a single
memory preset:
Rposition of the seat, backrest and head
restraint
Ractive multicontour seat: seat contour,
dynamic function level
Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors
on the driver's and front-passenger sides
X Adjust the seat (Y page 94).

X On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel
(Y page 99) and the exterior mirrors
(Y page 101).
X Press memory button M and then press one of
the memory position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within
three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected preset
position. A tone sounds when the settings
have been completed.
Exterior lighting 105
Exterior lighting Automatic headlamp mode
General notes G WARNING

When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-
USA only: if you wish to drive during the daytime beam headlamps may not be switched on
without lights, switch off the Daytime run‐
ning lamps function via the on-board computer automatically if there is fog, snow or other
(Y page 198). causes of poor visibility due to the weather
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
accident.
Setting the exterior lighting In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
Setting options
Exterior lighting can be set using: The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid.
The driver is responsible for the vehicle's light-
Rthe light switch (Y page 105) ing at all times.
Rthe combination switch (Y page 106) Ã is the favored light switch position.
Rthe on-board computer (Y page 198) The light setting is automatically selected
Lights and windshield wipers

according to the brightness of the ambient light,
Light switch but not in the event of poor visibility due to
weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray.
Operation RWith the SmartKey in position 1 in the ignition
lock: the parking lamps are switched on/off
automatically depending on the brightness of
the ambient light.
RIf you have switched on the Daytime run‐
ning lamps function in the on-board com-
puter, the daytime running lamps or the park-
ing lamps and low-beam headlamps are
switched on or off automatically while the
engine is running, depending on the bright-
ness of the ambient light.
X To switch on the automatic headlamps:
turn the light switch to the Ã position.
1 W Left-hand standing lamps Canada only: the daytime running lamps
2 X Right-hand standing lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the
3 T Parking lamps, license plate and day. The daytime running lamps function is
instrument cluster lighting required by law in Canada. It cannot therefore
4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode, controlled be deactivated.
by the light sensor When the engine is running and the vehicle is
5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps stationary: if you move the selector lever from a
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the driving position to P, the daytime running
vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. lamps/low beam headlamps go out after three
minutes.
X Turn the light switch to Ã.
When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta-
The exterior lighting (except the parking/stand- tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the
ing lamps) switches off automatically if you: light switch to the T position, the daytime
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
running lamps and parking lamps switch on.
Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in
If the engine is running and you turn the light
position 0 in the ignition lock switch to the L position, the manual settings
take precedence over the daytime running
lamps.
Z
106 Exterior lighting
USA only: the daytime running lamps improve Standing lamps

the visibility of your vehicle during the day. To do Switching on the standing lamps ensures the
this, the Daytime running lamps function corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.
must be switched on using the on-board com-
X To switch on the standing lamps: turn the
puter (Y page 198).
SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock or
If the engine is running and you turn the light
remove the SmartKey.
switch to the T or L position, the manual
settings take precedence over the daytime run- X Turn the light switch to the W (left-hand
ning lamps. side of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of
the vehicle) position.
Low-beam headlamps
G WARNING
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-
Combination switch
beam headlamps may not be switched on
automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is

dark, the parking lamps and low-beam head-
lamps switch on when the ignition is switched on
and the light switch is set to the L position. : High-beam headlamps
This is a particularly useful function in the event ; Turn signal, right
of rain and fog.
= High-beam flasher
X To switch on the low beam headlamps: ? Turn signal, left
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to posi-
tion 2 or start the engine. X To indicate briefly: press the combination
X Turn the light switch to the L position.
switch briefly to the pressure point in the
The green L indicator lamp in the instru- direction of arrow ; or ?.
ment cluster lights up. The corresponding turn signal flashes three
times.
Parking lamps X To indicate: press the combination switch
beyond the pressure point in the direction of
! If the battery charge is very low, the parking arrow ; or ?.
lamps or standing lamps are automatically
X To switch on the high-beam headlamps:
switched off to enable the next engine start.
Always park your vehicle safely and in a well lit turn the light switch to the L or Ã
area, in accordance with the relevant legal position.
stipulations. Avoid using the T parking X Press the combination switch beyond the
lamps over a period of several hours. If pos- pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
sible, switch on the right-hand X or left- In the Ã position, the high-beam head-
hand W standing lamps. lamps are switched on only when it is dark and
the engine is running.
X To switch on the parking lamps: turn the
light switch to the T position.
The green T indicator lamp on the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
Exterior lighting 107
The blue K indicator lamp on the instru- Active:

ment cluster lights up when the high-beam Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph
headlamps are switched on. (40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or
X To switch off the high-beam headlamps: turn the steering wheel
move the combination switch back to its nor- Rif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph
mal position. (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn
The blue K indicator lamp on the instru- the steering wheel
ment cluster goes out.
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short
Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: if time, but is automatically switched off after no
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, it auto- more than three minutes.
matically controls activation and deactivation of Cornering light function with traffic circle
the high-beam headlamps (Y page 107). function:
X High-beam flasher: pull the combination The cornering light function is activated on both
switch in the direction of arrow =. sides before entering a traffic circle through an
evaluation of the current GPS position of the
vehicle. It remains active until after the vehicle
Hazard warning lamps has left the traffic circle. In this way, pedestrians

crossing the road, for example, are illuminated
by your vehicle in good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist

General notes
You can use this function to set the headlamps
to change between low beam and high beam
automatically. The system recognizes vehicles
with their lights on, either approaching from the
opposite direction or traveling in front of your
vehicle, and consequently switches the head-
X To switch the hazard warning lamps on or lamps from high beam to low beam.
off: press button :.
The system automatically adapts the low-beam
The turn signal lamps flash when the hazard
headlamp range depending on the distance to
warning lamps are switched on. If you now
the other vehicle. Once the system no longer
switch on a turn signal lamp using the com-
detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the
bination switch, only the turn signal lamp on
high-beam headlamps.
the corresponding side of the vehicle will
flash. The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windshield near the overhead control panel.
The hazard warning lamps switch on automati-
cally if an air bag is deployed.
The hazard warning lamps still operate if the
ignition is switched off. G WARNING
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize
Cornering light function road users:
Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
The cornering light function improves the illu-
mination of the road over a wide angle in the Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
direction you are turning, enabling better visi- Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
bility in tight bends, for example. It can only be
activated when the low-beam headlamps are On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
switched on. Assist may fail to recognize other road users
that have lights, or may recognize them too
Z
108 Interior lighting
late. In this, or in similar situations, the auto- cator lamp in the multifunction display
matic high-beam headlamps will not be deac- remains lit.
X To switch off:move the combination switch
tivated or will be activated regardless. There is
back to its normal position or move the light
switch to another position.
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions The K indicator lamp on the instrument
and switch off the high-beam headlamps in cluster goes out.
good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into Headlamps fogged up on the inside
account road, weather or traffic conditions.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are Certain climatic and physical conditions may
responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This
to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic con- moisture does not affect the functionality of the
ditions. headlamp.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired if:
Interior lighting
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy

rain or snow
Overview of interior lighting
covering the sensors Front overhead control panel
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist
on/off
X To switch on: turn the light switch to the
Ã position.
X Press the combination switch forwards
beyond the pressure point (Y page 106).
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction
display lights up when it is dark and the light
sensor switches on the low-beam headlamps.
If you are driving at speeds above approx-
imately 16 mph (25 km/h):
: u Switches the rear compartment inte-
The headlamp range is set automatically
rior lighting on/off
depending on the distance between the vehi-
cle and other road users. ; | Switches the automatic interior light-
ing control on/off
If you are driving at speeds above approx-
imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road = p Switches the right-hand front reading
users have been detected: lamp on/off
? c Switches the front interior lighting on/
The high-beam headlamps are switched on
automatically. The K indicator lamp in the off
instrument cluster also lights up. A p Switches the left-hand front reading
lamp on/off
If you are driving at speeds below approx-
imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road users
have been detected or the roads are ade-
quately lit:
The high-beam headlamps are switched off
automatically. The K indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out. The _ indi-
Windshield wipers 109
Rear-compartment overhead control Replacing bulbs

panel
The front and rear light clusters of your vehicle
are equipped with LED light bulbs. Do not
replace the LED light sources of your vehicle
yourself. Contact a qualified specialist work-
shop which has the necessary specialist knowl-
edge and tools to carry out the work required.
Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety.
You must therefore make sure that these func-
tion correctly at all times. Have the headlamp
setting checked regularly.
: p Switches the right-hand reading lamp Windshield wipers

on/off
; p Switches the left-hand reading lamp Switching the windshield wipers
on/off

on/off
! Do not operate the windshield wipers when
the windshield is dry, as this could damage
Interior lighting control the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col-
lected on the windshield can scratch the glass
General notes if wiping takes place when the windshield is
dry.
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from
discharging, the interior lighting functions are If it is necessary to switch on the windshield
automatically deactivated after some time wipers in dry weather conditions, always use
except for when the SmartKey is in position 2 in washer fluid when operating the windshield
the ignition lock. wipers.
The color and brightness of the ambient lighting ! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the
may be set using the on-board computer windshield after the vehicle has been washed
(Y page 198). in an automatic car wash, wax or other resi-
dues may be the reason for this. Clean the
Automatic interior lighting control windshield using washer fluid after washing
the vehicle in an automatic car wash.
X To switch on or off: press the | button.
When the automatic interior lighting control is ! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to
activated, the button is flush with the over- optical influences and the windshield becom-
head control panel. ing dirty in dry weather conditions, the wind-
shield wipers may be activated inadvertently.
The interior lighting automatically switches on if This could then damage the windshield wiper
you: blades or scratch the windshield.
Runlock the vehicle For this reason, you should always switch off
Ropen a door. the windshield wipers in dry weather.
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
The interior light is activated for a short while
when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition
lock. You can activate this delayed switch-off
using the on-board computer (Y page 199).
Z
110 Windshield wipers
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a

wiper blade back onto the windshield.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release the
windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade
and it falls onto the windshield, the windshield
may be damaged by the force of the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the wiper blades changed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make
1 $ Windshield wiper off sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the
2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set wiper.
to low sensitivity)
3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor Replacing the wiper blades
set to high sensitivity)
4 ° Continuous wipe, slow Removing the wiper blades
5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast X Switch off the engine.

B í Single wipe X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
î To wipe with washer fluid or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:
X Switch on the ignition. X Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics now have status 0.
X Turn the combination switch to the corre-
This is the same as the SmartKey having been
sponding position.
removed.
Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä or X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.
Å position, the appropriate wiping frequency
is automatically set according to the intensity of
the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is
more sensitive than in the Ä position, caus-
ing the windshield wiper to wipe more fre-
quently.
If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will
no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent
you from observing the traffic conditions.
Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes X Firmly press release knob : and pull the
wiper blade upwards from the wiper arm in
G WARNING the direction of the arrow.
If the windshield wipers begin to move while
Installing the wiper blades
you are changing the wiper blades, you could
be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of X Position new wiper blade : in the retainer on
the wiper arm and slide it into place in the
injury.
opposite direction of the arrow.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and The wiper blade audibly engages.
ignition before changing the wiper blades. X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor-
rectly.
! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.
arm has been folded away from the wind-
shield.
Windshield wipers 111
Problems with the windshield wipers

The windshield wipers Leaves or snow, for example, are obstructing windshield wiper move-
are jammed. ment. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X Switch off the engine.
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:
X Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the
SmartKey having been removed.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.

fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.

X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
The windshield washer The spray nozzles are misaligned.
fluid from the spray noz- X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop.
zles no longer hits the
center of the windshield.
Z
112 Overview of climate control systems
Overview of climate control systems i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during
warm weather, e.g. using the convenience
General notes opening feature (Y page 88). This will speed
up the cooling process and the desired inte-
Observe the settings recommended on the fol- rior temperature will be reached more
lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fog quickly.
up.
To prevent the windows from fogging up: i The integrated filter filters out most parti-
cles of dust and soot and completely filters
Climate control
Rswitch off climate control only briefly

out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants
Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly and odors. A clogged filter reduces the
Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifica- amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior.
tion function For this reason, you should always observe
Rswitch on the defrost windshield function the interval for replacing the filter, which is
briefly, if required specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it
depends on environmental conditions, e.g.
Climate control regulates the temperature and
heavy air pollution, the interval may be
the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters
shorter than stated in the Maintenance Book-
undesirable substances out of the air.
let.
Climate control can only be operated when the
engine is running. Optimum operation is only i It is possible that the residual heat function
achieved with the side windows and roof closed. may be activated automatically an hour after
The residual heat function can only be activated the SmartKey is removed. The vehicle is then
or deactivated with the ignition switched off ventilated for 30 minutes to dry the automatic
(Y page 120). climate control.
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
Canada only
: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 117)
; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 118)
= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 118)
? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 116)
A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 119)
B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 117)
Overview of climate control systems 113
C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 120)

D Setting the air distribution (Y page 118)
E Increases the airflow (Y page 118)
F Reduces the airflow (Y page 118)
G Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 116)
H Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 117)
Climate control
USA only
= Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 119)
C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 120)
D Sets the air distribution (Y page 118)
E Increases the airflow (Y page 118)
F Reduces the airflow (Y page 118)
G Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 116)
H Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 117)
114 Overview of climate control systems
Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control

Climate control
Canada only
Front control panel
= Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 120)
C Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 118)
D Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 116)
E Sets the air distribution (Y page 118)
F Increases the airflow (Y page 118)
G Reduces the airflow (Y page 118)
H Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 117)
I Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 120)
J Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 117)
Rear control panel

K Increases the airflow (Y page 118)
L Reduces the airflow (Y page 118)
M Display
N Reduces the temperature (Y page 117)
O Increases the temperature (Y page 117)
Overview of climate control systems 115
Climate control
USA only
Front control panel
= Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 119)
C Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 118)
D Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 116)
E Sets the air distribution (Y page 118)
F Increases the airflow (Y page 118)
G Reduces the airflow (Y page 118)
H Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 117)
I Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 120)
J Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 117)
Rear control panel

K Increases the airflow (Y page 118)
L Reduces the airflow (Y page 118)
M Display
N Reduces the temperature (Y page 117)
O Increases the temperature (Y page 117)
Optimum use of automatic climate RActivate climate control using the Ã and
control ¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above the
Ã and ¿ buttons light up.
Climate control system RIn automatic mode, you can also use the ñ
button to set the climate mode (FOCUS,
Below, you can find a number of notes and rec- MEDIUM or DIFFUSE). The MEDIUM level is
ommendations to help you use climate control recommended.
optimally. RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
116 Operating the climate control systems
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function Operating the climate control sys-
briefly until the windshield is clear again. tems
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if
there are unpleasant outside odors or when in Activating/deactivating climate con-
a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, trol
since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in
air-recirculation mode. General notes
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temper-
When the climate control is switched off, the air
Climate control
ature settings on the driver's side for the

front-passenger side and the rear compart- supply and air circulation are also switched off.
ment as well. The indicator lamp above the The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off
á button goes out. climate control only briefly
RVehicles with 3-zone automatic climate con- i Activate climate control primarily using the
trol: use the residual heat function if you want Ã button (Y page 117).
to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when
the ignition is switched off. The residual heat Activating/deactivating
function can only be activated or deactivated
with the ignition switched off. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
RIf you change the settings of the climate con- lock (Y page 123).
trol system, the climate status display X To activate: press the Ã button.
appears for approximately three seconds at The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights
the bottom of the screen in the multimedia up. Airflow and air distribution are set to auto-
system display. You will see the current set- matic mode.
tings of the various climate control functions. X To deactivate: press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
ECO start/stop function up.
During automatic engine switch-off, the climate
control system only operates at a reduced capa-
city. If you require the full climate control output,
you can switch off the ECO start/stop function
by pressing the ECO button (Y page 127).
Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off

General notes
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not
be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more
quickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidification function only briefly.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The air
inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected.
Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normal
and not a sign that there is a malfunction.
Activating/deactivating
X To activate: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights up.
X To deactivate: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
has a delayed switch-off feature.
Operating the climate control systems 117
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

The indicator lamp in the Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal-
¿ button flashes function.
three times or remains X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
off. The "Cooling with air
dehumidification" func-
Climate control
tion cannot be switched
on.
Setting climate control to automatic You can select the following climate mode set-
tings in automatic mode:
General notes FOCUS high airflow, slightly cooler setting
In automatic mode, the set temperature is main- MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting
tained automatically at a constant level. The DIFFUSE low airflow, slightly warmer and draft-
system automatically regulates the temperature free setting
of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis- X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
tribution.
lock (Y page 123).
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
X Press the Ã button.
is activated automatically in automatic mode.
X Press the ñ button repeatedly until the
desired climate mode appears in the display.
Automatic control
lock (Y page 123). Setting the temperature
X Set the desired temperature.
X To switch on: press the Ã button. Dual-zone automatic climate control
The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights Different temperatures can be set for the driv-
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are er's and front-passenger sides.
activated.
3-zone automatic climate control: when auto- lock (Y page 123).
matic mode is activated, you can set the climate
X To increase or reduce: turn temperature
mode (Y page 117).
control : or B counter-clockwise or clock-
X To switch to manual mode:press the _
wise (Y page 112).
button.
Only change the temperature setting in small
or increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
X Press the I or K button.
The indicator lamp in the Ã button goes
out. 3-zone automatic climate control
You can select different temperature settings
for the driver's and front-passenger sides as well
Adjusting the climate mode settings as for the rear compartment.
The "Set climate mode" function is only available
with 3-zone automatic climate control. lock (Y page 123).
X To increase or reduce the temperature in
the front compartment:turn temperature
control : or B counter-clockwise or clock-
wise (Y page 114).
Only change the temperature setting in small Setting the air distribution
increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
the rear compartment using the front con- lock (Y page 123).
trol panel:press the á button. X Press the _ button repeatedly until the
The indicator lamp in the á button goes desired symbol appears in the display.
out.
The temperature setting for the driver's side
Climate control
is adopted for the rear compartment and the Setting the airflow
front-passenger side.
X Turn temperature control : counter-clock-
wise or clockwise (Y page 114). lock (Y page 123).
X To increase: press the K button.
Only change the temperature setting in small
increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). X To reduce: press the I button.
the rear compartment using the rear con- i You can use 3-zone automatic climate con-
trol panel:press the r or s button on trol to set the airflow in the rear compartment
separately.
the rear control panel.
Only change the temperature setting in small If the battery is not sufficiently charged, blower
increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). output may be reduced. As soon as the battery
is sufficiently charged, full blower output will be
available.
Setting the air distribution
Air distribution settings Switching the ZONE function on/off
X To activate: press the á button.
P Directs air through the center and side air
vents The indicator lamp in the á button lights
up.
O Directs air through the footwell air vents
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the tem-
S Directs air through the center, side and perature setting for the driver's side is not
footwell vents adopted for the front-passenger side.
¯ Directs air through the defroster vents 3-zone automatic climate control: the tem-
b Directs the airflow through the defroster, perature setting for the driver's side is not
center and side air vents (Canada only) adopted for the front-passenger side and the
a Directs air through the defroster and rear compartment.
footwell vents X To deactivate: press the á button.
_ Directs the airflow through the defroster The indicator lamp in the á button goes
vents, the center and side air vents as out.
well as the footwell air vents (Canada Dual-zone automatic climate control: the tem-
only) perature setting for the driver's side is adop-
ted for the front-passenger side.
i Regardless of the air distribution setting,
airflow is always directed through the side air 3-zone automatic climate control: the tem-
vents. The side air vents can only be closed perature setting for the driver's side is adop-
when the controls on the side air vents are ted for the front-passenger side and the rear
turned downwards. compartment.
Defrosting the windshield

You can use this function to defrost the wind-
shield or to clear a fogged up windshield or side
windows on the inside.
Operating the climate control systems 119
Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" function Defrosting the windows

as soon as the windshield is clear again.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition Windows fogged up on the inside
lock (Y page 123). X Activate the ¿ cooling with air dehumidi-
X To activate: press the ¬ button. fication function.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights X Activate automatic mode Ã.
up.
X Adjust the side air vents so that the warmed
The climate control system switches to the
Climate control
air is directed to the side windows.
following functions:
X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the
Rhigh airflow "windshield defrosting" function ¬.
Rhigh temperature
i You should only select this setting until the
Rair distribution to the windshield and front windshield is clear again.
side windows
Rair-recirculation mode off Windows fogged up on the outside
If the battery is not sufficiently charged, blower
X Press the _ button repeatedly until the
output may be reduced. Once the battery is suf-
P or O symbol appears in the display.
ficiently charged again, full blower output will be
available again. X Adjust the side air vents so that no air is
directed to the side windows.
X To deactivate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. The previously selected settings are
restored. Air-recirculation mode remains Rear window defroster
deactivated.
General notes
The rear window defroster has a high current
MAX COOL maximum cooling draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon
as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear
The MAX COOL function is only available in vehi- window defroster switches off automatically
cles for the USA. after several minutes.
MAX COOL is only operational when the engine If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window
is running. defroster may switch off.
X To activate: press the Ù button.
The indicator lamp in the Ù button lights Activating or deactivating
up.
X To deactivate: press the Ù button. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
The indicator lamp in the Ù button goes lock (Y page 123).
out. The previously selected settings are X Press the ¤ button.
restored. The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights
When you activate MAX COOL, the following up or goes out.
functions are also activated:
Rmaximum cooling
Rmaximum airflow
Rair-recirculation mode
Problems with the rear window defroster

The rear window The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
defroster has deactiva- X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,
ted prematurely or can- interior lighting or the seat heating.
not be activated. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster
can be activated again.
Climate control
Switching air-recirculation mode Air-recirculation mode deactivates automati-

on/off cally:
Rafter approximately five minutes at outside
General notes temperatures below approximately 41 ‡
(5 †)
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if
Rafter approximately five minutes if cooling
unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle from
outside. The air already inside the vehicle will with air dehumidification is deactivated
then be recirculated. Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the win- temperatures above approximately 41 ‡
dows can fog up more quickly, in particular at (5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-
low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation tion" function is activated
mode briefly to prevent the windows from fog-
ging up.
Switching the residual heat on or off
Activating/deactivating
General notes
The residual heat function is only available with
lock (Y page 123).
3-zone automatic climate control.
X To activate: press the g button.
It is possible to make use of the residual heat of
The indicator lamp in the g button lights the engine to continue heating the vehicle for
up. approximately 30 minutes after the engine has
Dual-zone automatic climate control: air-recir- been switched off. The heating time depends on
culation mode is automatically activated at high the set interior temperature.
outside temperatures.
3-zone automatic climate control: air-recircula- Activating/deactivating
tion mode is automatically activated at high lev-
els of pollution or at high outside temperatures. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition
When air-recirculation mode is activated auto- lock or remove it (Y page 123).
matically, the indicator lamp above the g X To switch on: press the Ì button.
button does not light up. Outside air is added The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights
after approximately 30 minutes. up.
X To deactivate: press the g button. If the residual heat function is activated, the
The indicator lamp in the g button goes windows may fog up on the inside.
out. The blower will run at a low speed regardless of
the airflow setting.
If you activate the residual heat function at high
temperatures, only the ventilation will be acti-
vated. The blower runs at medium speed.
Air vents 121
X To switch off: press the Ì button.

The indicator lamp in the Ì button goes
out.
Residual heat is deactivated automatically:
Rafter approximately 30 minutes
Rwhen the ignition is switched on
Rif the battery voltage drops
Climate control
Air vents
Important safety notes Example
: Defroster vent
G WARNING ; Side air vent
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air = Thumbwheel for side air vent
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in X To open or close: turn thumbwheel = up or
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There down.
is a risk of injury. Adjust the rear air vents and the air vent in the
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always glove box (see the Digital Operator's Manual).
maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-
lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air

through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield and
the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow
or leaves.
Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles in
the vehicle interior.
Setting the air vents

Air vents are located:
Ron the left and right-hand side of the dash-
board
Rin the middle of the dashboard
Rin the glove box
Rin the rear-compartment center console
Z
122 Driving
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle Self-locking rear axle differential

(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking dif-
The sensor system of some driving and driving ferential on the rear axle.
safety systems adjusts automatically while a
Change the oil to improve protection of the rear
certain distance is being driven after the vehicle
axle differential:
has been delivered or after repairs. Full system
effectiveness is not reached until the end of this Rafter a breaking-in period of 1,850 miles
(3,000 km)
Driving and parking
teach-in procedure.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only Revery 31,000 miles (50,000 km) or 3 years
reach their optimum braking effect after several These oil changes prolong the service life of the
hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for differential. Have the oil change carried out at a
this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. qualified specialist workshop.
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) Driving

The more you look after the engine when it is Important safety notes
new, the more satisfied you will be with its per-
formance in the future. G WARNING
RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicle Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
(1500 km).
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle,
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
during this period.
RChange gear in good time, before the tach- Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
ometer needle is Ô of the way to the red area stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
of the tachometer. the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake securely and as specified in order to ensure
the vehicle. sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal loose floormats and do not place floormats on
beyond the point of resistance (kickdown). top of one another.
Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-AMG
vehicles: G WARNING
RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h) Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km). of the pedals, e.g.:
ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum
engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly. Rshoes with thick soles
RChange gear in good time. Rshoes with high heels
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase Rslippers
the engine speed gradually and accelerate the There is a risk of an accident.
vehicle to full speed.
You should also observe these notes on break- Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
ing in if the engine or parts of the drive train on usage of the pedals.
your vehicle have been replaced.
Always observe the respective maximum per- G WARNING
missible speed. If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
Driving 123
boosting effect. You will require considerably 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk the windshield wipers
of an accident. 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
and drive position
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
3 To start the engine
G WARNING i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition

lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for
If the parking brake has not been fully the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on.
Driving and parking

released when driving, the parking brake can: The engine cannot be started.
Roverheat and cause a fire
Rlose its hold function. KEYLESS-GO
There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release General notes
the parking brake fully before driving off.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with
SmartKeys featuring the integrated KEYLESS-
! Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle GO function and a detachable Start/Stop but-
stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid high ton.
engine speeds and driving at full throttle until
the engine has reached its operating temper- The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
ature. ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the
vehicle.
Only shift the automatic transmission to the
desired drive position when the vehicle is sta- When you insert the Start/Stop button into the
tionary. ignition lock, the system needs approximately
two seconds recognition time. You can then use
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive the Start/Stop button.
wheels when pulling away on slippery roads.
You could otherwise damage the drive train. Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in
succession corresponds to the different Smart-
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine oil Key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the
temperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the max- case if you are not depressing the brake pedal.
imum engine speed is restricted in order to If you depress the brake pedal and press the
protect the engine. To protect the engine and Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-
maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driv- ately.
ing at full throttle when the engine is cold. A check which periodically establishes a radio
connection between the vehicle and the Smart-
Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is in
SmartKey positions the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when
starting the engine.
SmartKey To start the vehicle without actively using the
SmartKey:
Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
ignition lock.
Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 76).
Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key:
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
or another SmartKey.
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.
g To remove the SmartKey This can affect the functionality of KEYLESS-GO.
(shift the transmission to position P)
Z
124 Driving
If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey's Removing the Start/Stop button
remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a You can remove the Start/Stop button from the
short time: ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal
Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition using the SmartKey.
with the Start/Stop button. It is only possible to switch between Start/Stop
Ryou will not be able to start the engine with the button mode and SmartKey operation when the
Start/Stop button until the vehicle is transmission is in position P.
unlocked again. X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition
Driving and parking
The engine can be switched off while the vehicle lock ;.

is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/ You do not have to remove the Start/Stop but-
Stop button for three seconds. This function ton from the ignition lock when you leave the
operates independently of the ECO start/stop vehicle. You should, however, always take the
automatic engine switch-off function. SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As
Key positions with KEYLESS-GO long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:
Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/
Stop button
Rthe electrically powered equipment can be
operated
Starting the engine

G WARNING
: Start/Stop button they could:
; Ignition lock
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the people or road users.
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
up. Indicator and warning lamps, see
(Y page 226). Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
If Start/Stop button : has not yet been Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey motion if, for example, they:
being removed from the ignition.
Rrelease the parking brake.
X To switch on the power supply: press
Start/Stop button : once. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
The power supply is switched on. You can now park position P
activate the windshield wipers, for example. RStart the engine.
The power supply is switched off again if:
Rthe driver's door is opened and
Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when in
this position
leave children or animals unattended in the
X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
button : twice.
The ignition is switched on. reach of children.
If you press Start/Stop button : once when
in this position, the ignition is deactivated G WARNING
again. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
Driving 125
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave depressed.
X Press the Start/Stop button once
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
(Y page 123).
out sufficient ventilation. The engine starts.
G WARNING
Flammable materials introduced through Pulling away
environmental influence or by animals can
Driving and parking

ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or General notes
parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk
of fire. G WARNING
Carry out regular checks to make sure that If the engine speed is above the idling speed
there are no flammable foreign materials in and you engage transmission position D or R,
the engine compartment or in the exhaust the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
system. a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
General notes always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
i The catalytic converter is preheated for up
to 30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of ! If a warning tone sounds and the Release
the engine may change during this time. Park. Brake message appears in the multi-
function display, the parking brake is still
Automatic transmission applied. Release the parking brake.
Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling
X Shift the transmission to position P.
away.
The transmission position display in the mul-
tifunction display shows P. The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled
away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.
i You can start the engine in transmission You can open the doors from the inside at any
position P and N. time.
You can also deactivate the automatic locking
Starting procedure with the SmartKey feature (Y page 199).
It is only possible to shift the transmission from
i To start the engine using the SmartKey position P to the desired position if you depress
instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop the brake pedal. If the brake pedal is not
button out of the ignition lock. depressed, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be
X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition moved but the parking lock remains engaged.
lock (Y page 123) and release it as soon as the i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds
engine is running. after a cold start. This helps the catalytic con-
verter to reach its operating temperature
Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine more quickly.
i The Start/Stop button can be used to start Hill start assist

the vehicle manually without inserting the
SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/ Hill start assist helps you when pulling away for-
Stop button must be inserted in the ignition wards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds
lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. the vehicle for a short time after you have
This mode for starting the engine operates removed your foot from the brake pedal. This
independently of the ECO start/stop auto- gives you enough time to move your foot from
matic engine start function. the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to
depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.
Z
126 Driving
G WARNING General notes

After a short time, hill start assist will no lon-
ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
Driving and parking
assist.
: ECO start/stop display
Hill start assist is not active if: The ECO start/stop function is activated when
Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a you start the engine.
downhill gradient. If the engine has been switched off automati-
Rthe transmission is in position N. cally by the ECO start/stop function, the ¤
Rthe parking brake is applied.
symbol is shown in the multifunction display.
RESP® is malfunctioning.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the AMG menu in the
multifunction display additionally shows the
Stop/Start active message.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop
ECO start/stop function function is only available in drive program C.
Introduction
Automatic engine switch-off
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N,
under certain conditions. the ECO start/stop function switches off the
The engine starts automatically when the driver engine automatically.
wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop The ECO start/stop function is operational
function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel when:
consumption and emissions of your vehicle. Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
green.
Important safety notes Rthe outside temperature is within the range
that is suitable for the system.
G WARNING Rthe engine is at normal operating tempera-
If the engine is switched off automatically and ture.
you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior
automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. has been reached.
There is a risk of accident and injury. Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off Rthe system detects that the windshield is not
the ignition and secure the vehicle against fogged up when the air-conditioning system is
rolling away. switched on.
Rthe hood is closed.
Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's
seat belt is fastened.
i All of the vehicle's systems remain active
when the engine is stopped automatically.
i The HOLD function can also be activated if
the engine has been switched off automati-
cally. It is then not necessary to continue
applying the brakes during the automatic stop
phase. When you depress the accelerator
Driving 127
pedal, the engine starts automatically and the Deactivating or activating the ECO
braking effect of the HOLD function is deac- start/stop function
tivated.
Automatic engine switch-off can take place a Mercedes-AMG vehicles
maximum of four times in a row (initial stop, then
three subsequent stops).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the number of con-
secutive automatic engine switch-offs is unlimi-
ted.
Driving and parking

All other models: automatic engine switch-off
can take place a maximum of four times in a row
(initial switch-off, then three subsequent switch-
offs).
Automatic engine start

The engine starts automatically if: X To deactivate: in drive program C, press ECO
Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by button :.
pressing the ECO button or
Rin transmission position D or N the brake X Switch to drive program S, S+ or
pedal is released and the HOLD function is not M(Y page 134).
active Indicator lamp ; goes out.
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal X To activate: press ECO button :.
Ryou engage reverse gear R Indicator lamp ; lights up.
Ryou move the transmission out of position P If drive program S, S+ or M is active, the auto-
Ryou switch to drive program S, S+ or M matic transmission switches to drive program
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) C.
Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driv- If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
er's door function has been deactivated manually or as
Rthe vehicle starts to roll the result of a malfunction. The engine will then
Rthe brake system requires this not be switched off automatically when the vehi-
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-
cle stops.
ates from the set range All other models
Rthe system detects moisture on the wind-
shield when the air-conditioning system is
switched on
Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low
i Shifting the transmission to position P does

not start the engine.
X To deactivate: press ECO button :.

Indicator lamp ; goes out.
X To activate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
Z
128 Driving
If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop not be switched off automatically when the vehi-
function has been deactivated manually or as cle stops.
the result of a malfunction. The engine will then
Problems with the engine

Driving and parking
The engine does not The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.
start. X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 157) or DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 155).
X Try to start the engine again.
The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.

start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
can be heard. Before attempting to start the engine again:
X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock.
or
X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster go out.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 124). Avoid excessively long
and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the
battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or
start. You cannot hear discharged.
the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 285).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:
The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:
Automatic transmission 129

The engine is not running There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical
smoothly and is misfir- component of the engine management system.
ing. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter
and damage it.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Driving and parking

The coolant temperature The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no
gauge shows a value longer being cooled sufficiently.
above 248 ‡ (120 †). X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to
cool down.
X Check the coolant level (Y page 268). Observe the warning notes
as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
Automatic transmission Selector lever (Mercedes-AMG vehi-

cles)
Overview of transmission positions
G WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or R,
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the engine. j Park position with parking lock
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an k Reverse gear
accident. i Neutral
After switching off the engine, always switch h Drive
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
cle from rolling away by applying the parking
Transmission position and drive pro-
brake.
gram display
The current transmission position and drive pro-
gram appear in the multifunction display.
Z
130 Automatic transmission
DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positions
: Transmission position display

Driving and parking
; Drive program display

Additionally, displays next to the selector lever
mark the current transmission position.
The indicators light up when the Smartkey is
inserted into the ignition lock. The indicators go
out when the Smartkey is removed from the
ignition lock.
j Park position with parking lock
If the transmission position display in the mul-
k Reverse gear
tifunction display is not working, you should pull
away carefully to check whether the desired i Neutral
transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you h Drive
should select transmission position D and drive The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the
program C or S. steering column.
The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its
Engaging park position P original position. The current transmission posi-
tion P, R, N or D appears in the transmission
position display in the multifunction display
(Y page 130).
Transmission position and drive pro-

gram display
The current transmission position and drive pro-
gram appear in the multifunction display.
X When the vehicle is stationary, press but-

ton :.
: Transmission position display

; Drive program display
The arrows in the transmission position display
show how and into which transmission positions
you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever.
If the transmission position display in the mul-
tifunction display is not working, you should pull
away carefully to check whether the desired
transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you
should select transmission position D and drive
program E or S.
Engaging park position P tion on the ECO start/stop function

(Y page 126).
! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle
is moving, do not shift the automatic trans- Shifting to neutral N
mission directly from D to R, from R to D or
directly to P. The automatic transmission G WARNING
could otherwise be damaged.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direction
they could:
of arrow P.
Driving and parking

Transmission position display P is shown in Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
the multifunction display. people or road users.
Depressing the brake and pushing the DIRECT Rget out and disrupt traffic.
SELECT lever up or down disengages the park- Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
ing lock. The transmission is in N neutral.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
In order to shift from park position P directly into
R or D: motion if, for example, they:
Rdepress the brake pedal and Rrelease the parking brake.
Rpush the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
past the first point of resistance park position P
RStart the engine.
Engaging park position P automatically There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Park position P is automatically engaged if: When leaving the vehicle, always take the
Ryou switch off the engine using the Smartkey SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
and remove the SmartKey leave children or animals unattended in the
Ryou switch off the engine using the Smartkey vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
or using the Start/Stop button and open the reach of children.
driver's door or front-passenger door
Rthe driver's door is opened when the vehicle is X If the transmission is in position D or R: push
stationary or driving at very low speed and the the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the
transmission is in position D or R first point of resistance.
Under certain conditions, the automatic trans- X If the transmission is in position P: depress
mission shifts automatically to transmission the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
position P if the HOLD function or DISTRONIC lever up or down to the first point of resist-
PLUS is activated. Observe the information on ance.
the HOLD function (Y page 158) and on If you switch the engine off with the transmis-
DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 153). sion in position R or D, the automatic transmis-
sion shifts to N automatically.
Engaging reverse gear R With the Smartkey: if you then open the driv-
! Only shift the automatic transmission to R er's door or the front-passenger door or remove
when the vehicle is stationary. the Smartkey from the ignition, the automatic
transmission shifts to P automatically.
X If the transmission is in position D or N: push With KEYLESS-GO: if you then open the driver's
the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first or front-passenger door, the automatic trans-
point of resistance. mission shifts to P.
X If the transmission is in position P: depress
If you want the automatic transmission to
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle
lever up past the first point of resistance. cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing
The ECO start/stop function is not available system:
when reverse gear is engaged. Further informa-
Z
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Transmission positions

Start/Stop button from the ignition lock.
X Insert the Smartkey into the ignition lock. B Park position
X All vehicles: switch the ignition on. Only shift the transmission into posi-
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it tion P when the vehicle is stationary
depressed. (Y page 142). The parking lock
X Shift to neutral N. should not be used as a brake when
parking. Always apply the parking
X Release the brake pedal.
brake in addition to the parking lock
Driving and parking
X Release the parking brake. in order to secure the vehicle.

X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smartkey If the vehicle electronics are malfunc-
in the ignition lock. tioning, the transmission may be
locked in position P. Have the vehicle
Engaging drive position D electronics checked immediately at a
X If the transmission is in position R or N: push Park position P is automatically
the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first engaged if:
point of resistance.
Ryou switch off the engine using the
X If the transmission is in position P: depress
SmartKey and remove the Smart-
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT Key
lever down past the first point of resistance.
Ryou switch off the engine using the
SmartKey or using the Start/Stop
button and open the driver's door
or front-passenger door
Rthe driver's door is opened when
the vehicle is stationary or driving
at very low speed and the trans-
mission is in position D or R
C Reverse gear
Only shift the transmission into posi-
tion R when the vehicle is stationary.
A Neutral reduces load change reactions and is conducive

to a sporty driving style. The sound generated by
Do not shift the transmission to N the double-clutch function depends on the drive
while driving. Otherwise, the auto- program selected.
matic transmission could be dam-
aged.
Kickdown
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive wheels. Use kickdown for maximum acceleration:
Releasing the brakes will allow you to X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
Driving and parking

move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push pressure point.
it or tow it. The automatic transmission shifts to a lower
If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shift gear depending on the engine speed.
the transmission only to position N if X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
the vehicle is in danger of skidding, desired speed is reached.
e.g. on icy roads. The automatic transmission shifts back up.
If you switch the engine off with the
transmission in position R or D, the
Rocking the vehicle free
automatic transmission shifts to N
automatically. Rocking the vehicle free by shifting back and
forth between transmission positions D and R
! Rolling in neutral N can damage can help to free a vehicle that has become stuck
the drive train. in mud or snow. The vehicle's engine manage-
7 Drive ment restricts switching between transmission
The automatic transmission changes positions D and R to speeds up to a maximum of
gear automatically. All forward gears 5 mph (9 km/h). To shift back and forth between
are available. transmission positions D and R, move the
DIRECT SELECT lever up and down past the
point of resistance.
Driving tips
Changing gear Program selector button
The automatic transmission shifts to the indi- General notes

vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-
mission position D. This automatic gear shifting
behavior is determined by:
Rthe selected drive program
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe road speed
Accelerator pedal position

Your style of driving influences how the auto-
matic transmission shifts gear:
Rlittle throttle: early upshifts
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles and
Rmore throttle: late upshifts
vehicles with AMG sports package)
X Press program selector button : repeatedly
Mercedes-AMG vehicles until the letter for the desired drive program
When shifting down, the double-clutch function appears in the multifunction display.
is active regardless of the currently selected
drive program. The double-clutch function
Z
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Driving and parking
Vehicles with the AMG Sports package

X Press program selector button : repeatedly Drive program selector with manual drive program
until the letter for the desired drive program
appears in the multifunction display. X Turn drive program selector : until the
desired drive program appears in the multi-
The program selector button allows you to function display in the speedometer.
choose between different driving characteris- The drive program indicator on drive program
tics. selector : lights up in red.
i Further information about permanent drive
program M (Y page 136). i Further information about permanent drive
program M (Y page 136).
As well as this permanent drive program M,
As well as this permanent drive program M,
you can also activate temporary drive pro-
gram M (Y page 135). you can also activate temporary drive pro-
gram M (Y page 135).
E Economy Comfortable, economical
driving C Controlled Comfortable, economical
Efficiency driving
S Sport Sporty driving style
S Sport Sporty driving style
M Manual Manual gear shifting
S+ SportPlus Particularly sporty driving
style
i For further information on the automatic
drive program, see (Y page 135). M Manual Manual gear shifting
i The automatic transmission shifts to auto- RS RACE Optimal vehicle accelera-

matic drive program E each time the engine is START tion from a standstill
started.
i For further information on the automatic
drive program, see (Y page 135).
i The automatic transmission shifts to auto-
matic drive program C each time the engine is
started.
i RS cannot be selected during normal driv-
ing. For further information on RACE START,
see (Y page 158).
Steering wheel paddle shifters Automatic drive program S

Drive program S (or, in the case of Mercedes-
AMG vehicles, drive programs S and S+) is char-
acterized by the following:
Rsporty engine and automatic transmission
settings.
Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later.
The fuel consumption possibly being higher
Driving and parking

as a result of the later automatic transmission
shift points.
Manual drive program M

In the manual drive program, you can change General notes
gears manually using steering wheel paddle
shifters : and ;. In this drive program, you can briefly change
gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle
Further information about permanent drive pro-
shifters. The transmission must be in position D.
You can activate manual drive program M in
Further information about temporary drive pro-
gram M (Y page 135). automatic drive programs E, C and S.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with
i You can only change gear with the steering AMG sports package: as well as temporary
wheel paddle shifters when the transmission drive program M you can also activate perma-
is in position D. nent drive program M (Y page 133).
Further information about permanent drive pro-
Automatic drive program
Activating
Automatic drive program E (C) X Shift the transmission to position D.
Drive program E (drive program C on Mercedes- X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddle
AMG vehicles) is characterized by the following: shifter (Y page 135).
Manual drive program M is temporarily acti-
Rcomfort-oriented engine and automatic trans-
vated. The multifunction display shows M and
mission settings.
the selected gear.
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the
automatic transmission shifting up sooner. Shifting gears
Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward
If you pull on the left or right steering wheel
and reverse gears, unless the accelerator paddle shifter, the automatic transmission
pedal is depressed fully. switches to manual drive program M for a limi-
Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, for ted amount of time. In cases where it is permis-
example on slippery road surfaces. sible, the automatic transmission shifts up or
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up down to the next gear.
sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven X To shift up: pull the right-hand steering wheel
at lower engine speeds and the wheels being paddle shifter (Y page 135).
less likely to spin. The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
i If the maximum engine speed on the cur-
rently engaged gear is reached and you con-
tinue to accelerate, the automatic transmis-
Z
sion automatically shifts up in order to pre- RAll vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
vent engine damage. cles: use the DIRECT SELECT lever
X To shift down: pull on the left-hand steering (Y page 130)
wheel paddle shifter (Y page 135). RMercedes-AMG vehicles: use the lever
The automatic transmission shifts down to (Y page 129)
the next gear. or
If the engine exceeds the maximum engine X Change the drive program.
speed when shifting down, the automatic RAll vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
transmission protects against engine damage
Driving and parking
cles: use the drive program selector button

by not shifting down. (Y page 133)
i Automatic down shifting occurs when RMercedes-AMG vehicles: use the drive
coasting. program selector (Y page 134)
Shift recommendation
Manual drive program (Mercedes-

AMG vehicles and vehicles with the
AMG sports package)
General notes
In this drive program, you can permanently
change gear yourself by using the steering
The gearshift recommendations assist you in wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be
adopting an economical driving style. The mul- in position D.
tifunction display shows you the recommended
gear. As well as this permanent drive program M, you
can also activate temporary drive program M
X Shift to recommended gear ; according to
(Y page 135).
gearshift recommendation : when shown in
Switching on the manual drive program
Deactivating X All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
If you have activated manual drive program M, it cles: press the program selector button
will remain active for a certain amount of time. repeatedly until drive program M appears in
Under certain conditions the minimum amount the multifunction display (Y page 133).
of time is extended, e.g. in the case of lateral X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: turn the drive pro-
acceleration, during an overrun phase or when gram selector until drive program M appears
driving on steep terrain. in the multifunction display (Y page 134).
If manual drive program M has been deactiva- The indicator M on the drive program selector
ted, the automatic transmission shifts into the lights up in red.
automatic drive program that was last selected,
i.e. E, C or S. Manual drive program M is different from drive
programs S and S+ with regard to spontaneity,
You can also deactivate manual drive program responsiveness and smoothness of gear
M yourself: changes.
X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle In manual drive program M, you can change gear
shifter and hold it in place (Y page 135). using the steering wheel paddle shifters if the
or transmission is in position D. The multifunction
X Switch the transmission position. display shows the selected and engaged gear.
Upshifting ommended gear is shown in the multifunction

display.
X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle
X If corresponding gearshift recommenda-
shifter.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the tion : appears in the multifunction display
next gear. on the instrument cluster, pull on the right-
hand steering wheel paddle shifter
(Y page 135).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles The automatic transmission shifts to recom-
mended gear ;.
Driving and parking

! In manual drive program M, the automatic
transmission does not shift up automatically
even when the engine limiting speed for the Downshifting
current gear is reached. When the engine lim- X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle
iting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to shifter.
prevent the engine from overrevving. Always The automatic transmission shifts down to
make sure that the engine speed does not the next gear.
reach the red area of the tachometer. There is
otherwise a risk of engine damage. i If you brake the vehicle or stop without shift-
ing down, the automatic transmission will
shift down to a gear that will allow the vehicle
to accelerate or pull away again.
For maximum acceleration, pull the left-hand
steering wheel paddle shifter until the transmis-
sion selects the optimum gear for the current
speed.
: Gear indicator
; Upshift indicator
Kickdown
Before the engine speed reaches the red area, You can also use kickdown for maximum accel-
an upshift indicator will be shown in the multi- eration in manual drive program M.
function display. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
X When the UP message appears in the multi- pressure point.
function display, pull on the right-hand steer- The automatic transmission shifts to a lower
ing wheel paddle shifter. gear depending on the engine speed.
X Shift back up once the desired speed is
Shift recommendation reached.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles:it is not possible to
use kickdown in manual drive program M.
Switching off the manual drive program

X Press the program selector button
(Y page 133).
X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: turn the drive pro-
The gearshift recommendations assist you in gram selector (Y page 134).

adopting an economical driving style. The rec-
Z
138 Refueling
Problems with the transmission

The transmission has The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
7G-TRONIC: The transmission is in emergency mode.
Driving and parking
The acceleration ability It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.
is deteriorating. X Stop the vehicle.
The transmission no lon- X Shift the transmission to position P.
ger changes gear.
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is
selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
9G-TRONIC: The transmission is in emergency mode.
The acceleration ability It is only partly possible to engage the gears or the transmission is in
is deteriorating. position N.
The transmission no lon- X Stop the vehicle.
ger changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
Transfer case Refueling

This section is only valid for vehicles with 4- Important safety notes
wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always trans-
mitted to both axles. G WARNING
! Performance tests may only be carried out Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake system incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-
or transfer case could otherwise be damaged. sion.
Contact a qualified specialist workshop for a
performance test. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
with either the front or the rear axle raised, as refueling.
doing so will damage the transmission.
G WARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
Refueling 139
You must make sure that fuel does not come Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu-
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing eling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge
could build up again.
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out
vapors. Keep fuel away from children. when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
If you or others come into contact with fuel, For further information on fuel and fuel quality
observe the following: (Y page 324).
RWash away fuel from skin immediately
Driving and parking

using soap and water.
Refueling
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with General information
clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
Pay attention to the important safety notes
out delay.
(Y page 138).
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto-
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- matically when you unlock or lock the vehicle
ing. with the SmartKey or using KEYLESS-GO.
RImmediately change out of clothing which The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed in
has come into contact with fuel. the instrument cluster 8. The arrow next to
the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle.
G WARNING
Opening the fuel filler flap
Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and
ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and
explosion.
Always touch the vehicle body before opening
the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is
thereby discharged.
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a

gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition
if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could : To open the fuel filler flap
result in damage to the fuel system and the ; To insert the fuel filler cap
engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop = Tire pressure table
and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
completely. ? Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
fuel system. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted X Open the driver's door.
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the The vehicle electronics now have status 0.
paintwork. This is the same as the SmartKey having been
! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can. removed.
The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-
could otherwise be blocked by particles from tion lock (Y page 123).
the fuel can. X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.
The fuel filler flap opens slightly.
Z
140 Refueling
X Open the fuel filler flap fully. Fuel filler flap emergency release
X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and
remove it.
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the
inside of fuel filler flap ;.
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and
refuel.
Driving and parking
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle

switches off.
Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops
filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak
out.
X Open the trunk lid.
Closing the fuel filler flap X Slide down the parcel net.
X Open the right-hand side trim panel.
X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly. X Detach the emergency release from
X Close the fuel filler flap. retainer :.
X Pull the emergency release in the direction of
Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehi- arrow ;.
cle. Otherwise, the locking pin of the central The fuel filler flap is unlocked.
locking prevents the fuel filler flap from closing.
X Open the fuel filler flap.
If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the
8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display
(Y page 215).
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Fuel is leaking from the G WARNING
vehicle.
The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
Risk of explosion or fire.
X Apply the electric parking brake.
The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the
SmartKey having been removed.
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
The fuel filler flap cannot The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
be opened. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 76).
Parking 141

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 78).
X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release
(Y page 140).
Driving and parking

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.
Parking To ensure that the vehicle is secured against

rolling away unintentionally:
Important safety notes Rthe parking brake must be applied.
Rthe transmission must be in position P and the
G WARNING
Smartkey must be removed from the ignition
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or lock.
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with Rthe front wheels must be turned towards the
hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients.
gas flow. There is a risk of fire.
Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-
rials come into contact with parts of the vehi- Switching off the engine
cle which are hot. Take particular care not to
park on dry grassland or harvested grain
fields. G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
G WARNING tral position N when you switch off the engine.
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example: accident.
Rrelease the parking brake. After switching off the engine, always switch
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
parking position P. cle from rolling away by applying the parking
Rstart the engine. brake.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of Vehicles with automatic transmission
an accident and injury. X Apply the parking brake firmly.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the X All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never cles): shift the transmission to position P.
! Always secure the vehicle correctly against

rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv-
etrain could be damaged.
Z
142 Parking
The engine can be switched off while the vehicle

is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/
Stop button for about three seconds. This func-
tion operates independently of the ECO start/
stop automatic engine switch-off function.
Parking brake
Driving and parking
G WARNING
If you must brake the vehicle with the parking
brake, the braking distance is considerably
X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: when the vehicle longer and the wheels could lock. There is an
is stationary, press button :. increased danger of skidding and accidents.
X With the Smartkey: turn the Smartkey to Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi-
position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. cle when the service brake is faulty. Do not
The immobilizer is activated.
apply the parking brake too firmly. If the
X With KEYLESS-GO: press the KEYLESS-GO
wheels lock, release the parking brake until
Start/Stop button (Y page 123).
The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the wheels begin turning again.
the instrument cluster go out.
When the driver's door is closed, this corre- G WARNING
sponds to Smartkey position 1. When the If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
driver's door is open, this corresponds to cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Smartkey position 0: "Smartkey removed".
Rrelease the parking brake.
If you switch the engine off with the transmis-
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
sion in position R or D, the automatic transmis-
sion shifts to N automatically. parking position P.
With the Smartkey: if you then open the driv- Rstart the engine.
er's door or the front-passenger door or remove In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
the Smartkey from the ignition, the automatic ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
transmission shifts to P automatically.
an accident and injury.
With KEYLESS-GO: if you then open the driver's
or front-passenger door, the automatic trans- When leaving the vehicle, always take the
mission shifts to P. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
If you want the automatic transmission to leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle
cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing
system:
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock.
X Insert the Smartkey into the ignition lock.
X All vehicles: switch the ignition on.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X Shift to neutral N.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Release the parking brake.
If you brake the vehicle with the parking brake,
X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smartkey the brake lamps will not light up.
in the ignition lock.
Driving tips 143
X To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly. Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
When the engine is running, the $ (USA is stationary.
only) or J (Canada only) indicator lamp
lights up in the instrument cluster. Observe the legal requirements for the country
X To release: depress the brake pedal and keep in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions pro-
it depressed. hibit the driver from using a mobile phone while
X Pull release handle :. driving a vehicle.
When the ignition is switched on or the engine If you make a call while driving, always use
is running, the $ (USA only) or J (Can- hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone
Driving and parking

ada only) indicator lamp goes out in the instru- when the traffic situation permits. If you are
ment cluster. unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop
before operating the telephone.
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
Parking the vehicle for a long period (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a
distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec-
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than ond.
four weeks, the battery may be damaged by
exhaustive discharging. Drive sensibly – save fuel
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six
weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a Observe the following tips to save fuel:
result of lack of use. X The tires should always be inflated to the rec-
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek ommended tire pressure.
advice. X Remove unnecessary loads.
i You can obtain information about trickle X Remove roof racks when they are not needed.
chargers from a qualified specialist work- X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.
shop. X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
X Have all maintenance work carried out as
indicated by the service intervals in the Main-
Driving tips tenance Booklet or by the service interval dis-
play.
General notes
Fuel consumption also increases when driving in
Important safety notes cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter-
rain.
G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving, Drinking and driving
safety-relevant functions are only available
G WARNING
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
boosting effect. You will require considerably driving are very dangerous combinations.
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
of an accident. affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-
ment.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-
G WARNING dent is greatly increased when you drink or
take drugs and drive.
If you operate mobile communication equip-
ment while driving, you will be distracted from Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
traffic conditions. You could also lose control anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. ing drugs.
Z
144 Driving tips
Emission control The percent value is the average value of the

three bars. The three bars and the mean value
G WARNING begin at the value of 50%. A higher percentage
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust indicates a more economical driving style.
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel
consumption. A fixed percentage count in the
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
ECO display does not indicate a fixed consump-
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave tion.
the engine running in enclosed spaces with- Apart from driving style, consumption is
Driving and parking
out sufficient ventilation. dependent on many factors such as, e.g.:

Rload
Certain engine systems are designed to keep
the level of poisonous components in exhaust Rtire pressure
fumes within legal limits. Rcold start
These systems only work at peak efficiency if Rchoice of route
they are serviced exactly in accordance with the Relectrical consumers switched on
manufacturer's specifications. Always have These factors are not included in the ECO dis-
work on the engine carried out at a qualified play.
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you use an authorized Mercedes- The evaluation of your driving style is carried out
Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, work using the following three categories:
relevant to safety or on safety-related systems RAcceleration (evaluation of all acceleration
must be carried out at a qualified specialist processes):
workshop. - The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,
The engine settings must not be changed under especially at higher speeds
any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific - The bar empties: sporty acceleration
service work must be carried out at regular RConstant (assessment of driving behavior at
intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes- all times):
Benz service requirements. Details can be found - The bar fills up: constant speed and avoid-
in the Maintenance Booklet.
ance of unnecessary acceleration and
deceleration
- The bar empties: fluctuations in speed
ECO display
RCoasting (assessment of all deceleration
processes):
- The bar fills up: anticipatory driving, keep-
ing your distance and early release of the
accelerator. The vehicle can coast without
use of the brakes.
- The bar empties: frequent braking
i An economical driving style specially

The ECO display provides feedback on how eco- requires driving at moderate engine speeds.
nomical your driving characteristics are. The To achieve a higher value in the categories
ECO display assists you in achieving the most Acceleration and Constant:
economical driving style for the selected set- Robserve the gearshift recommendations.
tings and prevailing conditions. Your driving Rdrive in drive program E.
style can significantly influence the vehicle's
consumption. i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g.
The ECO display consists of three bars: on the highway, only the bar for Constant will
change.
RAcceleration
RConstant i The ECO display summarizes the driving
RCoasting characteristics from the start of the journey to
its completion. For this reason, the bars
Driving tips 145
change dynamically at the beginning of the ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
journey. On longer journeys, there are fewer results in excessive and premature wear to
changes. For more dynamic changes, carry the brake pads.
out a manual reset.
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
For further information on the ECO display, see load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but
(Y page 191). drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow
to cool the brakes more quickly.
Braking Wet roads
Driving and parking

Important safety notes If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain
without braking, there may be a delayed reac-
G WARNING tion from the brakes when braking for the first
time. This may also occur after the vehicle has
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
been washed or driven through deep water.
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
You have to depress the brake pedal more
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the
There is an increased danger of skidding and vehicle in front.
accidents. After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle
Do not shift down for additional engine brak- washed, brake firmly while paying attention to
ing on a slippery road surface. the traffic conditions. This will warm up the
brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly
and protecting them against corrosion.
Downhill gradients
! On long and steep gradients, you must Limited braking performance on salt-
reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to a treated roads
lower gear in good time. This allows you to
If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi-
take advantage of the engine's braking effect.
due may form on the brake discs and brake
This helps you to avoid overheating the
pads. This can result in a significantly longer
brakes and wearing them out excessively.
braking distance.
When you take advantage of engine braking, a RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the
drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g.
brakes occasionally while paying attention to
on a slippery road surface. This could cause
the traffic conditions.
damage to the drive train. This type of damage
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz war- RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the
ranty. beginning and end of a journey.
RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
Change into a lower gear in good time on long
ahead.
and steep downhill gradients. This is especially
important if the vehicle is laden.
Servicing the brakes
Heavy and light loads ! The brake fluid level may be too low, if:
G WARNING Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster and
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while
Ryou hear a warning tone while the engine is
driving, the braking system can overheat. This running
increases the stopping distance and can even
Observe additional warning messages in the
cause the braking system to fail. There is a multifunction display.
risk of an accident. The brake fluid level may be too low due to
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.
depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
pedal at the same time.
Z
146 Driving tips
Have the brake system checked immediately. The braking characteristics of the vehicle can be
Consult a qualified specialist workshop to seriously impaired if:
arrange this. Rbrake pads other than those recommended
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per- are installed
formance tests may only be carried out on a 2- Rthe recommended brake fluid is not used
axle dynamometer. If you wish to operate the Safe braking can no longer be guaranteed.
vehicle on such a dynamometer, please con-
sult a qualified specialist workshop in AMG high-performance and ceramic
advance. You could otherwise damage the
Driving and parking
drive train or the brake system. brakes

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP® sys- The high-performance brake system is only
tem operates automatically, the engine and installed on the Mercedes-AMG
the ignition must be switched off (SmartKey in CLS 63 S 4MATIC model.
position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock or Start/ The AMG brake systems are designed for heavy
Stop button in position 0 or 1) while the park- loads. This may lead to noise when braking. This
ing brake is being tested on a brake dyna- will depend on:
mometer. RSpeed
Braking maneuvers triggered automatically RBraking force
by ESP® may seriously damage the brake sys- REnvironmental conditions, such as tempera-
tem. ture and humidity
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP® sys- The wear of individual components of the brake
tem operates automatically, the engine and system, such as the brake pads/linings or brake
the ignition system must be switched off discs, depends on the individual driving style
(SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignition and operating conditions.
lock or Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) For this reason, it is impossible to state a mile-
when: age that will be valid under all circumstances. An
Rtesting the parking brake on a brake dyna-
aggressive driving style will lead to high wear.
You can obtain further information about this
mometer.
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Ryou intend to have the vehicle towed with
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
one of the axles raised.
reach their optimum braking effect after several
Braking maneuvers triggered automatically hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for
by ESP® may seriously damage the brake sys- this by applying greater force to the brake pedal.
tem. Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving and
All checks and maintenance work on the brake braking accordingly during this break-in period.
system must be carried out at a qualified spe- Excessive heavy braking results in correspond-
cialist workshop. ingly high brake wear. Observe the brake wear
Have brake pads installed and brake fluid warning lamp in the instrument cluster and note
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. any brake status messages in the multifunction
If the brake system has only been subject to display. Especially for high performance driving,
moderate loads, you should test the functional- it is important to maintain and have the brake
ity of your brakes at regular intervals. To do so, system checked regularly.
press firmly on the brake pedal when driving at a
high speed. This improves the grip of the brake
pads.
You can find a description of Brake Assist (BAS)
on (Y page 65) or of BAS PLUS on (Y page 65).
Driving systems 147
Driving on wet roads If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating
running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
Hydroplaning around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
If water has accumulated to a certain depth on ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a
the road surface, there is a danger of hydro- window on the side of the vehicle that is not
planing occurring, even if: facing into the wind.
Ryou drive at low speeds.
Rthe tires have adequate tread depth. Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified
Driving and parking

specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in
conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, Drive particularly carefully on slippery road sur-
you must drive in the following manner: faces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and
braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise con-
Rlower your speed. trol or DISTRONIC PLUS.
Ravoid ruts. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
Ravoid sudden steering movements. stopped when moving at low speed:
Rbrake carefully. X Shift the transmission to position N.
The outside temperature indicator is not

Driving on flooded roads designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
! Do not drive through flooded areas. Check is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
the depth of any water before driving through Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
it. Drive slowly through standing water. Oth- played after a short delay.
erwise, water may enter the vehicle interior or Indicated temperatures just above the freezing
the engine compartment. This can damage point do not guarantee that the road surface is
the electronic components in the engine or free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in
the automatic transmission. Water can also wooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle could
be drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzles skid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Always
and this can cause engine damage. adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to
suit the prevailing weather conditions.
You should pay special attention to road condi-
Winter driving tions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
G WARNING For more information on driving with snow
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in chains, see (Y page 294).
an attempt to increase the engine's braking For more information on driving with summer
tires, see (Y page 294).
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec-
tion (Y page 294).
accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery road surface. Driving systems
G DANGER Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for inno-
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases vative driver assistance and safety systems
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the which enhance comfort and support the driver in
vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle critical situations. With these intelligent co-ordi-
nated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a mile-
becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of stone on the path towards autonomous driving.
fatal injury.
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all
elements of active and passive safety in one well
Z
148 Driving systems
thought out system – for the safety of the vehi- Cruise control lever
cle occupants and that of other road users.
Further information on driving safety systems
(Y page 64).
Cruise control
General notes
Driving and parking
Cruise control maintains a constant road speed

for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid
exceeding the set speed. On long and steep
downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is
laden, you must shift to a lower gear in time. By : Activates or increases speed
doing so, you will make use of the braking effect ; Activates or reduces speed
of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake = Deactivates cruise control
system and prevents the brakes from overheat- ? Activates at the current speed/last stored
ing and wearing too quickly. speed
Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-
ditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady When you activate cruise control, the multifunc-
speed for a prolonged period. You can store any tion display shows the stored speed for five sec-
road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h). onds. The é symbol also appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
Speedometer with segments: when cruise
control is activated, the segments from the
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con- stored speed to the end of the scale light up.
trol can neither reduce the risk of an accident
nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control Activation conditions
cannot take into account the road, traffic and
weather conditions. Cruise control is only an To activate cruise control, all of the following
aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe activation conditions must be fulfilled:
distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle Rthe parking brake must be released.
speed, for braking in good time and for staying in Ryou are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
lane.
RESP® must be active, but not intervening.
Do not use cruise control:
Rthe transmission must be in position D.
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in
heavy traffic or on winding roads Storing and maintaining the current
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel- speed
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose You can accept the current speed if you are
traction and the vehicle could then skid driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
heavy rain or snow
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
down ;.
driver of the speed stored.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
i The speed indicated in the speedometer Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto-
may differ slightly from the speed stored. matically maintains the stored speed.
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
evens out. Cruise control maintains the
Driving systems 149
stored speed on downhill gradients by auto- Deactivating cruise control

matically applying the brakes.
There are several ways to deactivate cruise con-
trol:
Storing the current speed or calling up
the last stored speed X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards
=.
G WARNING or
If you call up the stored speed and it is lower X Brake.
Driving and parking

than the current speed, the vehicle deceler- Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
ates. If you do not know the stored speed, the Ryou depress the parking brake
vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h)
is a risk of an accident. RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi- Ryou shift the transmission to position N while
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you driving
do not know the stored speed, store the If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a
desired speed again. warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐
trol Off message in the multifunction display
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards for approximately five seconds.
you =.
i When you switch off the engine, the last
The first time cruise control is activated, it speed stored is cleared.
stores the current speed or regulates the
speed of the vehicle to the previously stored
speed. DISTRONIC PLUS
General notes
Setting a speed
DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and auto-
X Press the cruise control lever up : for a matically helps you maintain the distance from
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detec-
X To adjust the set speed in1 mphincre- ted with the aid of the radar sensor system.
ments (1 km/hincrements): briefly press DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that
the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the set speed is not exceeded.
the pressure point. Change into a lower gear in good time on long
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed and steep downhill gradients. This is especially
up : or down ; the last speed stored is important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you
increased or reduced. will make use of the braking effect of the engine.
X To adjust the set speed in5 mphincre- This relieves the load on the brake system and
ments (10 km/hincrements): briefly press prevents the brakes from overheating and wear-
the cruise control lever up : or down ; to ing too quickly.
the pressure point. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk of
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed a collision, you will be warned visually and
up : or down ; the last speed stored is acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a
increased or reduced. collision without your intervention. An intermit-
tent warning tone will then sound and the dis-
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you tance warning lamp will light up in the instru-
depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if ment cluster. Brake immediately in order to
you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise con- increase the distance to the vehicle in front or
trol adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last take evasive action provided it is safe to do so.
speed stored after you have finished overtak-
DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the speed range
ing.
between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph
(200 km/h).
Z
150 Driving systems
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on G WARNING

roads with steep gradients.
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-
As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it
can resemble the radar detectors of the respon- tify other road users and complex traffic sit-
sible authorities. You can refer to the relevant uations.
chapter in the Operator's Manual if questions In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:
are asked about this.
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
i USA only: This device has been approved by brake the vehicle
Driving and parking
the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The

Rneither give a warning nor intervene
radar sensor is intended for use in an auto-
motive radar system only. Removal, tamper- Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly
ing, or altering of the device will void any war- There is a risk of an accident.
ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do
not tamper with, alter, or use in any non- Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
approved way. brake, in particular when warned to do so by
Any unauthorized modification to this device DISTRONIC PLUS.
could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment. G WARNING
i Canada only: This device complies with DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration.
subject to the following two conditions: If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC
1. This device may not cause harmful inter- PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is
ference, and a risk of an accident.
2. This device must accept any interference In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device. try to take evasive action.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device
will void any warranties, and is not permitted.
! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-
tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat-
Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-
approved way. ically in certain situations.
Any unauthorized modification to this device To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
could void the user's authority to operate the DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
equipment. the following or similar situations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Important safety notes Rin the car wash
DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of

G WARNING an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style
DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to: nor override the laws of physics. DISTRONIC
PLUS cannot take account of road, weather and
Rpeople or animals traffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an
Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop- aid. You are responsible for the distance to the
ped or parked vehicles vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in
good time and for staying in your lane.
Roncoming and crossing traffic
As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give
warnings nor intervene in such situations.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake.
Driving systems 151
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS: Cruise control lever

Rin road and traffic conditions that do not allow
you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in
heavy traffic or on winding roads
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
erating can cause the drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
Driving and parking

heavy rain or snow
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehi-
cles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehi-
cles driving on a different line.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired if: : To activate and store the current speed or a
higher speed
covering the sensors ; To activate and store the current speed or a
lower speed
Rthere is snow or heavy rain
= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
Rthere is interference by other radar sources
? To activate and store the current speed or
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam- call up the last stored speed
ple, in parking garages A To set a specified minimum distance
If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehicle
in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpectedly
accelerate the vehicle to the stored speed.
Activating DISTRONIC PLUS
This speed may: Activation conditions
Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane or To activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following con-
an exit lane ditions must be fulfilled:
Rbe so high in the right lane that you pass vehi-
Rthe engine must be started. It may take up to
cles driving on the left (left-hand drive coun-
two minutes of driving before DISTRONIC
tries)
PLUS is ready for use.
Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehi-
Rthe parking brake must be released.
cles driving on the right (right-hand drive
countries) RESP® must be active, but not intervening.
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new RActive Parking Assist must not be activated.
driver of the speed stored. Rthe transmission must be in position D.
Rthe driver's door must be closed when you
shift from P to D or your seat belt must be
fastened.
Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors must
be closed.
Rthe hood must be closed.
Rthe vehicle must not skid.
Z
152 Driving systems
Activating Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you =, or move it up : or down ?. Pulling away and driving
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. X If you want to pull away with DISTRONIC
X Move the cruise control lever repeatedly PLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal.
up : or down ? until the desired speed is X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
set. you =.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. or
Driving and parking
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the X Accelerate briefly.

vehicle in front, but only up to the desired The vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to
stored speed. that of the vehicle in front.
If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehicle
can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your accelerates to the set speed.
vehicle is stationary as well.
The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing
i If you do not fully release the accelerator an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a differ-
pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Suspended mes- ent line from another vehicle. The vehicle then
sage appears in the multifunction display. The brakes automatically.
set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in If DISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a vehicle in
front will then not be maintained. You will be front, the system operates like a cruise control.
driving at the speed you determine by the If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in
position of the accelerator pedal. front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. In
You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when this way, the specified minimum distance you
stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is have selected is maintained.
18 mph (30 km/h). If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed to
you =, up : or down ?. the set speed.
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.
Selecting the drive program
Activating at the current speed/last DISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty driving style
stored speed when you have selected the S or M (AMG vehi-
cles: S, S+ or M) driving program (Y page 133).
G WARNING Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to the
If you call up the stored speed and it differs set speed is then noticeably more dynamic. If
from the current speed, the vehicle acceler- you have selected the E (AMG vehicles: C) driv-
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the ing program, the vehicle accelerates more gen-
tly. This setting is recommended in stop-and-
stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or start traffic.
brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-
dent. Changing lanes
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi- DISTRONIC PLUS aids you when switching to
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you the overtaking lane, if:
do not know the stored speed, store the Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h)
desired speed again. Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal
RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the distance
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards to a vehicle in front
you ?. RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. a collision
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is
is activated, the current speed is stored. Oth- accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if
erwise, it sets the vehicle speed to the previ- changing lanes takes too long or if the distance
ously stored value.
Driving systems 153
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front Ra system malfunction occurs.
becomes too small. Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
i When you change lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS
monitors the left lane on left-hand-drive vehi- Setting a speed
cles or the right lane on right-hand-drive vehi-
cles. X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
Stopping X To adjust the set speed in1 mphincre-
ments (1 km/hincrements): briefly move
Driving and parking

G WARNING the cruise control lever up : or down ; to
When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked the pressure point.
only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if: Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
up : or down ;, the last speed stored is
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in increased or reduced.
the voltage supply. X To adjust the set speed in5 mphincre-
RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated ments (10 km/hincrements): briefly move
with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi- the cruise control lever up : or down ;
cle occupant or from outside the vehicle. beyond the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
Rthe electrical system in the engine com-
up : or down ;, the last speed stored is
partment, the battery or the fuses have increased or reduced.
been tampered with.
Rthe battery is disconnected. i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC
PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, speed stored after you have finished overtak-
e.g. by a vehicle occupant. ing.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off Setting a specified minimum distance
DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle You can set the specified minimum distance for
against rolling away. DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span
between one and two seconds. With this func-
For further information on deactivating tion, you can set the minimum distance that
DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 155). DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front,
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this
front has stopped, it will cause your vehicle to distance in the multifunction display
brake and come to a halt. (Y page 154).
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta- i Make sure that you maintain a sufficient
tionary and you do not need to depress the distance to the vehicle in front and comply
brake. with the minimum distance as required by
Depending on the specified minimum distance, law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front
your vehicle will come to a standstill at a suffi- if necessary.
cient distance behind the vehicle in front. The
specified minimum distance is set using the
control on the cruise control lever.
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the trans-
mission is shifted automatically to position P if:
Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat
belt is unfastened.
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
function.
Z
154 Driving systems
DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the multi-

function display
Displaying the assistance graphic
X Select the Assistance Graphic function
using the on-board computer (Y page 195).
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-

vated
Driving and parking
X To increase: turn control ; in direction =.

DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater
distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front.
X To decrease: turn control ; in direction :.
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter : Vehicle in front, if detected
distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ; Distance indicator, current distance to the
in front. vehicle in front
= Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speed- in front; adjustable
ometer ? Own vehicle
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-

ted
: Vehicle in front, if detected

; Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or two in front; adjustable
segments ; in the set speed range light up. = Own vehicle
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, ? DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only appears
segments ; between speed of the vehicle in when the cruise control lever is actuated)
front : and stored speed = light up.
You will see the stored speed for about five sec-
i For design reasons, the speed displayed in onds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
the speedometer may differ slightly from the
speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.
Driving systems 155
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notes
Pay particular attention in the following traffic
situations:
RCornering, entering and exiting a bend: the
ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles
when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may
Driving and parking

brake unexpectedly or late.
RDriving on a different line: DISTRONIC PLUS
may not detect vehicles which are not driving
in the middle of their lane. The distance to the
vehicle in front will be too short.
There are several ways to deactivate ROther vehicles changing lane: DISTRONIC
DISTRONIC PLUS: PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in
X Briefly push the cruise control lever for-
yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too
short.
wards :.
RNarrow vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUS does not
or
detect the vehicle in front on the edge of the
X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary road because of its narrow width. The dis-
If you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, the tance to the vehicle in front will be too short.
DISTRONIC PLUS Off message appears in the RObstacles and stationary vehicles:
multifunction display for approximately five sec- DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta-
onds. cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the
detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an
i The last speed stored remains stored until obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC
you switch off the engine. PLUS will not brake for these.
i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you RCrossing vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUS may mis-
depress the accelerator pedal. takenly detect vehicles that are crossing your
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated lane. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic
if: lights with crossing traffic, for example, could
cause your vehicle to pull away unintention-
Ryou engage the parking brake ally.
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® In such situations, brake if necessary.
Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.
Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you
in order to pull away and the front-passenger DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist
door or one of the rear doors is open and Stop&Go Pilot
Rthe vehicle is skidding
Ryou activate Active Parking Assist General notes
If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear
a tone. The DISTRONIC PLUS Off message
appears in the multifunction display for approx-
imately five seconds.
Z
156 Driving systems
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and the vehicle yourself to ensure that it does not
Stop&Go Pilot aids you in keeping the vehicle in leave the lane.
the center of the driving lane by means of mod- The support provided by the system can be
erate steering interventions in a speed range impaired if:
from 0 - 125 mph (0 - 200 km/h).
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient
It monitors the area in front of your vehicle by illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,
means of multifunction camera :, at the top of fog or spray
the windshield.
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the
At speeds of 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h), Stop&Go
Driving and parking
sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if

Pilot focuses on the vehicle in front, taking into the road surface is wet)
account lane markings, e.g. when following vehi-
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or
cles in a traffic jam.
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-
At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h) ity of the camera
Steering Assist focuses on detected lane mark-
Rno, or several, unclear lane markings are pres-
ings (left and right), and only on the vehicle in
front if lane markings are missing. ent for one lane, e.g. in a construction area
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
If these conditions are not present, Steering
Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot provide assis- ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
tance. Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small
DISTRONIC PLUS must be active in order for the and the lane markings thus cannot be detec-
function to be available. ted
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
Important safety notes branch off, cross one another or merge
If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC Rthe road is narrow and winding
PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road
can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor The system is switched to passive and no longer
override the laws of physics. It cannot take assists you by performing steering interventions
account of road, weather and traffic conditions. if:
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and
Stop&Go Pilot is only an aid. You are responsible Ryou actively change lanes
for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi- Ryou switch on the turn signal
cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay- Rtake your hands off the steering wheel or do
ing in your lane. not steer for a prolonged period of time
Stop&Go Pilot does not detect road and traffic i After you have finished changing lanes,
conditions and does not detect all road users. If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are auto-
you are following a vehicle which is driving matically active again.
towards the edge of the road, your vehicle could DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist does not pro-
come into contact with the curb or other road vide assistance:
boundaries. Be particularly aware of other road Ron very sharp corners
users, e.g. cyclists, that are directly next to your
Rwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire
vehicle.
has been detected and displayed
Obstacles such as building site huts on the lane
or projecting out into the lane are not detected. Pay attention also to the important safety notes
for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 150).
An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. after
intentionally driving over a lane marking, can be The steering interventions are carried out with a
corrected at any time if you steer slightly in the limited steering moment. The system requires
opposite direction. the driver to keep his hands on the steering
wheel and to steer himself.
Stop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep your If you do not steer yourself or if you take your
vehicle in lane. In some cases, the steering hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged
intervention is not sufficient to bring the vehicle period of time, the system will first alert you with
back to the lane. In such cases, you must steer a visual warning. A steering wheel symbol
appears in the multifunction display. If you have
Driving systems 157
still not started to steer and have not taken hold HOLD function
of the steering wheel after five seconds at the
latest, a warning tone also sounds to remind you General notes
to take control of the vehicle. Steering Assist
and Stop&Go Pilot are switched to passive. The HOLD function can assist the driver in the
DISTRONIC PLUS remains active. following situations:
Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes
Activating Steering Assist and Stop&Go
Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes
Pilot
Rwhen waiting in traffic
Driving and parking

X Activate the DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering
Assist and Stop&Go Pilot function using the The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver
on-board computer (Y page 196). having to depress the brake pedal.
The DTR+: Steering Assistant On mes- The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD
sage appears in the multifunction display. function deactivated when you depress the
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are active. accelerator pedal to pull away.
Information in the multifunction display Important safety notes

G WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away
despite being braked by the HOLD function if:
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by
If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activa- pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake
ted but not ready for a steering intervention, pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
steering wheel symbol : appears in gray. If the
system provides you with support by means of Rthe electrical system in the engine com-
steering interventions, symbol : is shown in partment, the battery or the fuses have
green. been tampered with.
Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Rthe battery is disconnected
Pilot There is a risk of an accident.

X Deactivate the DISTRONIC PLUS with Steer- If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
ing Assist and Stop&Go Pilot function using the HOLD function and secure the vehicle
the on-board computer (Y page 196). against rolling away.
The DTR+: Steering Assistant Off mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display. ! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deac- tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat-
tivated. ically in certain situations.
When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated or not To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
available, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
deactivated automatically. the following or similar situations:
Rin the car wash
Z
158 Driving systems
Activation conditions When the HOLD function is activated, the trans-

mission is shifted automatically to position P if:
You can activate the HOLD function if:
Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat
Rthe vehicle is stationary belt is unfastened.
Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto- Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
function function.
Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is Rthe hood is opened.
fastened
Driving and parking
Ra system malfunction occurs.

Rthe parking brake is released
Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N
RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated
RACE START
Activating the HOLD function
Observe the safety notes for the SPORT han-
dling mode (Y page 71).
RACE START is only available for Mercedes-AMG
vehicles.
RACE START is intended solely for activation on
dedicated race circuits.
RACE START enables optimal acceleration from
X Make sure that the activation conditions are
a standing start. The precondition for this is a
met.
suitable high-grip road surface.
X Depress the brake pedal.
X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until
Conditions for activation
ë : appears in the multifunction display.
The HOLD function is activated. You can You can activate RACE START if:
release the brake pedal. Rthe doors are closed.
If depressing the brake pedal the first time does Rthe engine is running and it has reached an
not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and operating temperature of approximately
then try again. 176 ‡ (80 †). This is the case when the oil
temperature gauge in the multifunction dis-
Deactivating the HOLD function play is shown in white.
RSPORT handling mode is switched on.
The HOLD function is deactivated automatically (Y page 71)
if:
Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead
Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in position.
position D or R. Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is
Ryou shift the transmission to position P. depressed (left foot).
Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a cer- Rthe transmission is in position D.
tain amount of pressure until ë disap-
pears from the multifunction display.
Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
Driving systems 159
Activating RACE START i If RACE START is used repeatedly within a

short period of time, it is only available again
X Depress the brake pedal with your left foot after the vehicle has been driven a certain
and keep it depressed. distance.
X Turn the drive program selector clockwise
(Y page 134) until the RS lamp lights up.
The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP AIRMATIC
Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears in
the multifunction display. Vehicle level
Driving and parking

i If the activation conditions are no longer ful-
filled, RACE START is canceled. The RACE Important safety notes
START Canceled message appears in the
multifunction display. G WARNING
X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel paddle When the vehicle is being lowered, people
shifter (Y page 135). could become trapped if their limbs are
or between the vehicle body and the wheels or
X To confirm: pull the right steering wheel pad- underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
dle shifter (Y page 135). injury.
The RACE START available Depress Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or
accelerator message appears in the multi- in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches
function display.
when the vehicle is being lowered.
i If you do not depress the accelerator pedal
fully within two seconds, RACE START is can- Your vehicle regulates its height automatically.
celed. The RACE START Not Possible See All-round level control ensures the best possible
Operator's Manual message appears in the suspension and constant ground clearance,
multifunction display. even with a laden vehicle. When you drive fast,
X Fully depress the accelerator pedal. the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve
The engine speed rises to approximately driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption.
3,500 rpm. The following vehicle levels are possible:
The RACE START Release brake to start RNormal
message appears in the multifunction display. RRaised: the vehicle is raised by approximately
i If you do not release the brake pedal within 0.80 in (20 mm) when compared with the nor-
five seconds, RACE START is canceled. The mal level
RACE START Canceled message appears in RLowered: the vehicle is raised by approx-
the multifunction display. imately 0.40 in (10 mm) when compared with
X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the the normal level
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceler-
i These changes in level are so slight that you
are hardly aware of them.
ation.
The RACE START active message appears in The "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels can be
the multifunction display. set manually.
The "Lowered” vehicle level is set automatically:
RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle
reaches a speed of approximately 30 mph (Can- Rat speeds above 70 mph (113 km/h)
ada: 50 km/h). Drive program S+ is activated. Rif you have selected "Sports tuning"
SPORT handling mode remains switched on. (Y page 160)
RACE START is deactivated immediately if you
release the accelerator pedal during RACE Setting the vehicle level
START or if any of the activation conditions are Select the "Normal" setting for normal road sur-
no longer fulfilled. The RACE START Not Pos‐ faces and "Raised" for driving with snow chains
sible See Operator's Manual message or on particularly poor road surfaces. Your
appears in the multifunction display.
Z
160 Driving systems
selection remains stored even if you remove the The damping is tuned individually to each wheel
SmartKey from the ignition lock. and depends on:
Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty
Setting raised level
Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps
Ryour individual selection, i.e. sports or com-
fort
Your selection remains stored even if you
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Driving and parking
Sports tuning
X Start the engine.

If indicator lamp ; is not lit:
X Press the : button.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle height
is adjusted to raised level.
The Vehicle Rising message appears in the
display. The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode
ensures even better contact with the road.
The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you: Select this mode when employing a sporty driv-
Rdrive at a speed over approximately 75 mph ing style, e.g. on winding country roads.
(120 km/h) X Press button :.
Rdrive for approximately three minutes at a Indicator lamp ; lights up. Sports suspen-
speed over 50 mph (80 km/h) sion tuning is selected.
The "Raised level" remains active when you are The AIRMATIC SPORT message appears in the
not driving within these speed ranges. multifunction display.
Setting the normal level Comfort tuning
X Start the engine.
If indicator lamp ; is lit:
X Press button : .
Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is
adjusted to normal level.
Suspension tuning
General notes
The electronically controlled damping system
works continuously. This improves driving
safety and ride comfort. In comfort mode, the driving characteristics of
your vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore,
select this mode if you favor a more comfortable
driving style. Select comfort mode also when
driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight
stretches of highway.
Driving systems 161
X Press button :. Suspension tuning

Indicator lamp = lights up. Comfort tuning is
selected. General notes
The AIRMATIC COMFORT message appears in The electronically controlled damping system
the multifunction display. works continuously. This improves driving
safety and ride comfort.
The damping is tuned individually to each wheel
AMG adaptive sport suspension sys- and depends on:
Driving and parking

tem Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty
Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps
Ryour individual selection of Sport, Sport + or
G WARNING Comfort
When the vehicle is being lowered, people Sport mode
could become trapped if their limbs are
between the vehicle body and the wheels or
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or
in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches
when the vehicle is being lowered.
G WARNING
Vehicles with level control:
The vehicle is slightly lowered if:
: Mode selection button
Ryou have selected comfort suspension tun- ; Button to store, recall and display the selec-
ing and ted mode
Ryou lock the vehicle within approximately = Sport + mode indicator lamp
60 seconds of switching off the engine ? Sport mode indicator lamp
You and people in the vicinity of the wheel The firmer suspension setting in Sport mode
arch or the underbody may thus become trap- ensures better contact with the road. Select this
ped. There is a risk of injury. mode when employing a sporty driving style,
e.g. on winding country roads.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the X Press button :.
wheel arch or the underbody when you lock Indicator lamp ? lights up. You have selected
the vehicle. Sport mode.
The AMG Ride Control SPORT message
! The vehicle is lowered by about 0.8 in appears in the multifunction display.
(20 mm) if:
Ryou have selected "Comfortable tuning" Sport + mode
Ryou switch off the engine and then The very firm setting of the suspension setting in
Ryou lock the vehicle within approximately Sport + mode ensures the best possible contact
60 seconds with the road. Select this mode preferably when
driving on race circuits.
When parking, position your vehicle so that it
does not make contact with the curb as the If indicator lamps = and ? are off:
vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could other- X Press button : twice.
wise be damaged. Indicator lamps = and ? light up. You have
selected Sport + mode.
Z
162 Driving systems
The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message The vehicle may be lowered if you press the sus-
appears in the multifunction display. pension setting selector button or the AMG but-
ton. The vehicle also lowers if it is stationary.
If indicator lamp ? lights up:
X Press button : once. ! If Sport or Sport + suspension tuning has
Second indicator lamp = lights up. You have been selected, the vehicle's ground clearance
selected Sport + mode. decreases. Make sure that no objects
become trapped or that the vehicle does not
The AMG Suspension System SPORT + mes- become damaged, for example, on the curb.
sage appears in the multifunction display.
Driving and parking
i The vehicle level may change visibly at the

Comfort mode rear axle if you park the vehicle and the out-
When comfort mode is selected, the driving side temperature changes. If the temperature
characteristics of your vehicle are more com- drops, the vehicle level lowers; with an
fortable. Select this mode if you favor a comfort- increase in temperature, the vehicle level
oriented driving style. Select comfort mode also rises.
when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on
straight stretches of highway. Changing the rear axle ride height
X Press button : repeatedly until indicator
This function is only available on the Mercedes-
lamps = and ? go out. AMG CLS 63 4MATIC.
You have selected Comfort mode. The vehicle level at the rear axle depends on the
The AMG Suspension System COMFORT mes- selected suspension mode and the vehicle
sage appears in the multifunction display. speed.
The vehicle level at the rear axle changes while
Storing and calling up settings driving depending on which suspension mode is
selected:
Once the suspension setting and drive program
have been selected, you can store and call up RComfort: +0.4 in (+10 mm)
your settings using AMG button ;. RSport + and Sport: -0.6 in (-15 mm)
X To store: press and hold AMG button ; until When changing from Comfort to Sport or Sport
you hear a tone. +, the rear axle is lowered by approximately
1.0 in (25 mm). When changing from Sport or
X To call up: press AMG button ;. Sport + to Comfort, the rear axle is raised by
The stored suspension setting and drive pro- approximately 1.0 in (25 mm). This level change
gram are selected. also takes place when the vehicle is stationary.
X To display: briefly press AMG button ;. If you drive faster than 105 mph (170 km/h), the
Your selection appears in the multifunction rear axle level is set to a middle level. This
display. increases driving safety and reduces air resist-
ance. If you then drive slower than 93 mph
(150 km/h), the level of the rear axle is again
Vehicle level adjusted to correspond to the selected suspen-
sion mode.
G WARNING Load compensation
The vehicle can compensate differences in the
When the vehicle is being lowered, people
vehicle level by raising or lowering the rear axle.
could become trapped if their limbs are This is the case, for example, if people get out or
between the vehicle body and the wheels or if luggage is being loaded.
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of Load compensation takes place if:
injury. Ra door or the trunk lid is opened
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or Rthe parked vehicle is unlocked
in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches For larger level changes, the engine must be
when the vehicle is being lowered. running.
Driving systems 163
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC

does not detect such objects when they are in
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You
neither reduce the risk of accident nor override could damage the vehicle or the objects.
the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take The sensors may not detect snow and other
account of road, weather and traffic conditions. objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for
the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car
speed, for braking in good time and for staying in wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck
or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC
Driving and parking

your lane.
to malfunction.
If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as uneven terrain.
necessary when pulling away.
PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when
RAccelerate less when driving.
you:
! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. Rswitch on the ignition
This may damage the transfer case. Damage Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N
of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-
Rrelease the parking brake
Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels must
remain either on the ground or be fully raised. PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
Observe the instructions for towing the vehi- 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower
cle with all wheels in full contact with the speeds.
ground.
Range of the sensors
i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum
effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you
use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains General notes
if necessary. PARKTRONIC does not take objects into con-
sideration that are:
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are perma-
nently driven. Together with ESP®, it improves Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-
the traction of your vehicle whenever a drive mals or objects.
wheel spins due to insufficient grip. Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhanging
loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps.
PARKTRONIC
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with
ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area around
your vehicle using six sensors in the front
bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper.
PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly the
distance between your vehicle and an object.
PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-
ment for your attention to your immediate sur-
: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side
roundings. You are always responsible for safe
maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking (example)
space. When maneuvering, parking or pulling The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush.
out of a parking space, make sure that there are They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean
no persons, animals or objects in the area in the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch
which you are maneuvering. or damage them (Y page 274).
! When parking, pay particular attention to
objects above or below the sensors, such as
Z
164 Driving systems
Range Warning displays

Driving and parking
Warning display for the front area

: Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-
cle
; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-
cle
= Segments showing operational readiness
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is located on
the dashboard above the center air vents. The
warning display for the rear area is located on
: Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) (corners) the headliner in the rear compartment.
; Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm) (corners) The warning display for each side of the vehicle
is divided into five yellow and two red segments.
= Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm) (center) PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments
? Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) (center) showing operational readiness = light up.
Minimum distance The selected transmission position and the
direction in which the vehicle is rolling deter-
Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm) mine which warning display is active when the
Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm) engine is running.
Transmission posi- Warning display
If there is an obstacle within this range, the rel- tion
evant warning displays light up and a warning D Front area activated
tone sounds. If the distance falls below the min-
imum, the distance may no longer be shown. R, N or the vehicle is Rear and front areas
rolling backwards activated
P No areas activated
One or more segments light up as the vehicle

approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi-
cle's distance from the obstacle.
From the:
Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an inter-
mittent warning tone for approximately two
seconds.
Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
warning tone for approximately two seconds.
Driving systems 165
This indicates that you have now reached the If indicator lamp ; lights up, PARKTRONIC is
minimum distance. deactivated. Active Parking Assist is then also
deactivated.
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated
when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the ignition lock.
Driving and parking

: Indicator lamp
; Deactivates/activates PARKTRONIC
Problems with PARKTRONIC

Only the red segments in PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.
the PARKTRONIC warn- X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified spe-
ing displays are lit. You cialist workshop.
also hear a warning tone
for approximately two
seconds.
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated and the indi-
cator lamp on the
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Only the red segments in The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
the PARKTRONIC warn- X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 274).
ing displays are lit.
X Switch the ignition back on.
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated. The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-
sound waves.
X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Active Parking Assist during parking. You may also use PARKTRONIC
(Y page 163).
General notes
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking aid
with ultrasound. It measures the road on both Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not a
sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates replacement for your attention to your immedi-
a suitable parking space. Active steering inter- ate surroundings. You are always responsible
vention and brake application can assist you
Z
166 Driving systems
for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a ence on the parking characteristics of the
parking space. Make sure that no persons, ani- vehicle.
mals or objects are in the maneuvering range. Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:
When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Park- Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of
ing Assist is also unavailable. travel
G WARNING Ron the same level as the road, e.g. not on the
While parking or pulling out of a parking pavement

Ron straight roads, not bends
space, the vehicle swings out and can drive
Driving and parking
onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could

result in a collision with another road user. Detecting parking spaces
There is a risk of an accident. Objects located above the height range of Active
Pay attention to other road users. Stop the Parking Assist will not be detected when the
vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park- parking space is measured. These are not taken
into account when the parking procedure is cal-
ing Assist parking procedure. culated, e.g. overhanging loads, truck over-
hangs or loading ramps.
! If unavoidable, you should drive over obsta-
cles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharp G WARNING
angle. Otherwise, you may damage the If there are objects above the detection range:
wheels or tires.
RActive Park Assist may steer too early
Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate
parking spaces which are not suitable for park- Rthe vehicle may not stop in front of these
ing, for example: objects
Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited You may cause a collision as a result. There is
Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits a risk of an accident.
Ron unsuitable surfaces If objects are located above the detection
Parking tips: range, stop and deactivate Active Parking
ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the parking Assist.
space as possible.
RParking spaces that are littered or overgrown For further information on the detection range
might be identified or measured incorrectly. (Y page 163).
RParking spaces that are partially occupied by Active Parking Assist does not assist you park-
trailer drawbars might not be identified as ing in spaces at right angles to the direction of
such or be measured incorrectly. travel if:
RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking Rtwo parking spaces are located directly next
space being measured inaccurately. to one another
RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC Rthe parking space is directly next to a low
(Y page 164) warning messages during the obstacle such as a low curb
parking procedure. Ryou park forwards
RYou can intervene in the steering procedure Active Parking Assist does not assist you park-
to correct it at any time. Active Parking Assist ing in spaces that are parallel or at right angles
will then be canceled. to the direction of travel if:
RWhen transporting a load which protrudes Rthe parking space is on a curb
from your vehicle, you should not use Active Rthe system reads the parking space as being
Parking Assist.
blocked, for example by foliage or grass pav-
RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow ing blocks
chains are installed.
RMake sure that the tires are inflated to the
specified tire pressure. This has a direct influ-
Driving systems 167
Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to maneu- ing the a button on the multifunction steer-
ver into ing wheel. The system automatically determines
Rthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle, whether the parking space is parallel or at right
e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer angles to the direction of travel.
A parking space is displayed while you are driv-
ing past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft
(15 m) away from it.
Parking
Driving and parking

G WARNING
If you leave the vehicle when it is only being
Example: detected parking space braked by Active Parking Assist it could roll
: Detected parking space on the left
away if:
; Parking symbol
= Detected parking space on the right Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
Active Parking Assist is switched on automati-
cally when driving forwards. The system is Rthe electrical system in the engine com-
operational at speeds of up to approximately partment, the battery or the fuses have
22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the sys- been tampered with.
tem independently locates and measures park- Rthe battery is disconnected.
ing spaces on both sides of the vehicle.
Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,
Active Parking Assist will only detect parking
spaces: e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of There is a risk of an accident.
travel Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and against rolling away.
at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and i When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles,
at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehi- Active Parking Assist brakes automatically
cle during the parking process. You are respon-
Rthat are at right angles to the direction of sible for braking in good time.
travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider than X Stop the vehicle when the parking space sym-
your vehicle bol shows the desired parking space in the
i Note that Active Parking Assist cannot instrument cluster.
measure the size of a parking space if it is at X Shift the transmission to position R.
right angles to the direction of travel. You will The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
need to judge whether your vehicle will fit into % message appears in the multifunction
the parking space. display.
X To cancel the procedure:press the %
When driving at speeds below 19 mph
(30 km/h), you will see the parking symbol as a button on the multifunction steering wheel or
status indicator in the instrument cluster. When pull away.
a parking space has been detected, an arrow or
towards the right or the left also appears. By X To park using Active Parking Assist: press
default, Active Parking Assist only displays park- the a button on the multifunction steering
ing spaces on the front-passenger side. Parking wheel.
spaces on the driver's side are displayed as The Park Assist Active Accelerate
soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
activated. When parking on the driver's side, sage appears in the multifunction display.
this must remain switched on until you acknowl-
edge the use of Active Parking Assist by press-
Z
168 Driving systems
X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. ous factors. These include the position and
X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all shape of the vehicles parked in front and
times. When backing up, drive at a speed behind it and the conditions of the location. It
below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Oth- may be the case that Active Parking Assist
erwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled. guides you too far into a parking space, or not
Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a far enough into it. In some cases, it may also
standstill when the vehicle approaches the lead you across or onto the curb. If necessary,
rear border of the parking space. you should cancel the parking procedure with
Maneuvering may be required in tight parking Active Parking Assist.
Driving and parking
spaces. RYou can also select preselect transmission

position D. The vehicle redirects and does not
The Park Assist Active Select D drive as far into the parking space. Should the
Observe Surroundings message appears in transmission change take place too early, the
the multifunction display. parking procedure will be canceled. A sensi-
X Shift the transmission to position D while the ble parking position can no longer be ach-
vehicle is stationary. ieved from this position.
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
the other direction. Exiting a parking space
The Park Assist Active Accelerate
and Brake Observe Surroundings mes- In order that Active Parking Assist can support
sage appears in the multifunction display. you when exiting the parking space:
i You will achieve the best results by waiting Rthe border of the parking space must be high
for the steering procedure to complete before enough at the front and the rear. A curb is too
pulling away. small, for example.
X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all Rthe border of the parking space must not be
times. too wide. Your vehicle can be maneuvered
Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a into a position at a maximum of 45° to the
standstill when the vehicle approaches the starting position in the parking space.
rear border of the parking space. Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft
(1.0 m) must be available.
The Park Assist Active Select R
Observe Surroundings message appears in i If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active
the multifunction display. Parking Assist brakes automatically whilst the
Further transmission shifts may be necessary. vehicle exits the parking space. You are
As soon as the parking procedure is complete, responsible for braking in good time.
the Park Assist Finished message appears Active Parking Assist can only assist you with
in the multifunction display and you will hear a exiting a parking space if you have parked the
tone. The vehicle is now parked. The vehicle is vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using
kept stationary without the driver having to Active Parking Assist.
depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is X Start the engine.
canceled when you depress the accelerator
pedal.
X Switch on the turn signal in the direction you
Active Parking Assist no longer supports you
with steering interventions and brake applica- are pulling away.
tions. When Active Parking Assist is finished, X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
you must steer and brake again yourself. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
PARKTRONIC is still available. % message appears in the multifunction
X Maneuver if necessary. display.
X To cancel the procedure:press the %
X Always observe the warning messages dis-
played by PARKTRONIC (Y page 164). button on the multifunction steering wheel or
pull away.
Parking tips: or
RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the park-
ing space after parking is dependent on vari-
Driving systems 169
X To exit a parking space using Active Park- appears in the multifunction display and a
ing Assist: press the a button on the mul- warning tone sounds.
tifunction steering wheel. or
The Park Assist Active Accelerate X Press the PARKTRONIC button in the center
and Brake Observe Surroundings mes- console (Y page 165).
sage appears in the multifunction display. PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Park-
X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. ing Assist is immediately canceled. The Park
X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do Assist Canceled message appears in the
not exceed a maximum speed of approx- multifunction display and a warning tone
Driving and parking

imately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a park- sounds.
ing space. Otherwise Active Parking Assist Active Parking Assist is canceled automatically
will be canceled. if:
X Shift the transmission to position D or R as
Rthe transmission is shifted too early
required or according to the message when
the vehicle is stationary. Rtransmission position P is selected
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no lon-
the other direction. The Park Assist ger possible
Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)
Surroundings message appears in the mul- Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. In
tifunction display.
such cases the ÷ warning lamp lights up in
i You will achieve the best results by waiting the instrument cluster.
for the steering procedure to complete before A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol dis-
pulling away. appears and the multifunction display shows the
If you back up after activation, the steering Park Assist Canceled message.
wheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi- When Active Parking Assist is canceled, you
tion. must steer and brake again yourself.
X Drive forwards and back up as prompted by If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is
the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the
times if necessary. accelerator again.
Once you have exited the parking space com-
pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the
straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the Rear view camera
Park Assist Finished message appears in
the multifunction display. You will then have to General notes
steer and merge into traffic on your own.
PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take over
the steering before the vehicle has exited the
parking space completely. This is useful if you
recognize that it is already possible to pull out of
the parking space.
Canceling Active Parking Assist

You can cancel Active Parking Assist at any
time.
X Stop the movement of the multifunction
steering wheel or steer yourself.
Active Parking Assist will be canceled at once. Rear view camera : is an optical parking and
The Park Assist Canceled message maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind the
vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia sys-
tem.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
Z
170 Driving systems
i The text shown in the multimedia system Switching the rear view camera on/off
depends on the language setting. The follow-
ing are examples of rear view camera displays X To switch on: make sure that the Activa‐
in the multimedia system. tion by R gear function is selected in the
multimedia system (see Digital Operator's
Manual).
X Engage reverse gear.
The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a The rear view camera flap opens. The multi-
replacement for your attention to your immedi- media system shows the area behind the vehi-
Driving and parking
ate surroundings. You are always responsible cle with guide lines.
for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneu- The image from the rear view camera is avail-
vering or parking, make sure that there are no able throughout the maneuvering process.
persons, animals or objects in the area in which
you are maneuvering. X To switch off:shift the transmission to posi-
tion P.
Under the following circumstances, the rear
view camera will not function, or will function in or
a limited manner: X Drive forwards a short distance.
Rif the trunk lid is open
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Displays in the multimedia system
Rat night or in very dark places
The rear view camera may show a distorted view
Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED The rear view camera does not show objects in
lighting (the display may flicker) the following positions:
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, Rvery close to the rear bumper
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win- Runder the rear bumper
ter
Rin the area immediately above the tailgate
Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed
handle
Observe the notes on cleaning
(Y page 274) ! Objects not at ground level may appear to
Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
event, have the camera position and setting Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle
checked at a qualified specialist workshop Rthe drawbar of a trailer
The field of vision and other functions of the rear Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
view camera may be restricted due to additional
Rthe rear section of an HGV
accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.
license plate holder, bicycle rack). Ra slanted post
On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis, Use the guidelines only for orientation.
leaving the standard height can result in inac- Approach objects no further than the bottom-
curacies in the guide lines, depending on tech- most guideline.
nical conditions.
i The rear view camera is protected from rain-
drops and dust by means of a flap. When the
rear view camera is activated, this flap opens.
The flap closes again when:
Ryou have finished the maneuvering process
Ryou switch off the engine
Ryou open the trunk
Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 274).
For technical reasons, the flap may remain
open briefly after the rear view camera has
been deactivated.
Driving systems 171
Driving and parking

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- E Front warning display
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the F Rear warning display
vehicle G Additional vehicle icon: PARKTRONIC meas-
; White guide line without turning the steering urement operational readiness indicator
wheel, vehicle width including the exterior
mirrors (static) When PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 164),
the vehicle icon appears in multimedia system
= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width display G. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays
including the exterior mirrors, for current are active or light up, warning displays E and
steering wheel angle (dynamic) F are also active or light up correspondingly in
? Yellow lane marking tires at current steering the multimedia system display.
wheel angle (dynamic)
"Reverse parking" function
Backing up straight into a parking space
without turning the steering wheel
A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-
cle
B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
C Bumper
: White guide line without turning the steering
D Red guide line at a distance of approximately
wheel, vehicle width including the exterior
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle mirrors (static)
When the transmission is shifted to position R, ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
guidelines appear in the camera image. including the exterior mirrors, for current
The distance specifications only apply to steering wheel angle (dynamic)
objects that are at ground level. = Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-
cle
? Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
Z
172 Driving systems
X Make sure that the rear view camera is

switched on (Y page 170).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X With the help of white guide line :, check
whether the vehicle will fit into the parking
space.
X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully
back up until you reach the end position.
Red guide line ? is then at the end of the
Driving and parking
parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel

in the parking space.
Reverse perpendicular parking with the : Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
steering wheel at an angle including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in
front of the parking space.
The white lane should be as close to parallel
with the parking space marking as possible.
: Parking space marking

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
X Drive past the parking space and bring the
vehicle to a standstill. : White guide line at current steering wheel
X Make sure that the rear view camera is
angle
switched on (Y page 170). ; Parking space marking
The lane and the guide lines are shown. X Turn the steering wheel to the center position
X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the while the vehicle is stationary.
steering wheel in the direction of the parking
space until yellow guide line ; reaches park-
ing space marking :.
X Keep the steering wheel in that position and
back up carefully.
Driving systems 173
360° camera
General notes
The 360° camera is a system consisting of four
cameras.
The system processes images from the follow-
ing cameras:
RRear view camera
Driving and parking

RFront camera
RTwo cameras in the exterior rear view mirrors
: Red guide line at a distance of approximately The cameras cover the immediate surroundings
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle of the vehicle. The system supports you, e.g.
; White guide line without turning the steering when parking or if vision is restricted at an exit.
wheel You can show images from the 360° camera in
= End of parking space full-screen mode or in six different split-screen
views on the multimedia system. A split-screen
X Back up carefully until you have reached the view also includes a top view of the vehicle. This
final position. view is calculated from the data supplied by the
Red guide line : is then at end of parking installed cameras (virtual camera).
space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the The six split-screen views are:
parking space.
RTop view and picture from the rear view cam-
era (130° viewing angle)
Wide-angle function RTop view and image from the front camera
(130° viewing angle without displaying the
maximum steering wheel angle)
RTop view and enlarged rear view
RTop view and enlarged front view
RTop view and images from the rear-facing side
cameras (rear wheel view)
RTop view and images from the forward-facing
side cameras (front wheel view)
When the function is active and you shift the
transmission from D or R to N, the dynamic
guide lines are not shown in the multimedia sys-
tem.
: Symbol for the wide-angle view function
When you change between transmission posi-
; Own vehicle tions D and R, you see the previously selected
= PARKTRONIC warning displays front or rear view.
You can also use the rear view camera to select Distances measured by PARKTRONIC will also
a wide-angle view. be optically displayed:
When PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 164), Rin split screen view as red or yellow brackets
a symbol for your own vehicle appears in the around the vehicle icon in the top view, or
display of the multimedia system. If the Rat the bottom right as red or yellow brackets
PARKTRONIC warning displays are active, warn-
around the vehicle symbol in full-screen mode
ing displays = light up in the multimedia system
in yellow or red accordingly. The line thickness and color of the brackets
show how far the vehicle is from an object.
Z
174 Driving systems
Ryellow brackets with thin lines: PARKTRONIC On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis,
is active depending on technical conditions, leaving the
Ryellow brackets with normal lines: an object is standard height can result in:
present in close range of the vehicle Rinaccuracies in the guide lines
Rred line: an object is present in the immediate Rinaccuracies in the display of generated
close range of the vehicle images (top view)
Important safety notes Activation conditions

Driving and parking
The 360°camera is only an aid and may show a The image from the 360° camera appears if:
distorted view of obstacles, show them incor-
Rthe multimedia system is switched on
rectly or not at all. The 360°camera is not a
substitute for attentive driving. Rthe 360° Camera function is switched on
You are always responsible for safe maneuver-
ing and parking. When maneuvering or parking, Switching on the 360° camera
make sure that there are no persons, animals or
objects in the area in which you are maneuver- X Press the Ø button in the center console
ing. for longer than two seconds.
Depending on whether position D or R is
You are always responsible for safety, and must
engaged, the following is shown:
always pay attention to your surroundings when
parking and maneuvering. This applies to the Ra split screen with top view and the image
areas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle. from the front camera or
You could otherwise endanger yourself and oth- Ra split screen with top view and the image
ers. from the rear view camera
The 360° camera will not function or will func- or
tion in a limited manner: X Briefly press the Ø button in the center
Rif the doors are open console.
Rif the exterior mirrors are folded in
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X Select 360° Camera and press 7 to confirm.
Rif the trunk lid is open
Depending on whether position D or R is
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
engaged, the following is shown:
Rat night or in very dark places
Ra split screen with top view and the image
Rif the cameras are exposed to very bright light from the front camera or
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED Ra split screen with top view and the image
lighting (the display may flicker) from the rear view camera
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-
ter
Activating the 360° camera using
Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered
reverse gear
Rif the vehicle components in which the cam- The 360° camera images can be automatically
eras are installed are damaged. In this event, displayed by engaging reverse gear.
have the camera position and setting checked X Make sure that the Activation by R gear
at a qualified specialist workshop function is selected in the multimedia system
Do not use the 360° camera in this case. You (see Digital Operator's Manual).
can otherwise injure others or cause damage to X To show the 360° camera image: engage
objects or the vehicle. reverse gear.
Guide lines are always shown at road level. The multimedia system shows the area
The field of vision and other functions of the behind the vehicle in split-screen mode. You
camera system may be restricted due to addi- see the top view of the vehicle and the image
tional attachments (e.g. license plate holder, from the rear view camera.
rear bicycle carrier).
Driving systems 175
Selecting the split-screen view or full Top view with picture from the rear view
screen mode camera
Switching between split screen views:
X To switch to the line with the vehicle icons:
slide 5 the controller.
X To select one of the vehicle icons: turn 3
the controller.
Driving and parking

Switching to full screen mode:
X To switch to 180° View: turn 3 the con-
troller to select and press 7 to confirm.
i The full screen option is only available in the
following views:
: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
RTop view with picture from the rear view imately 13 ft (4 m) from the rear of the vehi-
camera cle
RTop view with picture from the front camera ; Symbol for the split screen setting with top
view and rear view camera image
Displays in the multimedia system = Guide line for the maximum steering angle
? Yellow lane marking tires at current steering
Important safety notes wheel angle (dynamic)
The camera system may show a distorted view A Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. including the exterior mirrors, for current
Obstacles are not shown by the system in the steering wheel angle (dynamic)
following locations:
Runder the front and rear bumpers
Rvery close to the front and rear bumpers
Rin close range above the handle on the trunk
lid
Rvery close to the exterior mirrors
Rin the transitional areas between the various
cameras in the virtual top view
! Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle
B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
Rthe drawbar of a trailer
C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch imately 3 ft (1 m) from the rear of the vehicle
Rthe rear section of an HGV D Bumper
Ra slanted post E Red guide line at a distance of approximately
Use the guidelines only for orientation. 12 in (0.3 m) from the rear of the vehicle
Approach objects no further than the bottom- When the transmission is shifted to position R,
most guideline. guidelines appear in the camera image.
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
Z
176 Driving systems
Top view with picture from the front cam- Top view with image from the side cam-
era eras
Driving and parking
: Symbol for the split screen setting with top : Symbol for the top view and forward-facing
view and front camera image side camera setting
; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
imately 13 ft (4 m) from the front of the including the exterior mirrors (right side of
vehicle vehicle)
= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current including the exterior mirrors (left side of
steering wheel angle (dynamic) vehicle)
? Yellow lane marking tires at current steering
wheel angle (dynamic)
i You can also select the side camera setting
for the rear-facing view.
A Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.3 m) from the front of the vehicle
180° view
B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1 m) from the front of the vehi-
cle
Top view and enlarged rear view
: Symbol for the full screen setting with rear

view camera image
; Own vehicle
= PARKTRONIC warning displays
: Symbol for the split screen setting with top
view and rear view camera image enlarged i 180° view can also be selected as front
; Red guide line at a distance of approximately view.
12 in (0.3 m) from the rear of the vehicle Select this view when you are driving out of an
This view assists you in estimating the distance exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted,
to the vehicle behind you. for example.
i This setting can also be selected as an

enlarged front view.
Driving systems 177
Exiting 360° camera display mode The attention level evaluation is deleted and
restarts when the journey is continued, if:
The 360° camera display is stopped:
Ryou switch off the engine
Rwhen you select transmission position P, or
Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driv-
Rwhen you are driving at moderate speeds er's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to
The previous display appears in the multimedia take a break
system display. You can also switch the display
by selecting the & symbol in the display and Displaying the attention level
pressing 7 the controller to confirm.
Driving and parking

ATTENTION ASSIST
General notes
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is
active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph In the assistance menu (Y page 195) of the on-
(200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSIST board computer you can call up the current sta-
detects typical indicators of fatigue or increas- tus information.
ing lapses in concentration on the part of the X Select the Assistance display for ATTENTION
driver, it suggests taking a break. ASSIST using the on-board computer
(Y page 195).
The following information appears:
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It might not Rlength of the journey since the last break.
always recognize fatigue or increasing inatten- Rthe attention level determined by ATTENTION
tiveness in time or fail to recognize them at all.
ASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five levels
The system is not a substitute for a well-rested
from high to low.
and attentive driver.
Rif ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
the attention level and cannot output a warn-
restricted and warnings may be delayed or not
ing, the System Suspended message
occur at all:
appears. The bar display then changes the
Rif the length of the journey is less than approx- display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below
imately 30 minutes 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph
Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface (200 km/h).
is uneven or if there are potholes
Rif there is a strong side wind Activating ATTENTION ASSIST
Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with
X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-
high cornering speeds or high rates of accel- board computer (Y page 196).
eration The system determines the attention level of
Rif you are predominantly driving at a speed the driver depending on the setting selected:
below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph
(200 km/h) Standard selected: the sensitivity with which
the system determines the attention level is set
Rif you are driving with the DISTRONIC PLUS
to normal.
Steering Assist activated
Rif the time has been set incorrectly
Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set
higher. The attention level detected by Attention
Rin active driving situations, such as when you Assist is adapted accordingly and the driver is
change lanes or change your speed warned earlier.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
é symbol appears in the multifunction dis-
play in the assistance graphic display.
Z
178 Driving systems
When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated, The sign indicating the end of a restriction only
it is automatically reactivated after the engine appears with the restriction in the instrument
has been stopped. The sensitivity selected cor- cluster when:
responds to the last selection activated (stand- Rthe regulation must be observed with the
ard/sensitive). restriction, or
RTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determine
Warning in the multifunction display whether the restriction applies
If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a
Driving and parking
are detected, a warning appears in the multi- maximum permitted speed from any of the avail-
function display: Attention Assist: Take a able sources, no speed limit appears in the
Break! instrument cluster either.
In addition to the display message shown in the
multifunction display, you will then hear a warn-
ing tone.
X If necessary, take a break.
X Confirm the display message with the a
button on the steering wheel.
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
time to allow yourself to rest. If you do not take Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun-
a break, you will be warned again after tries. In this case, display : appears in the
15 minutes at the earliest. This will only happen assistance graphic (Y page 195).
if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indi-
cators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concen-
tration. Important safety notes
Vehicles with COMAND multifunction dis- Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not always
play: if a warning is output in the multifunction able to correctly display speed limits. Traffic
display, a service station search is performed in signs always have priority over the Traffic Sign
the multimedia system. You can select a service Assist display.
station and navigation to this service station will The system may be either functionally impaired
then begin. This function can be activated and or temporarily unavailable if the information in
deactivated in the multimedia system. the digital street map of the navigation system is
incorrect or out of date.
Traffic Sign Assist Instrument cluster display

General notes Displaying the assistance graphic
Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speed X Call up the assistance graphics display func-
permitted to the driver in the instrument cluster. tion using the on-board computer
The data and general traffic regulations stored in (Y page 195).
the navigation system are used to determine the Detected traffic signs are displayed in the
current speed limit. instrument cluster.
Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system, and
for this reason, traffic signs put up temporarily
(e.g. near roadworks) are not detected. There is
also no display for changing traffic signs.
If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle is
passed, the display of the speed limits is upda-
ted.
Traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an
additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions) are also
shown.
Driving systems 179
Speed limit with unknown restriction As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give
warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions care-
fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to

detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
Driving and parking

: Maximum permitted speed attentive driving. Always ensure that there is
; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for sufficient distance to the side for other road
which the restriction in the additional sign is users and obstacles.
relevant i USA only:
= Additional sign for unknown restriction This device has been approved by the FCC as
A maximum permitted speed of 100 mph a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor
(100 km/h) and a speed limit of 80 km/h is intended for use in an automotive radar
(80 mph) apply with an unknown restriction. system only. Removing, tampering with, or
altering the device will void any warranties,
and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam-
per with, alter, or use in any non-approved
Lane Tracking package way.
General notes Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind equipment.
Spot Assist (Y page 179) and Lane Keeping
Assist (Y page 181). Radar sensors
The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are
Blind Spot Assist integrated into the sides of the rear bumper.
Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice or
General notes slush in the vicinity of the sensors. The sensors
must not be covered, for example by cycle racks
Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact
side of the vehicle that are not visible to the or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have
driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sen- the function of the sensors checked at a quali-
sors. A warning lamp lights up in the exterior fied specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may
mirrors and draws your attention to vehicles otherwise not work properly.
detected in the monitored area. If you then
switch on the corresponding turn signal to Monitoring area
change lane, you will also receive an optical and
audible warning. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired if:
Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Important safety notes Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy
G WARNING rain, snow or spray
Rthere are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or
Blind Spot Assist does not react to: bicycles
Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, Rthe road has very wide lanes
placing them in the blind spot area Rthe road has narrow lanes
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane
differential and overtake your vehicle Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated.
Z
180 Driving systems
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below

approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in
the monitoring range are then not indicated.
When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator
lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow
at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds
above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp
goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot
Driving and parking
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph

(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the correspond-
ing side lights up red. This warning is always
emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot
monitoring range from behind or from the side.
When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only
occurs if the difference in speed is less than
7 mph (12 km/h).
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
At a distance of approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m) ; gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot Assist
from the vehicle, Blind Spot Assist monitors the is no longer active.
area up to 10 ft (3 m) next to = and behind : The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps
your vehicle, as shown in the picture. is adjusted automatically according to the
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the brightness of the surroundings.
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be
indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv- Collision warning
ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of
case if there are vehicles driving at the inner Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corre-
edge of their lanes. sponding turn signal, a double warning tone
Due to the nature of the system: sounds. The red warning lamp flashes. If the turn
Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving
signal remains on, detected vehicles are indica-
ted by the flashing of the red warning lamp.
close to crash barriers or similar solid lane
There are no further warning tones.
borders.
Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an Switching on Blind Spot Assist
extended period next to long vehicles, such as X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activated
trucks. in the on-board computer (Y page 196).
Indicator and warning lamp X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light
up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and
then turn yellow.
: Indicator lamp (yellow)

Warning lamp (red)
Driving systems 181
Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk
of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving
General notes style nor override the laws of physics. Lane
Keeping Assist cannot take into account the
road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keep-
ing Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible
for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time
and for staying in lane.
Driving and parking

The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehi-
cle in the lane.
The system may be impaired or may not function
if:
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient
illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of fog or spray
your vehicle with camera :, which is mounted Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the
at the top of the windshield. Active Lane Keeping sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface
Assist detects lane markings on the road and is wet)
can warn you before you leave your lane unin- Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or
tentionally. covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-
This function is available in the range between ity of the camera
40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h). Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings
A warning may be given if a front wheel passes for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction
over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of work
intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
up to 1.5 seconds. ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small
Important safety notes and the lane markings thus cannot be detec-
G WARNING ted
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly
branch off, cross one another or merge
recognize lane markings.
Rthe road is narrow and winding
In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:
Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road
Rgive an unnecessary warning
Switching on Lane Keeping Assist
Rnot give a warning
X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
There is a risk of an accident. the on-board computer; to do so, select
Always pay particular attention to the traffic Standard or Adaptive (Y page 197).
situation and stay in lane, in particular if If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
warned by Lane Keeping Assist. (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
the lines in the assistance graphics display
(Y page 195) are shown in green. Lane Keep-
G WARNING ing Assist is ready for use.
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
return the vehicle to the original lane. There is Standard
a risk of an accident. If Standard is selected, no warning vibration
You should always steer, brake or accelerate occurs if:
yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep-
ing Assist.
Z
182 Driving systems
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, area. If you then switch on the corresponding
the warnings are suppressed for a certain turn signal to change lane, you will also receive
period of time. an optical and audible warning. If a risk of lateral
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as collision is detected, corrective braking may
ABS, BAS or ESP®. help you avoid a collision. Before a course-cor-
recting brake application, Active Blind Spot
Adaptive Assist evaluates the space in the direction of
When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra- travel and at the sides of the vehicle. For this,
tion occurs if: Active Blind Spot Assist uses the forward-facing
Driving and parking
radar sensors.
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
the warnings are suppressed for a certain Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a
period of time. speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, Important safety notes
BAS or ESP®. Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is not
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. a substitute for attentive driving.
Ryou brake hard.
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
G WARNING
obstacle or change lanes quickly. Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
In order that you are warned only when neces- placing them in the blind spot area
sary and in good time if you cross the lane mark- Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
ing, the system recognizes certain conditions
and warns you accordingly. differential and overtake your vehicle
The warning vibration occurs earlier if: As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei-
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit-
bend. uations. There is a risk of an accident.
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway. Always observe the traffic conditions care-
Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings. fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
The warning vibration occurs later if:
i USA only:
Rthe road has narrow lanes.
This device has been approved by the FCC as
Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor
is intended for use in an automotive radar
system only. Removing, tampering with, or
Active Driving Assistance package altering the device will void any warranties,
and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam-
General notes per with, alter, or use in any non-approved
way.
The Active Driving Assistance package consists
of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 149), Active Blind Any unauthorized modification to this device
Spot Assist (Y page 182) and Active Lane Keep- could void the user’s authority to operate the
ing Assist (Y page 184). equipment.
i Canada only: This device complies with
Active Blind Spot Assist RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
General notes 1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor ference, and
system, pointed toward the rear of the vehicle, 2. This device must accept any interference
to monitor the area to the sides of the vehicle received, including interference that may
which the driver is unable to see. A warning lamp cause undesired operation of the device.
lights up in the exterior mirrors and draws your Removal, tampering, or altering of the device
attention to vehicles detected in the monitored will void any warranties, and is not permitted.
Driving systems 183
Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non- The detection of obstacles can be impaired in
approved way. the case of:
Any unauthorized modification to this device Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
could void the user's authority to operate the covering the sensors
equipment. Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or spray
Radar sensors Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are indicated or indicated with a delay.
integrated into the front and rear bumpers and Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow
Driving and parking

behind a cover in the radiator trim. Make sure vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or
that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator may only detect them too late.
grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sensors If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
must not be covered, for example by cycle racks lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be
or overhanging cargo. Following a severe impact indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-
or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the
the function of the radar sensors checked at a case if there are vehicles at the edge of their
qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot lane.
Assist may otherwise no longer work properly. Due to the nature of the system:
Monitoring area Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving
close to crash barriers or similar solid lane
G WARNING borders.
Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an
traffic situations and road users. There is a extended period next to long vehicles, such as
risk of an accident. trucks.
Always make sure that there is sufficient dis- Warning lamp
tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.
: Warning lamp
Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds
below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehi-
cles in the monitoring range are then not indi-
cated.
When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, indi-
cator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up
At a distance of approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m) ; yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At
from the vehicle, Active Blind Spot Assist mon- speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator
itors the area up to 10 ft (3 m) next to = and lamp goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist is
behind : your vehicle, as shown in the picture. operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the correspond-
ing side lights up red. This warning is always
Z
184 Driving systems
given when a vehicle enters the blind spot mon- ate course-correcting brake application may be
itoring range from behind or from the side. When interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the
you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs opposite direction or accelerate, for example.
if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph The course-correcting brake application is avail-
(12 km/h). able in the speed range between 20 mph
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse (30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).
gear is engaged. Active Blind Spot Assist is not Either no braking application, or a course-cor-
operational. recting brake application adapted to the driving
The brightness of the warning lamps is auto- situation occurs if:
Driving and parking
matically adapted to the brightness of the sur- Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash
roundings. barriers, located on both sides of your vehicle.
Visual and acoustic collision warning Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the
If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes side.

and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision high cornering speeds.
warning. You then hear a double warning tone Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.
and red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn sig- Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®
nal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated or PRE-SAFE® Brake.
by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are
RESP® is switched off.
no further warning tones.
Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is
Course-correcting brake application detected.
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lat-
eral collision in the monitoring range, a course- Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist
correcting brake application is carried out. This X Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist
is meant to assist you in avoiding a collision. (Y page 196) is activated in the on-board
computer.
G WARNING X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
A course-correcting brake application cannot lock.
always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light
accident. up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and
then turn yellow.
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns
you or makes a course-correcting brake appli- Active Lane Keeping Assist
cation. Always maintain a safe distance at the
General notes
sides.
If a course-correcting brake application occurs,

red warning lamp : flashes in the exterior mir-
ror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition,
display ; appears in the multifunction display Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
underlining the danger of a side collision. front of your vehicle by means of multifunction
In very rare cases, the system may make an camera : at the top of the windshield. Various
inappropriate brake application. An inappropri- different areas to the front, rear and side of your
Driving systems 185
vehicle are also monitored with the aid of the Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or
radar sensor system. Active Lane Keeping covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-
Assist detects lane markings on the road and ity of the camera
can warn you before you leave your lane unin- Rthe radar sensors in the front or rear bumpers
tentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a or the radiator trim are dirty, e.g. obscured by
lane-correcting application of the brakes can snow
bring the vehicle back into the original lane. Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings
This function is available in the range between for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction
40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h). work
Driving and parking

For Active Lane Keeping Assist to assist you Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
when driving, the radar sensor system must be ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
operational Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small
Important safety notes and the lane markings thus cannot be detec-
ted
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of
branch off, cross one another or merge
accident nor override the laws of physics. Active
Lane Keeping Assist cannot take account of Rthe road is narrow and winding
road and weather conditions. It may not recog- Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road
nize traffic situations. Active Lane Keeping If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and
Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the broken lane markings are detected, no lane-cor-
distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle recting brake application is made.
speed, for braking in good time and for staying in
your lane. Warning vibration in the steering wheel
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously A warning may be given if a front wheel passes
keep your vehicle in its lane. over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of
intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for
G WARNING up to 1.5 seconds.
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always
clearly detect lane markings. Lane-correcting brake application
In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist G WARNING
can: A lane-correcting brake application cannot
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then always bring the vehicle back into the original
make a course-correcting brake application lane. There is a risk of an accident.
to the vehicle Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
Rnot give a warning or intervene especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns
you or makes a lane-correcting brake appli-
cation.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and keep within the lane, especially G WARNING
if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter-
Active Lane Keeping Assist only detects traf-
minate the intervention in a non-critical driv-
fic conditions or road users to a limited
ing situation.
extent. In very rare cases, the system may
The system may be impaired or may not function make an inappropriate brake application, e.g.
if: after intentionally driving over a solid lane
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient marking. There is a risk of an accident.
illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, An inappropriate brake application may be
fog or spray interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the the opposite direction. Always make sure that
sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface
is wet)
Z
186 Driving systems
there is sufficient distance on the side for There is a possibility that the Active Lane Keep-
other traffic or obstacles. ing Assist could misjudge the given traffic sit-
uation. An inappropriate brake application may
be interrupted at any time if you:
Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction.
Rswitch on the turn signal.
Rclearly brake or accelerate.
A lane-correcting brake application is interrup-
Driving and parking
ted automatically if:

Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®,
If you leave your lane, under certain circumstan- PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.
ces the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. Rlane markings can no longer be recognized.
This is meant to assist you in bringing the vehicle
back to the original lane. Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
display : appears in the multifunction display. the on-board computer; to do so, select
A lane-correcting brake application can be made Standard or Adaptive (Y page 197).
after driving over a lane marking recognize as If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
being solid or broken. Before this, a warning (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
must be given by means of intermittent vibration the lines in the assistance graphics display
in the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with (Y page 195) are shown in green. Active Lane
lane markings on both sides must be recog- Keeping Assist is ready for use.
nized. If Standard is selected, no warning vibration
In the case of a broken lane marking being occurs if:
detected, a lane-correcting brake application Ryou have switched on the turn signal. In this
can only be made if a vehicle has been detected event, the warnings are suppressed for a
in the adjacent lane. The following vehicles can certain period of time.
have an influence on brake application: oncom- Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
ing traffic, vehicles that are overtaking and vehi- ABS, BAS or ESP®.
cles that are driving parallel to your vehicle. When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-
i A further lane-correcting brake application tion occurs if:
can only occur after your vehicle has returned Ryou have switched on the turn signal. In this
to the original lane. event, the warnings are suppressed for a
No lane-correcting brake application occurs if: certain period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accel-
ABS, BAS or ESP®.
erate.
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
Ryou brake hard.
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of accel- Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
eration. obstacle or change lanes quickly.
Ryou have switched on the turn signal. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, In order that you are warned only when neces-
PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. sary and in good time if you cross the lane mark-
RESP® is switched off.
ing, the system recognizes certain conditions
and warns you accordingly.
Rthe transmission is not in position D.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Ran obstacle has been detected in the lane in
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
which you are driving.
bend.
Rwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway.
has been detected and displayed.
Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.
Driving systems 187
The warning vibration occurs later if:

Rthe road has narrow lanes.
Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
Driving and parking
Z
188 Displays and operation
Important safety notes One or two segments in the set speed range
light up.
RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front
G WARNING moving more slowly than the stored speed:
On-board computer and displays
If you operate information systems and com- The segments between the speed of the vehi-
munication equipment integrated in the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up.
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Tachometer
Only operate the equipment when the traffic ! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this
situation permits. If you are not sure that this could damage the engine.
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention The red band in the tachometer indicates the
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- engine's overrevving range.
ment when the vehicle is stationary. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine when the red band is reached.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the on-board computer.
Outside temperature display
G WARNING
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal- tions when temperatures are around freezing
functioned, you may not recognize function point.
restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis-
operating safety of your vehicle may be play indicates the temperature measured and
impaired. There is a risk of an accident. does not record the road temperature.
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked The outside temperature display is in the multi-
function display (Y page 190).
at a qualified specialist workshop immedi-
ately. The multifunction display shows changes in the
outside temperature with a delay.
The on-board computer only shows messages or
warnings from certain systems in the multifunc-
tion display. You should therefore make sure Coolant temperature gauge
your vehicle is operating safely at all times.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is G WARNING
impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so. Opening the hood when the engine is over-
Contact a qualified specialist workshop. heated or when there is a fire in the engine
For an overview, see the instrument panel illus- compartment could expose you to hot gases
tration (Y page 34). or other service products. There is a risk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
Displays and operation
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
Speedometer with segments engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
The segments in the speedometer indicate
which speed range is available.
! A display message is shown if the coolant
RCruise control activated (Y page 148): temperature is too high.
The segments light up from the stored speed If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡
to the end of the scale. (120 †), do not continue driving. The engine
RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 149): will otherwise be damaged.
Displays and operation 189
The coolant temperature gage is in the instru- Left control panel

ment cluster on the left-hand side (Y page 34).
Under normal operating conditions and with the = RCalls up the menu and menu bar
specified coolant level, the coolant temperature ;

may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
9 Press briefly:
: RScrolls in lists
Operating the on-board computer RSelects a submenu or function
RIn the Audio menu: selects the
Overview previous or next station, when the
preset list or station list is active,
or an audio track or video scene
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu:
switches to the phone book and
selects a name or telephone num-
ber
9 Press and hold:
: RIn the Audio menu: selects a pre-
set list or a station list in the
desired frequency range, or an
audio track or video scene using
rapid scrolling
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:
starts rapid scrolling if the phone
book is open
a RConfirms the selection or display
: Multifunction display message
; Right control panel RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:
= Left control panel switches to the telephone book

and starts dialing the selected
X To activate the on-board computer: turn number
the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.
You can control the multifunction display and % Press briefly:
the settings in the on-board computer using RBack
the buttons on the multifunction steering RSwitches off voice-operated navi-
wheel. gation or the Voice Control System
Vehicles with a COMAND multimedia sys- RHides display messages or calls up
tem: you can find further information on the the last Trip menu function used
Voice Control System in the separate operat- RExits the telephone book/redial
ing instructions.
memory
Vehicles with Audio 20 multimedia sys-
tem: you can find further information on % Press and hold:
voice-operated control for navigation in the RCalls up the standard display in the
manufacturer's operating instructions. Trip menu
Z
190 Menus and submenus
Right control panel R¤ ECO start/stop function (Y page 126)

Rë HOLD function (Y page 157)
~ RRejectsor ends a call
RExits
the telephone book/redial
memory Menus and submenus

6 RMakes or accepts a call Menu overview
RSwitches to the redial memory
Press the = or ; button on the steering
W RAdjusts the volume wheel to call up the menu bar and select a menu.
X Operating the on-board computer (Y page 189).
8 RMute Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you can call up the following menus:
? RSwitches on voice-operated navi-
RTrip menu (Y page 190)
gation or the Voice Control System
RNavi menu (navigation instructions)
(Y page 192)
RAudio menu (Y page 193)
Multifunction display
RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 194)
RDriveAssist menu (assistance)
(Y page 195)
RServ. menu (Y page 197)
RSett. menu (settings) (Y page 197)
RAMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
(Y page 201)
The display messages dependent on the multi-
media system. This is why the displays for the
Audio, Navi and Tel menus may differ slightly
to those in your vehicle.
: Text field
; Menu bar Trip menu
= Drive program
? Transmission position Standard display
A Permanent display: outside temperature or
speed
X To display menu bar;: press the =
or ; button on the steering wheel.
Text field : shows the selected menu or sub-
menu as well as display messages.
If you do not press the buttons any longer,
menu bar ; is faded out after a few seconds.
X Press and hold the % button on the steer-
Possible displays in the multifunction dis- ing wheel until the Trip menu with trip odom-
play: eter : and odometer ; appears.
RZ Gearshift recommendation, when shifting
manually (Y page 135)
Rj Active Parking Assist (Y page 165)
RCRUISE Cruise control (Y page 148)
R_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist
(Y page 108)
Menus and submenus 191
Trip computer "From Start" or "From Displaying the range and current fuel
Reset" consumption

: Distance X Press the = or ; button on the steering
; Driving time wheel to select the Trip menu.
= Average speed X Press 9 or : to select the display with
? Average fuel consumption approximate range and the current fuel con-
X Press the = or ; button on the steering sumption.
wheel to select the Trip menu. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only dis-
plays the approximate range.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
From Start or From Reset. The approximate range that can be covered
depends on the fuel level and your current
The values in the From Start submenu are cal- driving style. If there is only a small amount of
culated from the start of a journey whilst the fuel left in the fuel tank, a vehicle being refu-
values in the From Reset submenu are calcu- eled C appears instead of approximate
lated from the last time the submenu was reset range.
(Y page 191).
In the following cases, the trip computer is auto- Digital speedometer
matically reset From Start:
Rthe ignition has been switched off for more X Press the = or ; button on the steering
than four hours. wheel to select the Trip menu.
R999 hours have been exceeded. X Press the 9 or : button to select the
R9,999 miles have been exceeded. digital speedometer.
When 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles have been A gearshift recommendation Z can also
exceeded, the trip computer is automatically appear in the display.
reset From Reset. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: a gearshift recom-
mendation is displayed in the status area of
ECO display
Observe the information on gearshift recom-
The ECO display is not available in Mercedes- mendation Z when shifting manually
AMG vehicles. (Y page 135).
X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Trip menu. Resetting values
X Press the 9 or : button to select ECO
DISPLAY. X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Trip menu.
If the ignition remains switched off for longer X Press the 9 or : button to select the
than four hours, the ECO display will be auto- function that you wish to reset.
matically reset.
X Press a to confirm your selection.
For more information on the ECO display, see
X Press : to select Yes and press a to
(Y page 144).
confirm.
Z
You can reset the values of the following func- = Current road
tions: ? "Follow the road's course" symbol
RTrip odometer
R"From Start" trip computer
Change of direction announced without a
lane recommendation
R"From Reset" trip computer
RECO display
i If you reset the values in the ECO display,

the values in the "From Start" trip computer
are also reset. If you reset the values in the
"From Start" trip computer, the values in the
ECO display are also reset.
: Road into which the change of direction

Navigation system menu leads
; Distance to change of direction and visual
Displaying navigation instructions distance display
= Change-of-direction symbol
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions. When a change of direction is announced, you
Observe the additional information on naviga- will see symbol = for the change of direction
tion in the Digital Operator's Manual of the mul- and distance graphic ;. The distance indicator
timedia system. shortens towards the top of the display as you
approach the point of the announced change of
X Switch on the multimedia system. direction.
wheel to select the Navi menu. Change of direction announced with a
lane recommendation
Route guidance not active
: Road into which the change of direction

leads
: Direction of travel ; Distance to change of direction and visual
; Current road distance display
= Lanes not recommended
Route guidance active ? Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction
No change of direction announced A Change-of-direction symbol
On multilane roads, new lane recommendations
can be displayed for the next change of direction
if the digital map supports this data. During the
change of direction, new lanes may be added.
Lane not recommended =: you will not be able
to complete the next change of direction if you
stay in this lane.
: Distance to destination Recommended lane and new lane during a
; Distance to the next change of direction change of direction ?: in this lane you will be
able to complete the next two changes of direc- X To select a preset list or station list: press
tion without changing lane. and briefly hold the 9 or : button until
the preset list or station list in the desired
Other status indicators of the naviga- frequency range is shown.

tion system X To select a station: briefly press 9
or :.
i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a
normal radio.
For more information on radio operation, see
"Satellite radio" in the separate operating
instructions.
Operating an audio player or audio

The navigation system displays additional infor- media
mation and the vehicle status.
Possible displays:
RNew Route... or Calculating Route
A new route is calculated.
RRoad Not Mapped
The vehicle position is inside the area of the
digital map but the road is not recognized, e.g.
newly built streets, car parks or private land.
Audio data from various audio devices or media
RNo Route
can be played, depending on the equipment
No route could be calculated to the selected installed in the vehicle.
destination.
X Switch on the multimedia system and select
RO: you have reached the destination or an
audio CD or MP3 mode.
intermediate destination.
wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next/previous track: briefly
Audio menu press the 9 or : button.
Selecting a radio station X To select a track from the track list (rapid
scrolling): press and hold the 9 or :
button until desired track : appears.
If you press and hold 9 or :, the rapid
scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio
drives or data carriers support this function.
If track information is stored on the audio
device or medium, the multifunction display
will show the number and title of the track.
: Active station list
; Station frequency with memory position Video DVD operation
The menu shows station ; with station fre-
quency or station name. The preset position is
only displayed along with station ; if this has
been stored.
Radio.
Z
Only for vehicles with a COMAND multimedia Accepting a call

system: you can use the Audio menu to play
video DVDs. If someone calls you when you are in the Tel
menu, a display message appears in the multi-
function display.
video DVD.
You can accept a call at any time regardless of
the menu selected.
X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel
X To select the next or previous scene:
briefly press the 9 or : button. to accept an incoming call.
X To select a scene from the scene list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 Rejecting or ending a call
or : button until desired scene : X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel
appears.
to reject or end a call.
Telephone menu Selecting an entry in the phone book

Introduction wheel to select the Tel menu.
X Press the 9, : or a button to
G WARNING switch to the phone book.
If you operate information systems and com- X Authorize access to the phone book on the
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- phone.
cle while driving, you will be distracted from X Press the 9 or : button to select the
traffic conditions. You could also lose control desired name.
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. or
Only operate the equipment when the traffic X To start rapid scrolling: press and hold :
situation permits. If you are not sure that this or 9 for longer than one second.
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention The names in the phone book are displayed
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- quickly one after the other.
ment when the vehicle is stationary. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
button or reach the end of the list.
When telephoning, you must observe the legal X If only one telephone number is stored for
requirements for the country in which you are a name: press the 6 or a button to
currently driving. start dialing.
X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manu- or
facturer’s operating instructions). X If there is more than one number for a
X Switch on the multimedia system. particular name:press the 6 or a
X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to the mul-
button to display the numbers.
timedia system (see Digital Operator's Man- X Press the 9 or : button to select the
ual). number you want to dial.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.
wheel to select the Tel menu. or
You will see one of the following display mes- X To exit the telephone book: press the ~
sages in the multifunction display: or % button.
RPhone READY or the name of the network
provider: the mobile phone has found a net-
work and is ready to receive.
RPhone No Service: there is no network
available or the mobile phone is searching for
a network.
Redialing X Press the = or ; button on the steering

wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
The on-board computer saves the last names or X Press 9 or : to select Assist.
numbers dialed in the redial memory. Graphic.

X Press the = or ; button on the steering X Press a to confirm.
wheel to select the Tel menu. The multifunction display shows the
X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the
memory. assistance graphic.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the The assistance graphic shows you the status
desired name or number. and further information on the following driv-
X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing. ing systems or driving safety systems:
or RTraffic Sign Assist (Y page 178)
X To exit the redial memory: press the ~ RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 149)
or % button. RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 72)
RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
(Y page 67)
Assistance menu RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 177)
RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 181)
Introduction RActive Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 184)
Depending on the equipment installed in the X Press : to display the ATTENTION ASSIST
vehicle, you have the following options in the assessment.
DriveAssist menu:
RDisplaying the assistance graphic
(Y page 195)
RDeactivating/activating ESP® (except i Observe the important safety notes on ESP®
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) (Y page 195) (Y page 69).
RActivating/deactivating Steering Assist and
G WARNING
Stop&Go Pilot of DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 196) If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-
RActivating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
(Y page 196) of skidding and an accident.
RActivating/deactivating COLLISION PREVEN- Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-
TION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 196) bed in the following.
RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST
(Y page 196) It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow-
RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or ing situations:
Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 196) Rwhen using snow chains
RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist
Rin deep snow
or Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 197)
Ron sand or gravel
Displaying the assistance graphic Deactivating/activating ESP® on Mercedes-

AMG vehicles (Y page 71).
For further information about ESP®, see
(Y page 69).
X Start the engine.
X Press 9 or : to select ESP.
Z
X Press a to confirm. Activating/deactivating Steering

The current selection appears. Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
X To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
ton again. X Press the = or ; button on the steering
ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp in X Press the 9 or : button to select DTR
the instrument cluster lights up continuously +: Steer. Asst.
when the engine is running.
X Press a to confirm.
If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warning The current selection appears.
lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available X To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
due to a malfunction.
ton again.
Observe the information on warning lamps When Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are
(Y page 229). activated, the multifunction display shows the
Observe the information on display messages DTR+: Steer. Asst. On message.
(Y page 204).
Further information about DISTRONIC PLUS
with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® (Y page 155).
Brake
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION
PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available for vehicles
with the Driving Assistance package. ASSIST
X Press the = or ; button on the steering X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select PRE- X Press the 9 or : button to select
SAFE Brake. Attention Assist.
X Press a to confirm. X Press a to confirm your selection.
The current selection appears. The current selection appears.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a but- X Press a to confirm.
ton again. X Press the : or 9 button to set Off,
When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, the Standard or Sensitive.
assistance graphic shows the æ symbol in X Press the a button to save the setting.
the multifunction display. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
For more information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake, see é symbol appears in the multifunction dis-
(Y page 72). play in the assistance graphics display.
For further information about ATTENTION
Activating/deactivating COLLISION ASSIST, see (Y page 177).
PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot
X Press the = or ; button on the steering Assist
X Press the 9 or : button to select Col‐ X Press the = or ; button on the steering
lision Prevent.. wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to select
The current selection appears. Blind Spot Assist.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a but- X Press the a button.
ton again. The current selection appears.
If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is X To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
deactivated, the assistance graphic shows ton again.
the æ symbol in the multifunction display.
For further information about Blind Spot Assist,
For further information about COLLISION PRE- see (Y page 179).
VENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 67).
For further information about Active Blind Spot Instrument cluster

Assist, see (Y page 182).
Selecting the distance unit
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: func-

Assist tion allows you to choose whether certain dis-
plays appear in kilometers or miles in the mul-
X Press the = or ; button on the steering tifunction display.
wheel to select the Sett. menu.
Lane Keep. Assist.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press the a button.
Instrument Cluster submenu.
The current selection appears.
X Press the : or 9 button to set Off,
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer function.
Standard or Adaptive. You will see the selected setting: km or miles.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
For further information about Lane Keeping The selected unit of measurement for distance
Assist, see (Y page 181). applies to:
For further information about Active Lane Keep-
Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menu
ing Assist, see (Y page 184).
Rthe odometer and trip odometer
Rthe trip computer
Service menu Rthe current consumption and the range
Rthe navigation instructions in the Navi menu
Depending on the equipment installed in the
Rcruise control
vehicle, you have the following options in the
Serv. menu: RDISTRONIC PLUS
RCalling up display messages in message RASSYST PLUS service interval display
memory (Y page 203)
Selecting permanent display
RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning sys-
tem (Y page 299) The Permanent Display: function allows you
RChecking the tire pressure electronically
to choose whether the multifunction display
(Y page 299) always shows the outside temperature or the
speed.
RCalling up the service due date
(Y page 270) The speed display is inverse to the speedome-
ter.
Settings menu
Introduction Instrument Cluster submenu.
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, In the Sett. menu you have the follow-
ing options: Permanent Display: function.
The current setting, Outside Temperature
RChanging the instrument cluster settings
or Speedometer [km/h]/Speedometer
(Y page 197) [mph], appears.
RChanging the light settings (Y page 198) X Press the a button to save the setting.
RChanging the vehicle settings (Y page 199)
RChanging the convenience settings
(Y page 199)
RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 200)
Z
Lights Setting the brightness of the ambient

lighting
Setting the brightness of the instrument X Press the = or ; button on the steering
cluster lighting and switches wheel to select the Sett. menu.
The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the dis- X Press the : or 9 button to select the
plays and the controls in the vehicle interior can Lights submenu.
be adjusted with the Brightness Display/ X Press a to confirm.
Switches: function.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering Ambient Brightness function.
wheel to select the Sett. menu. The current setting appears.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press a to confirm.
Lights submenu. X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the
X Press a to confirm. brightness to any level from Off to Level 5
X Press the : or 9 button to select the (bright).
Brightness Display/Switches: function. X Press the a or % button to save the
The current setting appears. setting.
X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the Setting the ambient lighting color
brightness to any level from Level 1 to X Press the = or ; button on the steering
Level 5 (bright). wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the a or % button to save the X Press the : or 9 button to select the
setting. Lights submenu.
If the light switch is set to the Ã, T or X Press a to confirm.
L position, the brightness is dependent
upon the brightness of the ambient light.
Amb. Light Col. function.
i The light sensor in the instrument cluster X Press a to confirm.
automatically controls the brightness of the X Press the : or 9 button to set the color
multifunction display. to SOLAR, NEUTRAL or POLAR.
In daylight, the displays in the instrument X Press the a or % button to save the
cluster are not illuminated. setting.
Switching the daytime running lamps on/ Activating/deactivating surround light-
off ing and exterior lighting delayed switch-
X Press the = or ; button on the steering off
wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the = or ; button on the steering
X Press the : or 9 button to select the wheel to select the Sett. menu.
Lights submenu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press a to confirm. Lights submenu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press a to confirm.
Day. Run. Lights function. X Using : or 9, select the Surround
If the Day. Run. Lights function has been
Lighting function.
switched on, the multifunction display shows
If the Surround Lighting function is activa-
the cone of light and the W symbol in
ted, the light cone and the area around the
orange.
vehicle are displayed in orange in the multi-
X Press the a button to save the setting. function display.
Further information on daytime running lamps X Press the a button to save the setting.
(Y page 105).
Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exterior Vehicle

lighting temporarily:
X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the SmartKey Activating/deactivating the automatic
to position 0 in the ignition lock. door locking mechanism

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition X Press the = or ; button on the steering
lock. wheel to select the Sett. menu.
The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is X Press the : or 9 button to select the
deactivated. Vehicle submenu.
Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is X Press a to confirm.
reactivated the next time you start the engine. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
If you have activated the Surround Lighting Auto. Door Locks function.
function and the light switch is set to the Ã If the Auto. Door Locks function is switched
position, the following functions are activated on, the multifunction display shows the vehi-
when it is dark: cle's doors in orange.
Rsurround lighting: the exterior lighting X Press the a button to save the setting.
remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking If you activate the Auto. Door Locks function,
with the SmartKey. If you start the engine, the the vehicle is centrally locked above a speed of
surround lighting is switched off and auto- around 9 mph (15 km/h).
matic headlamp mode is activated
For further information on the automatic locking
(Y page 105).
feature, see (Y page 82).
Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: the
exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds Activating/deactivating the acoustic
after the engine is switched off. If you close all locking verification signal
the doors and the trunk lid/tailgate, the exte-
If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an
rior lighting goes off after 15 seconds.
acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehi-
i Depending on your vehicle's equipment, cle.
when the surround lighting and delayed X Press the = or ; button on the steering
switch-off exterior lighting are on, the follow- wheel to select the Sett. menu.
ing light up: X Press the : or 9 button to select the
RParking lamps Vehicle submenu.
RSide marker lamps X Press a to confirm.
RSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Acoustic Lock function.
Activating/deactivating the interior light- If the Acoustic Lock function is activated,
ing delayed switch-off the & symbol in the multifunction display
If you activate the Light. Delay function, the lights up orange.
interior lighting remains on for 20 seconds after X Press the a button to save the setting.
you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Convenience
X Press the : or 9 button to select the Activating/deactivating the EASY-
Lights submenu. ENTRY/EXIT feature
G WARNING
Light. Delay function. When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
When the Light. Delay function is activa- the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
ted, the vehicle interior is displayed in orange occupants – particularly children – could
in the multifunction display. become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-
ing adjustments, make sure that no one has
Z
any body parts in the sweep of the steering X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel. wheel to select the Settings menu.
If somebody becomes trapped: Convenience submenu.
Rpress one of the memory function position X Press a to confirm.

buttons, or X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjust- Auto. Mirror Folding function.
ment in the opposite direction to that in If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is
switched on, the multifunction display shows
which the steering wheel is moving. the vehicle's exterior mirror in orange.
The adjustment process is stopped. X Press the a button to save the setting.

Convenience submenu.
X Using : or 9, select the Easy Entry/
Exit function.
If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activated,
the vehicle steering wheel is displayed in
orange in the multifunction display.
Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT If you have switched on the Auto. Mirror
feature (Y page 100). Folding function and you fold in the exterior
mirrors by pressing button :, the exterior mir-
Switching the seat belt adjustment on/off rors will not fold out automatically (Y page 101).
X Press the = or ; button on the steering You can then only fold out the exterior mirrors
wheel to select the Sett. menu. using button :.
Convenience submenu. Restoring the factory settings
X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the = or ; button on the steering
Belt Adjustment function. wheel to select the Sett. menu.
When the Belt Adjustment function is acti- X Press the : or 9 button to select the
vated, the seat belt is displayed in orange in Factory Setting submenu.
the multifunction display. X Press a to confirm.
X Press the a button to save the setting. The Reset All Settings? function
appears.
For further information on belt adjustment, see
(Y page 45). X Press the : or 9 button to select No or
Yes.
Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock- X Press a to confirm the selection.
ing feature on/off If you have selected Yes and confirmed, the
This function is only available when the vehicle is multifunction display shows a confirmation
equipped with the electrical fold-in function. message.
When you switch on the Auto. Mirror Fold‐ For safety reasons, the Day Lights function in
ing function, the exterior mirrors are folded in the Lights submenu is only reset if the vehicle
when the vehicle is locked. If you unlock the is stationary.
vehicle and then open the driver's or front-
passenger door, the exterior mirrors fold out
again.
AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) SETUP shows the drive program, ESP® (Elec-
tronic Stability Program) mode and the suspen-
Warm-up sion setting.
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to

select the AMG menu.
X Press 9 repeatedly until SETUP is shown.
or
X Briefly press the AMG button on the center
console (Y page 161).
: Digital speedometer RACETIMER

; Gear indicator
= Upshift indicator Displaying and starting RACETIMER
? Engine oil temperature The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a
A Coolant temperature closed race circuit. Do not use the function on
B Status indicator for ECO start/stop function public roads.
(Y page 126)
Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UP =
indicates that the engine has reached the
overrevving range when in the manual drive
program.
Engine oil temperature: if the engine is at : Lap
normal operating temperature, the multifunc- ; RACETIMER
tion display shows oil temperature ? in
white. You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is
running or if the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
If the multifunction display shows oil temper-
ignition lock.
ature ? in blue, the engine is not yet at nor-
mal operating temperature. Avoid driving at X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to
full engine output during this time. select the AMG menu.
If the conditions for the ECO start/stop func- X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
tion are fulfilled and the vehicle is stationary, RACETIMER appears.
the menu shows status indicator B. X To start: press the a button to start the
RACETIMER.
SETUP
Displaying the intermediate time
: Drive program (C/SS+ or M)

; ESP® mode ON, OFF or SPORT handling X Press the = or ; button to select
Interm. Time.
mode SPORT
= Suspension setting COMFORT, SPORT or
SPORT + The intermediate time is shown for five sec-
onds.
Z
Starting a new lap You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you
have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not
have to be reset.
X Reset the current lap.
X Press a to confirm Reset.

Reset Race Timer? appears in the multi-
function display.
X Press : Yes to select and confirm with
a.
: RACETIMER All laps are deleted.
; Fastest lap time (best lap)
= Lap
Overall statistics
X Press a to confirm New Lap.
i It is possible to store a maximum of sixteen
laps. The 16th lap can only be completed with
Finish Lap.
Stopping the RACETIMER
: RACETIMER overall evaluation

; Total time driven
= Average speed
? Distance covered
A Maximum speed
If you store at least one lap and stop the RACE-
X Press the % button on the steering wheel. TIMER, an overall evaluation will then be availa-
X Press a to confirm Yes. ble.
The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stop the X Press the = or ; button on the steering
vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1 in wheel to select the AMG menu.
the ignition lock. If you turn the key to position 3 X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
and then press a to confirm Start, timing is overall evaluation appears.
continued.
Resetting the current lap Lap statistics
X Stop the RACETIMER.
X Press = or ; to select Reset Lap.
X Press a to reset the lap time to "0".
Deleting all laps
: Lap
; Lap time
= Average lap speed
? Lap length
A Top speed during lap
If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is If you store at least two laps and stop the RACE-
reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are TIMER, the lap evaluation function then
deleted. becomes available.
Display messages 203

X Press 9 repeatedly until the lap evaluation
appears.

Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The
fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :.
X Press the 9 or : button to select a dif-
ferent lap evaluation.
Display messages
Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual
and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this
Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority
display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the
corresponding display messages are also deleted.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
RHOLD function (Y page 157)
RParking (Y page 141)
Hiding display messages

X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel.
The multifunction display hides the display message.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display
messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages
have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up
the display messages:
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.
X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
Z
204 Display messages
Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!÷
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-

gram) are temporarily not available.
Currently Unavaila‐ Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-
ble See Operator's tion.
Manual
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
!÷ ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-
Inoperative See tion.
Operator's Manual
The $ (USA only) or J (Canada only), ÷, å and !
warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.
G WARNING
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
÷ ESP® is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-

Operator's Manual
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instru-
ment cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
G WARNING
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
T! EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP® are malfunc-
tioning.
÷ Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-
Operator's Manual In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNING
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock
if you brake hard, for example.
F(USA You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also
sounds.
only)J(Canada X Release the parking brake.
only)
Please Release Park‐
ing Brake
Z
$(USA There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
In addition, the $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) warning lamp
only)J(Canada
lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

only) G WARNING
Check Brake Fluid
Level The braking effect may be impaired.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 141).
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Brake Pad Wear
G One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning.

mbrace Inoperative
Collision Preven‐ COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily not operational.
tion Assist Plus Possible causes are:
Currently Unavaila‐
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-
ble See Operator's
Manual tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Restart the engine.
Collision Preven‐ COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative due

tion Assist Plus to a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed.
Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant

Inoperative See safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.
Operator's Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFE PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative.
Functions Currently Possible causes are:

Limited See Opera‐ Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow
tor's Manual
tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
RMercedes-AMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated
disappears.
PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake are operational again.
X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: switch ESP® on again (Y page 71).
PRE-SAFE PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is unavailable due to a mal-

Functions Limited function. BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist may also have failed.
See Operator's Man‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ual
Z

Radar Sensors Dirty The radar sensor system is malfunctioning.
See Operator's Man‐ Possible causes are:
ual
RDirt on sensors
RHeavy rain or snow
RWhen driving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure,
e.g. in desert-like areas
At least one driving system or driving safety system is malfunctioning
or is temporarily unavailable:
RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
RPRE-SAFE® Brake
RPRE-SAFE® PLUS
RActive Lane Keeping Assist
RActive Blind Spot Assist
RDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
If the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist will
not perform a course-correcting brake application.
A warning tone also sounds.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving and
drive safety systems will be available again. The display message dis-
appears.
X Clean all sensors (Y page 274).
The display message disappears.
6 The restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also

lights up in the instrument cluster.
SRS Malfunction Ser‐
vice Required G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
Observe the additional information on restraint systems (Y page 41).
6 The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

Front Left Malfunc‐
tion Service G WARNING
RequiredorFront The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
Right Malfunction unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
Service Required There is an increased risk of injury.
6 The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right.
Rear Left Malfunc‐
tion Service G WARNING
RequiredorRear The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
Right Malfunction unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
Service Required There is an increased risk of injury.
6 The left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag is malfunctioning.

Left Side Curtain
Airbag Malfunction G WARNING
Service The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unin-
RequiredorRight tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
Side Curtain Airbag
Malfunction Service There is an increased risk of injury.
Required X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Z

Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are
bag Disabled deactivated during the journey, although:
See Operator's Man‐ Ran adult

ual or
Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret
the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
G WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag does
not deploy in the event of an accident.
X Switch the ignition off.
X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-
neously for approximately six seconds
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up
and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,
the OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front-
passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag
(Y page 49)
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐
tor's Manual display messages must not be shown in the mul-
tifunction display
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system
checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-
function display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-
pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.
Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 49).
Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are
bag Enabled enabled during the journey, although:

See Operator's Man‐ Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's
ual weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat
or

Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on
the seat.
G WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag may
deploy unintentionally.
X Switch the ignition off.
X Open the front-passenger door.
X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-
passenger seat.
X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and inter-
pret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultane-
ously for approximately six seconds
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and
remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on, the
OCS has disabled the front-passenger front air bag and front-
passenger knee bag (Y page 49)
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Man‐
ual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's
Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction
display
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system
checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-
function display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-
pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.
Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 49).
Z
Lights
b
The bulb in question is malfunctioning.

Check Left Low Beam
i LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding
lamp only appears when all the LEDs in the lamp have failed.
b The active light function is faulty.

Active Headlamps
Inoperative
b The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.

Malfunction See
Operator's Manual
b The light sensor is defective.

Auto Lamp Function
Inoperative
b You leave the vehicle and the lights are switched on. A warning tone
also sounds.
Switch Off Lights X Turn the light switch to position Ã.
Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.

Assist Currently Possible causes are:
Unavailable See
Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty
Operator's Manual
Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog
X Clean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is displayed.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.

Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Engine

The coolant level is too low.
Check Coolant Level ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
See Operator's Man‐ cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
ual X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(Y page 268).
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine
coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
? The fan motor is malfunctioning.

X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in moun-
tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
? The coolant is too hot.

Coolant Too Hot
Stop Vehicle Turn G WARNING
Engine Off Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch
fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which
can occur just by opening the hood.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-
ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,
e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and
the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the
engine could be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature gauge.
X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist work-
shop immediately.
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
Z
# The battery is not being charged.


ual
Ra defective alternator
Ra torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics
! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.

# The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level is
too low.
Stop Vehicle See A warning tone also sounds.
Operator's Manual
X Observe the instructions in the # See Operator's Manual
display message.
4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

Check Engine Oil At
Next Refueling ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-
erwise be damaged.
X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 267).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 267).
X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if the
engine oil needs topping up more often than usual.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any quali-
fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-
benz.com.
4 Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.
Check Engine Oil ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-
Level (Add 1 quart) erwise be damaged.
(USA)Check Engine X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 267).
Oil Level (Add 1 X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 267).
Liter)(Canada) X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if the
engine oil needs topping up more often than usual.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any quali-
fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-
benz.com.
4 Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low. There is a risk
of engine damage.

Engine Oil Level X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-
Low Stop Vehicle ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
Turn Engine Off
X Check the engine oil level (Y page 267).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 267).
8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
Fuel Level Low
C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
8 The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
Close Gas Cap
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:
X Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:
Driving systems
À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or

a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also
Attention Assist: sounds.
Take a Break! X If necessary, take a break.
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.
À ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.

Attention Assist
Inoperative
¨ Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.
Vehicle Rising
¨ The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warning
tone also sounds.
Vehicle Rising X Do not pull away.
Please Wait The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.
Z
¨ You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low.
AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short period.
Stop Vehicle Vehi‐

cle Too Low
X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
AIRMATIC is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds.

X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front fender
or the tires could be damaged if the steering movement is too large.
X Listen for scraping sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and
traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level.
Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the vehi-
cle.
¨ The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling charac-

teristics may be affected.
Malfunction X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative.

Currently Unavaila‐ Possible causes are:
ble See Operator's
Manual
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display
message disappears.
Traffic Sign Assist is operational again.
Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.

ë The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding.

Off
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 157).

Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and
Currently Unavaila‐ temporarily inoperative.

ble See Operator's Possible causes are:
ManualorActive Lane
Keeping Assist Cur‐
rently Unavailable Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog
See Operator's Man‐ Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period
ual Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow
disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational
again.
Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.
InoperativeorActive X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Lane Keeping Assist
Inoperative
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Currently Unavaila‐ Possible causes are:
ble See Operator's
Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range
ManualorActive
Blind Spot Assist Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-
Currently Unavaila‐ tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
ble See Operator's other sources of electromagnetic radiation
Manual The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.
disappears.
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.
InoperativeorActive The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.
Blind Spot Assist
Inoperative
Park Assist Canceled The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fas-
tened.
X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the
driver's door closed.
Z

You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while
steering intervention was active.
X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunc-

tion steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.
The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.

X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 165).
Park Assist Inoper‐ You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking maneu-
ative vers.
Active Parking Assist will become available again after approximately
ten minutes (Y page 165).
X Switch off and restart the engine.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:

PARKTRONIC is defective.
Park Assist Finished The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.
The display message disappears automatically.
DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated.
If a warning tone also sounds, DISTRONIC PLUS has deactivated auto-
matically (Y page 149)
DISTRONIC PLUS Now DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarily
Available unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 149).

DISTRONIC PLUS Cur‐ DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative.
rently Unavailable Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative.

ual
tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
disappears.
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again.
DISTRONIC PLUS Inop‐ DISTRONIC PLUS is malfunctioning

erative The following may have also failed:
RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist
RPRE-SAFE® Brake
RSteering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
DISTRONIC PLUS Sus‐ You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no
pended longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
DISTRONIC PLUS An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.

- - - mph X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 149).
Z

DTR+: Steering Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative.
Assist. Currently Possible causes are:
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period
Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow
disappears.
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are operative again.
DTR+: Steering Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are defective.

Assist. Inoperative However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available.
Cruise Control Inop‐ Cruise control is malfunctioning.

erative A warning tone also sounds.
Cruise Control A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.
- - - mph You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for example.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store
the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 148).
Cruise Control Off Cruise control has been deactivated.

If a warning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated auto-
matically (Y page 148).
Tires

Check The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss
Tire Pressure Soon in pressure.
Possible causes:
Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or installed
new wheels and tires.
Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped.
G WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be
greatly impaired.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tire (Y page 278).
X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pres-
sure is correct (Y page 299).
Check Tire Pressure The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message
Then Restart Run and has not been restarted since.
Flat Indicator X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 299).
Run Flat Indicator The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
Correct The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire
Tire Pressure pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 299).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 302).
Z

Check The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The
Tires wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.

G WARNING
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be
greatly impaired.
tire (Y page 278).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 299).
Warning The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel
Tire Malfunction position is shown in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
Driving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:
Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.
Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire.
tire (Y page 278).
Tire Press. Monitor Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, no
Currently Unavaila‐ signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressure
ble monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.
X Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been resolved.
TirePress. Sen‐ There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several
sor(s) Missing wheels. The pressure of the affected tire does not appear in the mul-
tifunction display.
X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified special-
ist workshop.

Tire Pressure Moni‐ The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The
tor Inoperative No tire pressure monitor is deactivated.

Wheel Sensors X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for
a few minutes.
Tire Press. Monitor The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

Vehicle
Shift to 'P' or 'N' You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in posi-
to Start Engine: tion R or D.
X Shift the transmission to position P or N.
To Shift from 'P' You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to posi-
Apply Brake tion D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.
To Deselect P or N, With the engine switched off, you have attempted to shift the trans-
Depress Brake and mission out of position P or N into another transmission position.
Start Engine X Depress the brake pedal.
X Start the engine.
Risk of Rolling Away The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is in
Vehicle Not in 'P' position R, N or D.
G WARNING
The vehicle may roll away.
X Close the driver's door completely.
Only Shift The vehicle is moving.

to 'P' when Vehicle X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
is Stationary attention to road and traffic conditions.
Z

Service Required Do You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
Not Shift Gears A warning tone also sounds.
Visit Dealer If transmission position D is selected:

X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the trans-
mission from position D.
If transmission position R, N or P is selected:
X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Reversing Not Poss. You cannot shift into the transmission position R due to a malfunction.
Service Required The transmission positions P, N or D continue to be available.
Transmission Mal‐ A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission compo-

function Stop nents.
A warning tone also sounds. The gearbox automatically shifts to posi-
tion N.
X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Auxiliary Battery The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged.
Malfunction X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.
X Until then, set the transmission to position P before you switch off
the engine.
X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the parking brake.
N The trunk lid is open.

X Close the trunk lid.
M The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING
The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
X Close the hood.
C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all the doors.
_ The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or right-
hand side. A warning tone also sounds.

Rear Left Backrest X Push the backrest back until it engages.
Not LatchedorRear
Right Backrest Not
Latched
Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver
range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears
in the multifunction display.
Ð The power steering is malfunctioning.

Power Steering Mal‐
function See Opera‐ G WARNING
tor's Manual You will need to use more force to steer.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
specialist workshop.
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below
the minimum.
Check Washer Fluid X Add washer fluid (Y page 269).
SmartKey
Â You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X Use the correct SmartKey.
Key Does Not Belong
to Vehicle
Â The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.

a warning tone sounds
Take Your Key from
X Remove the SmartKey.
Ignition
Â The SmartKey needs to be replaced.

Obtain a New Key
Â The battery of the KEYLESS-GO key is discharged.

X Change the batteries (Y page 79).
Replace Key Battery
Z
226 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Â The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the
driver's door with the engine switched off. a warning tone sounds
Don't Forget Your The multifunction display shows the display message a maximum of
Key 60 seconds and is simply a reminder.
X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when you leave
the vehicle.
Â The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.

Key Not Detected If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle cen-
(red display message) trally or start the engine.
X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.
A strong source of radio waves is causing interference and this is

preventing the KEYLESS-GO key from being recognized when the
engine is running.
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and drive in SmartKey
mode.
Â The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.

X Change the location of the KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle.
Key Not Detected
(white display message) If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Â The KEYLESS-GO key can continuously not be detected.

KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warning
Remove 'Start' But‐ tone also sounds.
ton and Insert Key
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired
position.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

General notes
Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicator
and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator
and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine or
whilst driving.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 227
Safety
Seat belts

Warning/ N Signal type
indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
lamp
ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds.
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their
seat belts.
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).
ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a
warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.
ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the
driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
The warning lamp goes out.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out.
ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning
sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being
driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph
(25 km/h).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster
than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
Z
Safety systems
lamp
$J N $ (USA only) or J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is
lit while the vehicle is moving. A warning tone also sounds.
You are driving with the parking brake applied.
The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.
lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be
affected.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
The braking effect may be impaired.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.

lamp

! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS (anti-lock braking system) is malfunctioning.
If there is an additional warning tone, the EBD (electronic brake force distribution)
is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-
ple.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such
as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.
$J N $ (USA only) or J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp and
÷å the yellow ESP®, ESP® OFF and ABS warning lamps are lit while the engine is
! running.
ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
G WARNING
above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-
ple.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
Z

lamp
÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
ESP® or the traction control system has intervened because there is a risk of
skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.
Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP®.
In rare cases (Y page 70), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 69).
å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP® is deactivated.
G WARNING
If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. Active
Blind Spot Assist. The system does not perform course-correcting brake applica-
tions.
X Reactivate ESP®.
In rare cases (Y page 70), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 69).
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP® cannot be activated:

X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP® checked.
÷å N The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
ESP® is malfunctioning.
G WARNING
above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.

lamp

M N Mercedes-AMG vehicles only:
The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
SPORT handling mode is activated.
G WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions descri-
bed in the "Activating/deactivating ESP" section (Y page 71).
6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The restraint system is malfunctioning.
G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered uninten-
tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
X Have the restraint system checked immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Observe the additional information on restraint systems (Y page 41).
Z
Engine
lamp
; N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
There may be a malfunction, for example:
Rin the engine management
Rin the fuel injection system
Rin the exhaust system
Rin the ignition system
Rin the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency
mode.
i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as

soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal
requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal
regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving.
8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.
The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.
X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.
? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the
coolant temperature gage is at the start of the scale.
The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is malfunctioning.
The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine
damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention
to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

lamp

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
The coolant level is too low.
If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or
the electric engine radiator fan may be defective.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
to road and traffic conditions.
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has
cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 268).
X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡
(120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain,
and stop-and-go traffic.
? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning
tone also sounds.
The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The airflow to the engine
radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.
G WARNING
The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur
just by opening the hood.
to road and traffic conditions.
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has
cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 268).
X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.
Z

lamp
X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain,
and stop-and-go traffic.
Driving systems
lamp
· N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning
tone also sounds.
You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line of
travel at too high a speed.
X Be prepared to brake immediately.
X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take
evasive action.
Observe the additional information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake (Y page 72).
Observe the additional information on the distance warning function of COLLISION
PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 67).
Tires

lamp
h N The yellow combination low tire pressure telltale/TPMS malfunction telltale for
the TPMS (pressure loss or malfunction) is lit.
The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.
G WARNING
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire trac-
tion.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly
impaired.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay
attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire
(Y page 278).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 299).
h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)

flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
G WARNING
The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.
Z
236 Function restrictions
General notes Please always use this feature instead of con-

sulting the map display for directions. Looking
at the icons or map display can distract you from
The multimedia system section in this Opera-
traffic conditions and driving, and increase the
tor's Manual describes the basic principles for
risk of an accident.
operation. More information can be found in the
Digital Operator's Manual. This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip-
ment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.
This equipment has very low levels of RF energy
that is deemed to comply without maximum
G WARNING permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). How-
If you operate information systems and com- ever, it is recommended to install it at a distance
of at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between the
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- radiation source and a person's body (not
Multimedia system
cle while driving, you will be distracted from including limbs such as hands, wrists, feet and
traffic conditions. You could also lose control legs).
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
G WARNING
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this Modifications to electronic components, their
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention software as well as wiring can impair their
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- function and/or the function of other net-
ment when the vehicle is stationary. worked components. In particular, systems
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
You must observe the legal requirements for the result, these may no longer function as inten-
country in which you are currently driving when ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
operating the multimedia system. the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
The multimedia system calculates the route to accident and injury.
the destination without taking the following into Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
account, for example:
tronic components or their software. You
Rtraffic lights should have all work to electrical and elec-
Rstop and yield signs tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
Rparking or stopping restrictions specialist workshop.
Rroad narrowing
Rother road and traffic rules and regulations If you make any changes to the vehicle elec-
The multimedia system may give incorrect nav- tronics, the general operating permit is ren-
igation recommendations if the actual street/ dered invalid.
traffic situation does not correspond with the
digital map's data.
For example: Function restrictions
Ra diverted route
For safety reasons, some functions are restric-
Rthe road layout or the direction of a one-way
ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.
street has been changed You will notice this, for example, because either
For this reason, you must always observe road you will not be able to select certain menu items
and traffic rules and regulations during your or a message will appear to this effect.
journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations
always have priority over multimedia system
driving recommendations.
Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you while driving without diverting your
attention from the road and driving.
Operating system 237
Operating system the media source or set the volume, the sound
is automatically switched on.
Overview i Navigation announcements will be heard
even if the sound is muted.
General notes
! Do not use the space in front of the display Functions
for storage. Objects placed here could dam- The multimedia system has the following func-
age the display or impair its function. Avoid tions:
any direct contact with the display surface.
Pressure on the display surface may result in RRadio mode
impairments to the display, which could be RMedia mode with media search
irreversible. RSound systems
Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your RNavigation system
ability to read the display. COMAND: navigation via the hard drive
Multimedia system
The display has an automatic temperature-con- Audio 20: navigation via SD card
trolled switch-off feature. The brightness is RCommunication functions
automatically reduced if the temperature is too
high. The display may temporarily switch off RSIRIUS Weather (COMAND)
completely. RVehicle functions with system settings
RFavorites functions
Cleaning instructions
Controller
! Do not touch the display. The display has a
very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a The controller in the center console lets you:
risk of scratching. If you have to clean the Rselect menu items on the display
screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent
Renter characters
and a soft, lint-free cloth.
Rselect a destination on the map
The display must be switched off and have
Rsave entries
cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not
apply pressure to the display surface when The controller can be:
cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible dam- Rturned 3
age to the display.
Rslid left or right 1
Rslid forwards or back 4
Switching the multimedia system
Rslid diagonally 2
on/off
Rpressed briefly or pressed and held 7
X Press the q control knob.
Back button
Adjusting the volume
You can use the % button to exit a menu or to
X Turn the q control knob. call up the basic display of the current operating
The volume is adjusted: mode.
X To exit the menu: briefly press the %
Rfor the currently selected media source
button.
Rduring traffic or navigation announcements
The multimedia system changes to the next
Rin hands-free mode during a phone call higher menu level in the current operating
mode.
Switching the sound on or off X To call up the basic display: press the %
button for longer than two seconds.
X Press the 8 button on the control panel. The multimedia system changes to the basic
If the audio output is switched off, the status display of the current operating mode.
line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch
Z
238 Operating system
Favorites Navigation mode

Calling up and exiting favorites Important safety notes
X To call up: press the g button on the con- G WARNING
troller.
If you operate information systems and com-
X Select a favorite, e.g. Vehicle.
The favorites are displayed. munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
X To exit: press the g button again.
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Adding favorites
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
Adding a predefined favorite situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
Multimedia system
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-

ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the

country in which you are currently driving when
operating the navigation system.
General notes
Among other things, correct functioning of the
navigation system depends on GPS reception. In
: Adds a new favorite certain situations, GPS reception may be
; Renames a selected favorite impaired, there may be interference or there
= Moves a selected favorite may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or
? Deletes a selected favorite parking garages.
Audio 20 is equipped with Garmin® MAP PILOT
X Press the g button. (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
X Slide 6 the controller. The Garmin® MAP PILOT operating instructions
The menu bar is shown. are stored on the SD card as a PDF file. The SD
X Select Reassign. card box contains a quick guide.
The categories are displayed. The following descriptions apply to navigation
X Select a category. with COMAND. Further information can be
The favorites are displayed. found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
X Select a favorite.
X Add a favorite at the desired position. Selecting a route type and route options
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten. Multimedia system:
X Select NaviQNavigation.
Adding your own favorite The map shows the vehicle's current position.
X Select VehicleQClimate Control. X Slide 6 the controller.
X Press and hold the g button until the X Select OptionsQRoute Settings.
favorites are displayed. Notes for route types:
X Add a favorite at the desired position.
REco Route
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten. RDynamic Traffic Route
Traffic reports on the route for the route guid-
ance are taken into account (not available in
all countries).
RDynamic TRF. Route After Request the corresponding digits are displayed with an
You can decide whether or not current traffic X.
reports should be included in the route cal- X Enter the street and house number.
culation (not available in all countries). The address is in the menu.
RCalculate Alternative Routes Further options for destination entry:
Different routes are being calculated. In order Rsearch for a keyword
to do so, instead of Start, select the menu
item Continue. The keyword search finds destinations using
fragments of words.
X To avoid/use route options: select Avoid
Rselect the last destination
Options.
Rselect a contact
X Select a route option.
Rselect a POI
Notes for route options:
You can search for a POI by location, name or
RUse Toll Roads telephone number.
The route calculation includes roads which
Multimedia system
Rselect destination on the map
require you to pay a usage fee (toll).
Renter intermediate destination
RNumber of Occupants in the Vehicle:
(only available in the USA) You can map the route to the destination
yourself with up to four intermediate destina-
Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access tions.
conditions for carpool lanes.
Rselect destinations from Mercedes-Benz
Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool Apps
lanes option is activated.
Rselect geo-coordinates
Entering an address
Calculating the route
Multimedia system:
Prerequisite: the address has been entered and
X Select NaviQNavigation. is in the menu.
The map shows the vehicle's current position. X Select Start or Continue.
X Slide 6 the controller. The route is calculated with the selected route
X Select DestinationQAddress Entry. type and the selected route options.
Enter an address, e.g. as follows: If route guidance has already been activated,
Rcity or ZIP code, street, house number
a prompt will appear asking whether you wish
to end the current route guidance.
Rstate/province, city or ZIP code
X Select Cancel Active Route Guidance or
Rcity or ZIP code, center
Set as Intermediate Destination.
Rstreet, city or ZIP code, intersection Cancel Active Route Guidance cancels
X Select City. the current route guidance and starts route
The city in which the vehicle is currently loca- calculation to the new destination.
ted (current vehicle position) is at the top. Set as Intermediate Destination adds
Below this, you will see locations for which the new destination in addition to the existing
route guidance has already been carried out. destination and opens the intermediate des-
X Enter the city. tinations list.
The G symbol: the location is contained on
the digital map multiple times.
X To switch to the list: slide the 5 control- Connecting a mobile phone
ler.
X Select the location. Prerequisites
If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there are
different ZIP codes available for the location, For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, you
require a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone. The
mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile
1.0 or above.
Z
240 Operating system
Multimedia system: Only one mobile phone can be connected to the

X Select VehicleQSystem Set‐ multimedia system at any one time.
tingsQActivate Bluetooth. Searching for a mobile phone
X Activate Bluetooth® O. Multimedia system:
Mobile phone: X Select Tel/®QConnect
DeviceQSearch for PhonesQStart
X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Blue- Search.
tooth® visibility for other devices (see the The available mobile phones are displayed.
manufacturer's operating instructions). Symbols in the device list
The Bluetooth® device names for all of one man-
ufacturer's products might be identical. To Sym- Explanation
make it possible to clearly identify your mobile bol
phone, change the device name (see the man-
ufacturer's operating instructions). Ï New mobile phone found, not yet
authorized.
Multimedia system
If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone

Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message Ñ Mobile phone is authorized, but is
Access Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the follow- not connected
ing information will be transmitted after you # Mobile phone is authorized and
connect: connected
RPhone book
RCall lists Connecting a mobile phone
RText messages and e-mail
Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing:
i Further information on suitable mobile X Select mobile phone.
phones can be found at: http:// A code is displayed in the multimedia system
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect and on the mobile phone.
i In the USA, you can get in touch with the X If codes match: select Yes on the multimedia
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center system.
on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend-
In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus- ing on the mobile phone used, confirm the
tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100. connection to the multimedia system and for
the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The
Searching for and authorizing (connect- prompt to confirm may take up to two
minutes to be displayed (see the manufactur-
ing) a mobile phone er's operating instructions).
Before using your mobile phone with the multi- X If the codes are different: select No on the
media system for the first time, you will need to multimedia system.
search for the phone and then authorize (con- The process is canceled.
nect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, author- Repeat authorization.
ization either takes place by means of Secure
Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The Authorization by entering a passkey (passcode):
multimedia system automatically makes the X Select the Bluetooth® name of the mobile
procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone phone.
available. The mobile phone is always connec- The input menu for the passkey is displayed.
ted automatically after authorization. Further X Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi-
information on using a mobile phone with the nation as a passkey.
multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's
X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system.
Manual).
X Press ¬ to confirm.
If the multimedia system does not detect your
mobile phone, this may be due to particular X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile
security settings on your mobile phone (see the phone. Depending on the mobile phone used,
manufacturer's operating instructions). confirm the connection to the multimedia sys-
tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® Inserting/removing an SD card
profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up
to two minutes to be displayed (see the man- Important safety notes
ufacturer's operating instructions).
G WARNING
SD cards are small parts. They can be swal-
Switching between mobile phones
lowed and cause choking. This poses an
If you have authorized more than one mobile increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
phone, you can switch between the individual Keep the SD card out of the reach of children.
phones.
If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical atten-
Multimedia system: tion immediately.
X Select Connect Device.
X Select a mobile phone from the device list. ! If you are no longer using the SD card, you
should remove it and store it outside the vehi-
Multimedia system
cle. High temperatures can damage the card.
Media mode Inserting an SD card
General notes The SD card slot is on the control panel.
X Insert the SD card into the SD card slot until
If you wish to play external media sources, the the SD card engages. The side with the con-
default display must already be turned on. Fur- tacts must face downwards.
ther information on media mode (see the Digital
Operator's Manual). Removing an SD card
The following external media sources can be X Press the SD card.
used: The SD card is ejected.
RApple® devices (e.g. iPhone®) X Remove the SD card.
RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player)
(Y page 241) Connecting USB devices
RCD
RDVD (COMAND)
RSD cards
Rvia devices connected by Bluetooth®
i Information on single CD/DVD drive or DVD

changer (see the Digital Operator's Manual).
Using the device list

Multimedia system:
X Select MediaQDevices.
The available media sources will be shown. There are two USB ports in the stowage space
The # dot indicates the current setting. under the armrest.
X Select the media source. X Connect the USB device to the USB port.
Playable files are played. X Select the media source (Y page 241).
Z
242 Stowage areas
Stowage areas tification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's

door.
Loading guidelines RThe trunk is the preferred place to carry
objects.
G WARNING RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or sible and as low down in the trunk as possible.
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip RThe load must not protrude above the upper
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle edge of the seat backrests.
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- RAlways place the load against the rear or front
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- seat backrests. Make sure that the seat
den change in direction. backrests are securely locked into place.
RAlways place the load behind unoccupied
Always store objects so that they cannot be seats if possible.
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or RUse the cargo tie-down rings and the parcel
loads against slipping or tipping before the nets to transport loads and luggage.
journey.
Stowage and features
RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening mate-

rials appropriate for the weight and size of the
G WARNING load.
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the protection.
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
risk of poisoning.
Stowage spaces
Always switch off the engine before opening Important safety notes
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open. G WARNING
If objects in the passenger compartment are
G WARNING stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In
become very hot. If you come into contact addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn and mobile phone brackets cannot always
yourself. There is a risk of injury. retain all objects they contain. There is a risk
of injury, particularly in the event of sudden
Always be particularly careful around the
braking or a sudden change in direction.
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
these components to cool down before touch- RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be
ing them. thrown around in such situations.

RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-
The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or
are dependent on the distribution of the load stowage nets.
within the vehicle. For this reason, you should
observe the following notes when transporting a RClose the lockable stowage spaces before
load: starting a journey.
RNever exceed the maximum permissible RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in
rating for the vehicle (including occupants). the trunk.
The values are specified on the vehicle iden-
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 242).
Stowage areas 243
Stowage compartments in the front Eyeglasses compartment
Glove box
There is a compartment to stow eyeglasses in

the headliner on the driver's side.
To open: pull handle : and open glove box

X X To open: pull down eyeglasses compart-
flap ;. ment : by the handle.
X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards until
it engages. Stowage compartments in the center con-
sole
The glove box can only be locked and unlocked

using the mechanical key. Mercedes-AMG vehicles
X To lock: insert the mechanical key into the X Briefly press trim :.
lock and turn it 90° clockwise to position 2. i The stowage tray can be removed.
X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into the
lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwise to
position 1.
All other models
Z
244 Stowage areas
X To open: slide the cover forwards by han-

dle : in the direction of the arrow until it
engages.
X To close: briefly press the front of handle :.
Stowage compartment under the armrest
X To open: pull handle : up and fold cover ;

forwards.
i On vehicles with a fire extinguisher, the fire
extinguisher is located in the stowage com-

partment under the driver's seat.
X To open: pull handle : up. Stowage space in the rear

The armrest folds out.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol- Stowage compartments in the rear center
lowing may be in the stowage space: console
Ran SD card slot
Ra multimedia connector unit with 2 USB ports,
e.g. for iPod®, iPhone® or MP3 player (see the
separate operating instructions)
Ra mobile phone bracket
Stowage compartment under the front

seats
G WARNING
If you exceed the maximum load for the stow-
age compartment, the cover may not be able
to restrain the items. Items may be thrown out X To open: slide cover : or ; in the direction
of the stowage compartment and hit vehicle of the arrow.
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-
i There is a 12 V socket in the front stowage
compartment.
den change in direction.
Never exceed the maximum permissible load Stowage compartment in the rear seat
for the stowage compartment. Stow and armrest
secure heavy objects in the trunk. ! Do not sit on or support your body weight on
the rear seat armrest when it is folded down,
The maximum permissible load of the stowage as you could otherwise damage it.
compartment is 3.3 lbs (1.5 kg).
! Close the cover of the stowage compart-
ment before folding the rear seat armrest
back into the seat backrest.
Stowage areas 245
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests

can be folded down separately to increase the
trunk capacity.
Folding the seat backrest forward

X Vehicles without memory function: if neces-
sary, move the driver's or front-passenger
seat forwards.
X Vehicles with memory function: when one or
both parts of the rear seat backrest are folded
forwards, the respective front seat moves for-
X To open: fold down seat armrest ;. wards slightly, when necessary, in order to
avoid contact.
X Fold cover : of the armrest upwards.
When the engine is running, the driver's seat
does not move forward.

Stowage nets
Stowage nets are located in the front-passenger
footwell and on the left-hand side of the trunk.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 242)
and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces
(Y page 242).
Rear bench seat through-loading fea-

ture
Important safety notes X Open the trunk.
X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat backrest
G WARNING release handle :.
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat The corresponding rear seat backrest is
backrest are not engaged they could fold for- released.
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be
pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench
seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The
seat belt can no longer offer the intended
level of protection and could even cause
injuries.
RObjects or loads in the trunk cannot be
restrained by the seat backrest.
X Fold rear seat backrest ; forwards.
Before every trip, make sure that the seat X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat back if necessary.
are engaged.
Z
246 Stowage areas
Folding the seat backrest back

! Make sure that the seat belt does not
become trapped when folding the rear seat
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-
aged.
Cargo tie-down rings :
EASY-PACK trunk box


X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat for-
wards if necessary. G WARNING
X Fold rear seat backrest : back until it When the load surface moves up, your hands
engages. may become trapped on the frame of the
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and EASY-PACK trunk box. There is a risk of injury.
locked, this will be shown in the multifunction
display in the instrument cluster. A warning When the load surface moves up, make sure
tone also sounds. that your hands are not within the sweep of
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat the load surface. If someone becomes trap-
back if necessary. ped, carefully push the center of the load sur-
face downward.
i You should always engage the rear seat
backrests if you do not need the through- ! When the EASY-PACK trunk box is exten-
loading feature. This will prevent unauthor- ded, objects may neither be placed on the
ized access to the trunk from the vehicle inte- frame of the box nor pushed down onto the
rior. frame from above. The box may otherwise be
damaged.
Securing loads ! Sharp-edged, pointed or fragile objects can

damage the EASY-PACK trunk box and may be
Cargo tie-down rings thrown out. There is a risk of injury.
Do not transport sharp-edged, pointed or
Observe the following notes on securing loads: fragile objects in the EASY-PACK trunk box.
RObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 242). Always store and secure these or similar
RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down objects in the trunk outside the EASY-PACK
rings. trunk box.
RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down ! If you exceed the maximum permitted load
rings evenly. of the EASY-PACK trunk box, objects may be
RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a thrown out of the EASY-PACK trunk box and
load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip strike vehicle occupants. There is a risk of
protection for light loads. injury, particularly in the event of sudden
RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges or braking or a sudden change in direction.
corners. Always observe the maximum permitted load
RPad sharp edges for protection. of the EASY-PACK trunk box. Always store
Stowage areas 247
and secure heavy objects in the trunk outside

the EASY-PACK trunk box.
The maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK
trunk box is 22 lbs (10 kg). With a load of above
approximately 11 lbs (5 kg), the bottom of the
box moves downward until it rests on the mat of
the trunk floor. Thus, overloading of the box is
avoided.
Adjusting the height to any position
X Raise box : and press hooks A into anchor-

age ? as far as they will go.
X Turn left-hand rotating catch B clockwise
and right-hand rotating catch B counter-

clockwise by 90°.
X To remove: turn left-hand rotating catch B
counter-clockwise and right-hand rotating
catch B clockwise by 90°.
X Move box : downwards and pull it out from
anchorages ?.
X Pull the box out by the handle : in the direc- i Store the EASY-PACK trunk box on a flat
tion of the arrow as far as it will go. surface after removal, e.g. on a suitable shelf.
X Lowering the load surface: push the center
of load surface ; down by hand in the direc-
tion of the arrow until load surface ; has Stowage well under the trunk floor
reached the desired position and the box is
the desired size. ! Unhook the handle before again before clos-
X To raise the load surface: press switch =. ing the trunk lid and clip it in securely to pre-
Load surface ; of the box moves up auto- vent the handle flap from protruding. Other-
matically. wise, you could damage the handle.
X To stow the box: push the box in by the han-
dle : as far as it will go.
Removing and installing
The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are

located in the stowage compartment.
X To open: pull handle : up.
X To install: insert retainer ; of box : into

slots =
Z
248 Features
fully and open the trunk lid fully when the roof
carrier is installed.
! To avoid damaging or scratching the covers,
do not use metallic or hard objects to open
them.
You will find information on the maximum roof
load in the "Technical data" section
(Y page 328).
An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load
may become detached from the vehicle. You
must therefore ensure that you observe the roof
X Hook handle : into rain trough ;. carrier manufacturer's installation instructions.
Attaching the roof carrier

X Hook handle : into rain trough ;.
X Open covers : carefully in the direction of

the arrow.
Roof carrier
X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage
Important safety notes points under covers :.
X Observe the manufacturer's installation
G WARNING instructions.
When you load the roof, the center of gravity
of the vehicle rises and the driving character-
istics change. If you exceed the maximum roof Features
load, the driving characteristics, as well as
Cup holder
steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident. Important safety notes
Never exceed the maximum roof load and
adjust your driving style. G WARNING
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
use roof carriers that have been tested and thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces
helps to prevent damage to the vehicle.
and mobile phone brackets cannot always
Position the load on the roof carrier in such a
retain all objects they contain. There is a risk
way that the vehicle will not sustain damage
even when it is in motion. of injury, particularly in the event of sudden
Ensure that, depending on the vehicle's braking or a sudden change in direction.
equipment, you can raise the sliding sunroof
Features 249
RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be

thrown around in such situations.
trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or
stowage nets.
RClose the lockable stowage spaces before
starting a journey.
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in
the trunk.
All other models
! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cup : Cup holder
holder in the center console to continuous,
strong and direct sunlight. The passenger You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat for
cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.

compartment in the area of the center con-
sole can otherwise be damaged by the con-
centrated and reflected sunlight. Cup holder in the rear-compartment
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 242). center console
Cup holder in the front center console
X To open: slide cover : forwards.

X To remove the insert: slide catch ; inwards
Mercedes-AMG vehicles in the direction of the arrow.
: Cup holder X Remove cup holder insert = upwards.
; Cover X To re-install the insert: place the insert in
the stowage space.
You can remove the rubber mat of the cup
holder in the direction of the arrow to clean it. X Slide catch ; outwards in the direction of the
Clean with clear, lukewarm water only. arrow until it engages.
X To open: slide cover ; to its foremost posi- You can remove the insert and the rubber mat of
tion. the cup holder to clean them. Clean them with
clean, lukewarm water only.
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest

! Do not sit on or support your body weight on
the rear seat armrest when it is folded down,
as you could otherwise damage it.
Z
250 Features
! Close the cup holder before folding the rear ! Make sure that any bottles weighing more
seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder than 1.1 lb(0.5 kg) that are stored in the bottle
could be damaged. holder, rest on the vehicle floor. The bottle
holder could otherwise be damaged.
X Fold down the rear seat armrest.

X To open: raise the rear seat armrest cover. X Press the outer edge of button : and slide in
X Press release catch :.
the direction of the arrow until the bottle fits
Cup holder ; folds out forwards. into the opening.
X Insert the bottle into the bottle holder.
X Swing the rear seat armrest cover back down,
if necessary. The bottle holder is suitable for bottles with a
X To close: raise the rear seat armrest cover. capacity of 25 fl. oz. (0.7 l) to 54 fl. oz. (1.5 l).
Swing cup holder ; back until it engages. The bottle holder does not secure the bottles; it
merely prevents them from tipping over.
Bottle holder
Sun visors
G WARNING
Overview
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be G WARNING
thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded
addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be
and mobile phone brackets cannot always blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an
retain all objects they contain. There is a risk accident.
of injury, particularly in the event of sudden
Always keep the mirror cover folded down
braking or a sudden change in direction.
while driving.
RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be
thrown around in such situations.
trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or
stowage nets.
RClose the lockable stowage spaces before
starting a journey.
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in
the trunk.

Features 251
X Swing sun visor : to the side.

X Slide sun visor : horizontally as required.
Rear window roller sunblind

G WARNING
Parts of the body could be trapped in the
sweep of the roller sunblind when the roller
: Mirror light sunblind is extended or retracted. There is a
; Bracket risk of injury.
= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket When extending or retracting make sure that
? Vanity mirror no parts of the body are in the sweep of the

A Mirror cover roller sunblind. Briefly press the button again
if someone becomes trapped. The opening or
Vanity mirror in the sun visor closing process is briefly stopped. The roller
sunblind then returns to its initial position.
! Make sure that the roller sunblind can move

freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind or other
objects could be damaged.
Retracting or extending from the

driver’s seat
Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is

clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A has
been folded up.
Glare from the side

X To extend or retract: briefly press button :.
The roller sunblind fully extends or fully
retracts.
X To stop: briefly press button : again.
The roller sunblind stops briefly and moves
back into the out-of-use position.
X Fold down sun visor :.

X Pull sun visor : out of retainer ;.
Z
252 Features
Ashtray X To re-install the insert: press insert = into

the holder until it engages.
Front ashtray X To close: briefly press cover : at the front.
The cover moves back.
! The stowage space under the ashtray is not
heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in You can remove the ashtray insert and use the
the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is resulting compartment for stowage.
properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage
space could be damaged. Rear compartment ashtray
Mercedes-AMG vehicles X To open: slide cover ; forwards.

X To open: briefly press the trim on cover :. X To remove the insert: pull insert : up and
The stowage compartment opens. out.
X To remove the insert: slide insert ; for- X To install the insert: install insert : into the
wards in the direction of the arrow. holder from above and press down into the
X Remove insert ;. holder until it engages.
X To re-install the insert: place the insert into
the holder and press it in the opposite direc-
tion of the arrow until it engages. Cigarette lighter
X To close: fold down cover :.
G WARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
lighter.
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:
Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls
Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
There is a risk of fire and injury.
All other models
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
X To open: slide cover : forwards until it
Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is
engages.
out of reach of children. Never leave children
X To remove the insert: hold insert = by the
ribbing at the sides and lift it up ; and out. unsupervised in the vehicle.
Features 253
Your attention must always be focused on the 12 V sockets

traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter
when road and traffic conditions permit. General notes
Cigarette lighter in the front compart- X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
lock (Y page 123).
ment
The sockets can be used for accessories with a
maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories
include such items as chargers for mobile
phones.
If you use the sockets for long periods when the
engine is switched off, the battery may dis-
charge.
An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-
board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-
board voltage is too low, the power to the sock-

ets is automatically cut. This ensures that there
is sufficient power to start the engine.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles Socket in the front center console

lock (Y page 123).
X To open: briefly press the trim on cover :.
The stowage compartment opens.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically
when the heating element is red-hot.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
X To open: briefly press the trim on cover :.
The stowage compartment opens.
X Lift up the cover of socket ;.
X To close: fold down cover :.
All other models

lock (Y page 123).
X To open: slide cover : forwards until it
engages.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically
when the heating element is red-hot.
X To close: briefly press cover : at the front.
The cover moves back.
All other models
Z
254 Features
X To open: slide cover : forwards until it The system is available if:

engages. Rit has been activated and is operational
X Lift up the cover of socket ;. Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is
X To close: briefly press cover : at the front. available for transmitting data to the Cus-
The cover moves back. tomer Center
Ra service subscription is available
Socket in the rear compartment center Determining the location of the vehicle on a map
console is only possible if:
RGPS reception is available.
Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to the
Customer Assistance Center.
The mbrace system

To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as
follows:
X Press the W or X button on the multi-
function steering wheel.
or
X Use the multimedia system volume control.
X Slide cover ; forwards. The system offers various services, e.g.:
X Lift up the cover of socket :.
RAutomatic and manual emergency call
RRoadside Assistance call
RMB Info call
mbrace
You can find information and a description of all
General notes available features under "Owners Online" at
http://www.mbusa.com.
The mbrace system is only available in the USA.
You must have a license agreement to activate System self-test
the mbrace service. Make sure that your system
is activated and operational. To log in, press the After you have switched on the ignition, the sys-
ï MB Info call button. If any of the steps tem carries out a self-diagnosis.
mentioned are not carried out, the system may A malfunction in the system has been detected
not be activated. if one of the following occurs:
If you have questions about the activation, con- RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does not
tact one of the following telephone hotlines: come on during the system self-test.
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Assistance button does not light up during
1-866-990-9007 self-diagnosis of the system.
Shortly after successfully registering with the RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call
mbrace service, a user ID and password will be button does not light up during self-diagnosis
sent to you by mail. You can use this password of the system.
to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners
Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Features 255
RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the fol- gered. You cannot end an automatically trig-
lowing buttons continues to light up red after gered emergency call yourself.
the system self-diagnosis: An emergency call can also be initiated man-
- SOS button ually.
- F Roadside Assistance call button As soon as the emergency call has been initi-
- ï MB Info call button ated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button
RAfter the system self-diagnosis, the Inoper‐ flashes. The Connecting… message appears in
ative or Service not activated message the multifunction display.
appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, Once the connection has been made, the Con‐
the system may not operate as expected. In the nected message appears in the multifunction
event of an emergency, help will have to be display.
summoned by other means. All important information on the emergency is
Have the system checked at the nearest transmitted, for example:
Mercedes-Benz Service Center or contact the Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as determined
following service hotlines:

by the GPS system)
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at Rvehicle identification number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Rinformation on the severity of the accident
1-866-990-9007
Shortly after the emergency call has been initi-
ated, a voice connection is automatically estab-
Emergency call lished between the Customer Assistance Center
and the vehicle occupants.
Important safety notes RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the
G WARNING Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
attempts to get more information on the
It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,
emergency.
even if you have pressed the SOS button in an
RIf there is no response from the vehicle occu-
emergency if: pants, an ambulance is immediately sent to
Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi- the vehicle.
cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident If no voice connection can be established to the
Rthe
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
vehicle is on a dangerous section of
the system has been unable to initiate an emer-
road gency call.
Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be This can occur, for example, if the relevant
seen by other road users, particularly when mobile phone network is not available. The indi-
dark or in poor visibility conditions cator lamp in the SOS button flashes continu-
ously.
The Call could not be connected message
Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi- appears in the multifunction display and must
lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so. be confirmed.
Move to a safe location along with other vehi- In this case, summon assistance by other
cle occupants. In such situations, secure the means.
vehicle in accordance with national regula-
tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.
General notes
Observe the notes on system activation
(Y page 254).
An emergency call is dialed automatically if an
air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is trig-
Z
256 Features
Making an emergency call multifunction display. The audio output is

muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐
nected message appears in the multifunction
display.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
Rcurrent location of the vehicle
Rvehicle identification number
The multimedia system display indicates that a
call is active. During the call, you can change to
X To initiate an emergency call manually: the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-
press cover : briefly to open. ton on the multimedia system, for example.
X Press and hold the SOS button for at least one Voice output is not available in this case.
second ;.
A voice connection is established between the
The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
until the emergency call is concluded.
and the vehicle occupants.
X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-
From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the
Benz Customer Assistance Center.
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
X After the emergency call, close cover :. can ascertain the nature of the problem
If the mobile phone network is unavailable, (Y page 259).
mbrace will not be able to make the emergency The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after ter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz tech-
pressing SOS button ;, you do not know if nician or makes arrangements for your vehicle
mbrace has successfully made the emergency to be transported to the nearest Mercedes-Benz
call. In this case, always summon assistance by Service Center.
other means. You may be charged for services such as repair
work and/or towing.
Roadside Assistance button You can find more information in the separate
mbrace manual.
The system has not been able to initiate a Road-
side Assistance call, if:
Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assistance
call button F is flashing continuously.
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center was estab-
lished.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-
work is not available, for example.
The Call Failed message appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
X To call: press Roadside Assistance but- X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
ton :. multifunction steering wheel.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Cus-
tomer Assistance Center. or
X Press the corresponding multimedia system
The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance
button : flashes while the call is active. The button for ending a phone call.
Connecting Call message appears in the
Features 257
MB Info call button The system has not been able to initiate an MB
Info call, if:
Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call button ï
is flashing continuously.
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center was estab-
lished.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-
work is not available, for example.
The Call Failed message appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
X To call MB Info: press MB Info call button :. or
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Cus- X Press the corresponding multimedia system

tomer Assistance Center. button for ending a phone call.
The indicator lamp in MB Info call button :
flashes while the connection is being made.
The Connecting Call message appears in Call priority
the multifunction display. The audio output is When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
muted. Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency call
If a connection can be made, the Call con‐ can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency
nected message appears in the multifunction call will take priority and override all other active
display. calls.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception The indicator lamp of the respective button
are available, the system transfers data to the flashes until the call is ended.
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, An emergency call can only be terminated by the
for example: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
Rcurrent location of the vehicle All other calls can be ended by pressing:
Rvehicle identification number Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steering
The multimedia system display indicates that a wheel
call is active. During the call, you can change to Rthe corresponding button in the multimedia
the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but- system to end the voice call
ton on COMAND, for example. When a call is initiated, the audio system is
Voice output is not available in this case. muted.
A voice connection is established between the The mobile phone is no longer connected to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center multimedia system.
and the vehicle occupants. However, if you want to use your mobile phone,
You receive information about operating your do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in
vehicle, about the nearest Mercedes-Benz Ser- a safe location.
vice Center and about other products and serv-
ices from Mercedes-Benz.
Downloading destinations
You can find further information on the mbrace
system under "Owners Online" at http:// Downloading destinations
www.mbusa.com.
Downloading destinations gives you access to a
database with over 15 million points of interest
(POIs). These can be downloaded on the navi-
gation system in your vehicle. If you know the
destination, the address can be downloaded.
Alternatively, you can obtain the location of
Z
258 Features
Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations Specifying and sending the destination

in the vicinity. address
Furthermore, you can download routes with up X Go to the website http://maps.google.com
to four way points. and enter a destination address into the entry
You are prompted to confirm route guidance to field.
the address entered. X To send the destination address to the e-
X SelectYes by turning 3 or sliding 1 mail address of your mbrace account:
the controller and confirm with 7. click on the corresponding button on the web-
The system calculates the route and subse- site.
quently starts the route guidance with the Example:
address entered. If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then
If you select No the address can be stored in 'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address will
the address book. be sent to your vehicle.
The destination download function is available X When the "Send" dialog window appears:
if: Enter the e-mail address you specified when
Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation sys-

setting up your mbrace account into the cor-
responding field.
tem.
X Click "Send".
Rthe relevant mobile phone network is availa-
ble and data transfer is possible. Information on specific commands such as
"Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the
Route Assistance website.
This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package
and cannot be purchased separately. Calling up a transmitted destination
You can use the route assistance function even address
if the vehicle is not equipped with a navigation X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
system. lock (Y page 123).
Within the framework of this service, you receive The transmitted destination address is loaded
a professional and reliable form of navigation into the vehicle's navigation system.
support without having to leave your vehicle. A display message appears, asking whether
The customer service representative finds a navigation should be started.
suitable route depending on your vehicle's cur- X SelectYes by turning 3 or sliding 1
rent position and the desired destination. You the controller and confirm with 7.
will then be guided live through the current route The system calculates the route and subse-
section. quently starts the route guidance with the
address entered.
Search & Send If you select No the address can be stored in
the address book.
General notes If you have sent more than one destination
To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be address, each individual destination must be
equipped with mbrace and a navigation system. confirmed separately.
Additionally, an mbrace service subscription Destination addresses are loaded in the same
must be completed. order as the order in which they were sent.
"Search & Send" is a destination entry service. A If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles with
destination address which is found on Google mbrace and activated mbrace accounts:
Maps® can be transferred via mbrace directly to If multiple vehicles are registered under the
your vehicle's navigation system. same e-mail address, the destination will be
sent to all the vehicles.
Features 259
Vehicle remote opening Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center

at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
You can use the vehicle remote opening if you or 1-866-990-9007
have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a You will be asked for your password.
replacement SmartKey is not available.
The next time you are inside the vehicle and you
The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes- switch on the ignition, the Doors Locked
Benz Customer Assistance Center. Remotely message appears in the multifunction
The vehicle can be immediately opened display.
remotely within four days of the ignition being Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:
turned off. After this time, the remote unlocking
may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-
30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened tion
remotely. Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®,
The vehicle remote unlocking feature is availa- Android™)
ble if the relevant mobile phone network is avail- To do this, you will need your identification num-
able and a data connection is possible. ber and password.

X Contact the following service hotlines:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center Stolen vehicle recovery service
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
or 1-866-990-9007 If your vehicle has been stolen:
You will be asked for your password. X Notify the police.
X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon The police will issue a numbered incident
with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis- report.
tance Center. X This number will be forwarded to the
Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
together with your PIN.
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec- The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
tion Center then tries to locate the system. The
Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®, Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
Android™) contacts you and the local law enforcement
To do this, you will need your identification num- agency if the vehicle is located.
ber and password. However, only the law enforcement agency is
informed of the location of the vehicle.
Vehicle remote closing If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for
longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz
The vehicle remote-closing feature can be used Customer Assistance Center is automatically
when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and notified.
you are no longer nearby.
The vehicle can then be locked by the Mercedes- Vehicle Health Check
Benz Customer Assistance Center.
The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer
within four days of the ignition being turned off. Assistance Center can provide improved sup-
After this time, remote closing may be delayed port for problems with your vehicle. During an
by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the
can no longer be valet locked remotely. Customer Assistance Center.
The vehicle remote closing feature is available if The customer service representative can use
the relevant mobile phone network is available the received data to decide what kind of assis-
and a data connection is possible. tance is required. You are then, for example,
X Contact the following service hotlines: guided to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service
Center or a recovery vehicle is called.
If vehicle data needs to be transferred during an
MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is
initiated by the Customer Assistance Center.
Z
260 Features
You will see the Breakdown Assistance Con‐ Information on Roadside Assistance
nected message in the display. If the remote (Y page 27).
malfunction diagnosis can be started, the
Request for Vehicle Diagnostics Downloading routes
Received Start vehicle diagnostics?
message appears in the display. Downloading routes allows you to transfer and
X Press the Yes button to confirm the message. save predefined routes in the navigation sys-
tem.
X When the Vehicle Diagnostics Please
Start Ignition message appears: turn the A route can be prepared and sent by either a
SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock customer service representative or under "Own-
(Y page 123). ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
X If the Please follow the instructions Each route can include up to four way points.
received by phone and move your vehi‐ Once a route has been received by the naviga-
cle to a safe position. message tion system, you will see the Do you want to
appears: please follow the instructions start route guidance? Destination
received by phone and move your vehicle to a Received destination has been saved
safe position. in "Previous destinations". message on

The message in the display disappears. the multimedia system display.
The vehicle operating state check begins. You The route is saved.
will see the Vehicle Diagnostics Active X To start route guidance: select Yes.
message. An overview of the route is shown in the dis-
If you select Cancel, the remote malfunction play.
diagnosis is canceled completely. If you select No, the saved route can be called
When the check is complete, the Sending up later in the navigation menu.
vehicle diagnostics data. (Voice con‐ X Select Start.
nection may be interrupted during Route guidance starts.
data transfer) message appears. The vehicle Downloaded and saved routes can be called up
data can now be sent. again.
X Press the OK button to confirm the message.
The voice connection with the Customer Speed alert
Assistance Center is terminated.
The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐ You can define the upper speed limit, which
ring Data... message appears. must not be exceeded by the vehicle.
The vehicle data is sent to the Customer If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle,
Assistance Center. a message will be sent to the Customer Assis-
tance Center. The Customer Assistance Center
Depending on what the customer service rep- then forwards this information to you.
resentative agreed with you, the voice connec-
tion is re-established after the transfer is com- You can select the way in which you receive this
plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a information beforehand. Possible options
later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or include text message, e-mail or an automated
phone. call.
Another function of the Vehicle Health Check is The data you receive contains the following
the transfer of service data to the Customer information:
Assistance Center. If a service is due, the display Rthe location where the speed limit was excee-
shows a message to this effect together with ded
information about any special offers at your Rthe time at which the speed limit was excee-
workshop. ded
This information can also be called up under Rthe selected speed limit which was exceeded
"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Information on the data stored in the vehicle
(Y page 30).
Features 261
Geo fencing door opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center.
Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the Alternatively, you can call the following tele-
vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be phone assistance services:
informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries
of the selected areas. You can select the way in RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
which you receive this information beforehand. Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
Possible options include text message, e-mail or RCanada: Customer Service at
an automated call. 1-800-387-0100
The area can be determined as either a circle or RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of
a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You charge)
can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Dif-
ferent settings are possible for each area. More information on HomeLink® and/or com-
patible products is also available online at
These settings can be called up under "Owners http://www.homelink.com.
Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Notes on the declaration of conformity
Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call and (Y page 28).

inform the customer service representative that
you wish to activate geo fencing. USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4
Currently inactive areas can be activated by text Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4
message.
Triggering the vehicle alarm
G WARNING
With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's When you operate or program the garage door
panic alarm via text message. An alarm sounds with the integrated garage door opener, per-
and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on
the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten sec- sons in the range of movement of the garage
onds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off. door can become trapped or struck by the
garage door. There is a risk of injury.
When using the integrated garage door
Garage door opener opener, always make sure that nobody is
within the range of movement of the garage
General notes door.
The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated
in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up G WARNING
to three different door and gate systems. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
Use the integrated garage door opener only on gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
garage doors that: these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
Rhave safety stop and reverse features and is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
Once programed, the integrated garage door out sufficient ventilation.
opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the
function of the garage door system's remote
control. Please also read the operating instruc- Programming
tions for the garage door system.
When programming a garage door opener, park Programming buttons
the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
engine while programming. (Y page 261).
Certain garage door drives are incompatible
with the integrated garage door opener. If you
have difficulty programing the integrated garage
Z
262 Features
Several attempts might be necessary. You

should test every position for at least
25 seconds before trying another position.
Synchronizing the rolling code

Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
(Y page 261).
If the garage door system uses a rolling code,
you will also have to synchronize the garage
door system with the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will
need to use the programming button on the door
Garage door remote control A is not included drive control panel. The programming button
with the integrated garage door opener. may be located in different places depending on
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition the manufacturer. It is usually located on the
lock (Y page 123). door drive unit on the garage ceiling.
X Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to con-

Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive
trol the garage door drive. operating instructions, e.g. under "Program-
ming additional remote controls", before carry-
X To start programming mode: press and
ing out the following steps.
hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated
Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage
garage door opener.
door or gate opener drive. Make sure that nei-
The garage door opener is now in program-
ther your vehicle nor any persons/objects are
ming mode. After a short time, indicator
present within the sweep of the door or gate.
lamp : lights up yellow.
Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as
button ;, = or ? is stored for the first time. lock (Y page 123).
If the selected button has already been pro- X Get out of the vehicle.
gramed, indicator lamp : will only light up X Press the programming button on the door
yellow after ten seconds have elapsed. drive unit.
X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate
lamp : flashes yellow. the next step.
X To program the remote control: point X Get into the vehicle.
garage door remote control A towards but- X Press previously programed button ;, =
tons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a dis- or ? on the integrated garage door opener
tance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm). repeatedly and in quick succession until the
X Press and hold button B on remote control door closes.
A until indicator lamp : lights up green. The rolling code synchronization is then com-
When indicator lamp : lights up green: pro- plete.
gramming is finished.
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro- Notes on programming the remote con-
gramming was successful. The rolling code trol
must be synchronized (Y page 262). Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break"
X Release button B on remote control A for (or interruption) of the transmission signals
the garage door drive system. after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore,
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the these signals may not last long enough for the
programing procedure for the corresponding integrated garage door opener. The signal is not
button on the rear-view mirror. When doing recognized during programming. Comparable
so, vary the distance between remote control with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door open-
A and the rear-view mirror. ers also feature a "break".
The required distance between remote con-
trol A and the integrated garage door opener
depends on the garage door drive system.
Features 263
Proceed as follows: garage door remote control A will transmit a

Rif you live in Canada strong and precise signal to the integrated
garage door opener.
Rif you have difficulties programming the
RWhen programming, hold remote control A
garage door opener (regardless of where you
live) when using the programming steps at varying distances and angles and from but-
tons ; to ? which you are programming. Try
X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the various angles at a distance between 2and
integrated garage door opener. 8 inches (5to 20 cm) or at the same angle but
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up at varying distances.
yellow. RIf another remote control A is available for
X Release the button. the same garage door drive, repeat the same
Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. programming steps with this remote control
X Press button B of garage door remote con- A. Before performing these steps, make sure
trol A for two seconds, then release it for two that new batteries have been installed in
seconds. garage door drive remote control A.
X Press button B again for two seconds. RNote that some remote controls only transmit

X Repeat this sequence on button B of remote for a limited amount of time (the indicator
control A until indicator lamp : lights up lamp on the remote control goes out). Press
green. button B on remote control A again before
When indicator lamp : lights up green: pro- transmission ends.
gramming is finished. RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro- opener unit. This can improve signal recep-
gramming was successful. The next step is to tion/transmission.
synchronize the rolling code.
X Release button B of remote control A of the Opening/closing the garage door
garage door drive.
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the After it has been programmed, the integrated
programming process for the corresponding garage door opener performs the function of the
button on the rear-view mirror. When doing garage door system remote control. Please also
so, vary the distance between remote control read the operating instructions for the garage
A and the rear-view mirror. door system.
The required distance between remote con- X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
trol A and the integrated garage door opener lock (Y page 123).
depends on the garage door drive system. X Press button ;, = or ? which you have
Several attempts might be necessary. You programmed to operate the garage door.
should test every position for at least Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-
25 seconds before trying another position. cator lamp : lights up green.
Garage door system with a rolling code: indi-
Problems when programming cator lamp : flashes green.
If you are experiencing problems programing The transmitter will transmit a signal as long
the integrated garage door opener on the rear- as the button is pressed. The transmission is
view mirror, take note of the following instruc- halted after a maximum of ten seconds and
tions: indicator lamp : lights up yellow.
RCheck the transmitter frequency used by X Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary.
garage door drive remote control A and
whether it is supported. The transmitter fre- Clearing the memory
quency can usually be found on the back of
remote control A for the garage door drive. Make sure that you clear the memory of the
The garage door opener is compatible with integrated garage door opener before selling the
devices which operate in the frequency range vehicle.
of 280 to 433 MHz.
RReplace the batteries in garage door remote
control A. This increases the likelihood that
Z
264 Features

lock (Y page 123).
X Press and hold buttons ; and ?.
The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow
and then green.
X Release buttons ; and ?.
The memory of the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.
Floormats
G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is

jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
X Slide the relevant seat back.

X To install: place the floormat in the footwell.
X Press studs : onto retainers ;.
X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;.
X Remove the floormat.
Engine compartment 265
Engine compartment Rremove jewelry and watches

Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
Hood
ple, away from moving parts
G WARNING
G WARNING The ignition system and the fuel injection sys-
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when tem work under high voltage. If you touch
the vehicle is in motion and block your view. components which are under voltage, you
There is a risk of an accident. could get an electric shock. There is a risk of
Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before injury.
every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. Never touch components of the ignition sys-
tem or fuel injection system when the ignition
G WARNING is switched on.
When opening and closing the hood, it may
suddenly fall into the closed position. There is Opening the hood
a risk of injury to persons within range of
Maintenance and care

movement of the hood. G WARNING
Open and close the hood only when no one is Certain components in the engine compart-
within its range of movement. ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
G WARNING Working in the engine compartment poses a
Opening the hood when the engine is over- risk of injury.
heated or when there is a fire in the engine Where possible, let the engine cool down and
compartment could expose you to hot gases touch only the components described in the
or other service products. There is a risk of following.
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before G WARNING
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the When the hood is open and the windshield
engine compartment, keep the hood closed wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
and contact the fire department. the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
G WARNING the ignition before opening the hood.
The engine compartment contains moving
components. Certain components, such as ! Make sure that the windshield wipers are
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start not folded away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the windshield wip-
again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
ers or the hood.
is a risk of injury.
If you need to do any work inside the engine
compartment:
Rswitch off the ignition
Rnever reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
such as the fan rotation area
Z
266 Engine compartment
Engine oil
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
X Make sure that the windshield wipers are touch only the components described in the
turned off. following.
X Pull release lever : on the hood.
The hood is released. G WARNING
components. Certain components, such as
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start

is a risk of injury.
If you need to do any work inside the engine
compartment:
Rswitch off the ignition
Rnever reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle ; such as the fan rotation area
up and lift the hood. Rremove jewelry and watches
If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
(40 cm), the hood is opened and held open
automatically by the gas-filled strut. ple, away from moving parts
G WARNING
Closing the hood
If engine oil comes into contact with hot com-
X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of ponents in the engine compartment, it may
approximately 8 in (20 cm). ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
X Check that the hood has engaged properly.
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
properly engaged. Open it again and close it the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and
with a little more force. thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-
ponents before starting the engine.
Radiator G WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is over-
Do not cover up the radiator, such as with a
thermal mat or insect protection cover. The heated or when there is a fire in the engine
readings of the on-board-diagnostic system may compartment could expose you to hot gases
otherwise be inaccurate. Some of these read- or other service products. There is a risk of
ings are required by law and must be accurate at injury.
all times.
Engine compartment 267
Let an overheated engine cool down before Adding engine oil

engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department. When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to
the environment.
General notes
Depending on your driving style, the vehicle ! Use only engine oils and oil filters that are
consumes up to 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per approved for vehicles with a service system. A
600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may list of the engine oils and oil filters that have
be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if been tested and approved in accordance with
you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be Products is available at any authorized
in a different location. Mercedes-Benz Center.
When checking the oil level: The following cause engine failure or damage
to the exhaust system:
Rpark the vehicle on a level surface
RUse of engine oils and oil filters that have
Rthe engine should be switched off for approx-
not been expressly approved for the service
imately five minutes if the engine is at normal

system
operating temperature
RReplacement of engine oil and oil filter after
Rif the engine is not at normal operating tem-
the replacement interval specified by the
perature, e.g. if the engine was only started service system has expired
briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carrying
RUse of engine oil additives
out the measurement
! Do not add too much oil. adding too much
Checking the oil level using the oil dip- engine oil can result in damage to the engine
stick or to the catalytic converter. Have excess
engine oil siphoned off.
Example Example
X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it.
tube.
X Add engine oil.
X Wipe off oil dipstick :.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on
X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of
to the stop, and take it out again. engine oil.
If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX X Replace cap : on the filler neck and tighten
mark ;, the oil level is correct. clockwise.
X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.
below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil. X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick
(Y page 267).
Further information on engine oil (Y page 325).
Z
268 Engine compartment
Additional service products Let an overheated engine cool down before

Important safety notes engine compartment, keep the hood closed
G WARNING and contact the fire department.
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts Checking coolant level
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
G WARNING
components. Certain components, such as
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start

Example
is a risk of injury. X Park the vehicle on a level surface.
If you need to do any work inside the engine Only check the coolant level when the vehicle
is on a level surface and the engine has cooled
compartment: down.
Rswitch off the ignition X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
Rnever reach into the area where there is a lock (Y page 123).
risk of danger from moving components, or
such as the fan rotation area X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
Start/Stop button twice (Y page 123).
Rremove jewelry and watches
X Check the coolant temperature display in the
Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam- instrument cluster.
ple, away from moving parts The coolant temperature must be below
158 ‡ (70 †).
G WARNING X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition
The cooling system is pressurized, particularly lock (Y page 123).
when the motor is warm. If you open the cap, or
you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out. X Press the Start/Stop button once on vehicles
There is a risk of injury. with KEYLESS-GO (Y page 123).
X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-clock-
Let the engine cool down before you open the
wise and allow excess pressure to escape.
cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowly
X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and
open the cap to relieve pressure. remove it.
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar =
G WARNING in the filler neck when cold, there is enough
Opening the hood when the engine is over- coolant in coolant expansion tank ;.
heated or when there is a fire in the engine If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in
compartment could expose you to hot gases (1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler neck
when warm, there is enough coolant in expan-
or other service products. There is a risk of sion tank ;.
injury.
Maintenance 269
X If necessary, add coolant that has been tested Maintenance

and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as ASSYST PLUS
it will go.
Service messages
For further information on coolant, see
(Y page 326). The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
informs you of the next service due date.
Adding washer fluid to the windshield Information on the type of service and service
washer system/headlamp cleaning intervals (see the separate Maintenance Book-
system let).
You can obtain further information from an
G WARNING authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
it comes into contact with hot engine compo- The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does
not show any information on the engine oil level.
nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of Observe the notes on the engine oil level
fire and injury. (Y page 267).
Make sure that no windshield washer con- The multifunction display shows a service mes-

centrate is spilled next to the filler neck. sage for several seconds, e.g.:
RService A in .. Days
RService A Due
RService A Overdue by .. Days
Depending on the operating conditions of the
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the
next service due date is displayed.
The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a
number or another letter, shows the type of ser-
vice. A stands for a minor service and B for a
major service.
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Example The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does
X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. not take into account any periods of time during
X Add the premixed washer fluid. which the battery is disconnected.
X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck Maintaining the time-dependent service sched-
until it engages. ule:
X Note down the service due date displayed in
If the washer fluid level drops below the recom-
mended minimum fluid level of 1.1 US qt the multifunction display before disconnect-
(1.0 liter), a message appears in the multifunc- ing the battery.
tion display prompting you to add washer fluid or
(Y page 225). X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the
Further information on washer fluid battery disconnection periods from the ser-
(Y page 327). vice date shown on the display.
Hiding a service message

X Press the a or % button on the steering
wheel.
Z
270 Care
Displaying service messages Driving abroad

X Switch on the ignition. An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is
also available in other countries. You can obtain
further information from any authorized
wheel to select the Serv. menu. Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by press-
ing the a button.
The service due date appears in the multi-
Care
function display. General notes
Information about Service H Environmental note

Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service inter- cloths in an environmentally responsible man-
val display ner.
! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
has been inadvertently reset, this setting can ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of
be corrected at a qualified specialist work- the following:
shop. Rdry, rough or hard cloths

Have service work carried out as described in Rabrasive cleaning agents
the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise
Rsolvents
lead to increased wear and damage to the
major assemblies or the vehicle. Rcleaning agents containing solvents
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an author- Do not scrub.

ized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the Do not touch the surfaces or protective films
ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper.
service work has been carried out. You can also You could otherwise scratch or damage the
obtain further information on maintenance surfaces and protective film.
work, for example. ! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of
Special service requirements time directly after cleaning, particularly after
cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.
The specified maintenance interval takes only Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor-
the normal operation of the vehicle into rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,
account. Under arduous operating conditions or drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By
increased load on the vehicle, maintenance heating up the brakes, the brake discs and
work must be carried out more frequently, for pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a
example: long period of time.
Rregular city driving with frequent intermediate
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for
stops retaining the quality in the long term.
Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel short
Use care products and cleaning agents recom-
distances mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road
surfaces
Rif the engine is often left idling for long periods Washing the vehicle and cleaning the
Under these or similar conditions, have, for paintwork
example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter
replaced or changed more frequently. Under Automatic car wash
arduous operating conditions, the tires must be
checked more often. Further information can be G WARNING
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g.
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Care 271
After the vehicle has been washed, brake X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the
carefully while paying attention to the traffic ignition is switched off.
conditions until full braking power is restored.
lock (Y page 123).
Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop
! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func- button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.
tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat-
ically in certain situations. X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate X Shift the automatic transmission to position
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in N.
the following or similar situations: X Release the brake pedal.
Rwhen towing the vehicle X Release the electric parking brake.
Rin the car wash X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
in the ignition lock.
! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless
Automatic Car Wash as these use special You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can wash from the very start.
damage the paintwork or plastic parts. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
! Make sure that:

After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax
Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof from the windshield and the wiper blades. This
are fully closed. will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises
Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off (the caused by residue on the windshield.
OFF button has been pressed).
Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position 0. Washing by hand
Rthe 360° camera or rear view camera is
In some countries, washing by hand is only
switched off.
allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
The vehicle may otherwise be damaged. Observe the legal requirements in each country.
! In car washes with a towing mechanism, X Do not use hot water and do not wash the
make sure that the automatic transmission is vehicle in direct sunlight.
in transmission position N, otherwise the X Use a soft sponge to clean.
vehicle could be damaged. X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
RVehicles with a SmartKey: shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not remove the SmartKey from the igni- X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen-
tion lock. Do not open the driver's door or tle jet of water.
front-passenger door when the engine is X Do not point the water jet directly towards the
switched off. Otherwise, the automatic air inlet.
transmission selects park position P auto-
X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge
matically and locks the wheels. You can
frequently.
prevent this by shifting the automatic trans-
mission to N beforehand. X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
thoroughly with a chamois.
RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint-
Do not open the driver's door or front- work.
passenger door when the engine is
switched off. Otherwise, the automatic Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as
transmission selects park position P auto- soon as possible when driving in winter.
matically and locks the wheels.
Observe the following to make sure that the Power washers
automatic transmission stays in position N:
G WARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
Z
272 Care
to the tires or chassis components. Compo- cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter
nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect- fluid.
X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
edly. There is a risk of an accident.
X Use silicone remover to remove wax.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint
tires or chassis components replaced imme- surface, use the paint care products recommen-
ded and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the
diately. case approximately every three to five months,
depending on the climate conditions and the
! Always maintain a distance of at least care product used.
11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the
If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if the
power washer nozzle. Information about the
paint has become dull, the paint cleaner recom-
correct distance is available from the equip- mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz
ment manufacturer. should be used.
Move the power washer nozzle around when Do not use these care products in the sun or on
cleaning your vehicle. the hood while the hood is hot.
Do not aim directly at any of the following:
X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-
RTires Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paint-
RDoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc. work quickly and provisionally.
RElectrical components
RBattery Matte finish care
RConnectors
RLamps
! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.
RSeals
RTrim ! The following may cause the paint to
become shiny and thus reduce the matte
RVentilation slots
effect:
Damaged seals or electrical components can
Rstrong rubbing of the paintwork with
lead to leaks or failures.
unsuitable materials
Rfrequent use of automatic car washes
Cleaning the paintwork
Rwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight
! Do not affix:
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing
Rstickers products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for the
Rfilms purpose of paintwork care. These products
Rmagnetic plates or similar items are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise use on vehicles with matte paintwork leads to
damage the paintwork. considerable surface damage or, more spe-
cifically, to shiny, spotted areas.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a
corrosion and damage caused by inadequate qualified specialist workshop.
care cannot always be completely repaired. In
such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax
X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, treatment under any circumstances.
while avoiding rubbing too hard. Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear
X Soak insect remains with insect remover and matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage
rinse off the treated areas afterwards. to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.
X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with
the treated areas afterwards. a clear matte finish.
X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, The vehicle should ideally be washed by hand
fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of
water.
Care 273
Use only insect remover and car shampoo from ! Clean the water drainage channels of the
the range of recommended and approved windshield and the rear window at regular
Mercedes-Benz care products. intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and
pollen may under certain circumstances pre-
vent water from draining away. This can lead
Cleaning the vehicle parts to corrosion damage and damage to elec-
tronic components.
Cleaning the wheels X Clean the inside and outside of the windows
with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that
G WARNING is recommended and approved by Mercedes-
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt Benz.
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components. Compo- Cleaning wiper blades
nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-
edly. There is a risk of an accident. G WARNING
Do not use power washers with circular jet You could become trapped by the windshield
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
tires or chassis components replaced imme- windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of

diately. injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
to remove brake dust. This could damage wiper blades.
wheel bolts and brake components.
! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of ! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the
time directly after cleaning, particularly after wiper blade could be damaged.
cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do
Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor- not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph-
rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore, ite coating could be damaged. This could
drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By cause wiper noise.
heating up the brakes, the brake discs and
pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
long period of time. back. The windshield could be damaged if the
wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
Cleaning the windows X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the
windshield.
G WARNING X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp
You could become trapped by the windshield cloth.
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of before switching on the ignition.
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and Cleaning the exterior lighting
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
wiper blades. which are suitable for plastic light lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, could scratch or damage the plastic light len-
solvents or cleaning agents containing sol- ses.
vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do
not touch the insides of the windows with X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior light-
hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There ing using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning
is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows. agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or
cleaning cloths.
Z
274 Care
Cleaning the mirror turn signals

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable
cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could
scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the
mirror turn signals.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig-
nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet
sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.
Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning
cloths.
X Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean
Cleaning the sensors camera lens :.
! If you clean the sensors with a power Cleaning the exhaust pipes
washer, make sure that you keep a distance
of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle
and the power washer nozzle. Information
G WARNING
about the correct distance is available from The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
the equipment manufacturer. become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Always be particularly careful around the
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
these components to cool down before touch-
ing them.
! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-

based cleaning agents, such as bathroom
cleaner or wheel cleaner.
Impurities combined with the effects of road grit
and corrosive environmental factors may cause
flash rust to form on the surface. You can
restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by
cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and
after washing.
X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product
X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
Cleaning the rear view camera and 360° Interior care

camera
Cleaning the display
! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
around the rear view camera or 360° camera ! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:
with a power washer. Ralcohol-basedthinner or gasoline
Rabrasive
cleaning agents
Rcommercially-available household cleaning
agents
Care 275
These may damage the display surface. Do Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-
not put pressure on the display surface when ments
cleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam-
age to the display. ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents
X Before cleaning the display, make sure that it such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes
is switched off and has cooled down. or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag-
ing the surface.
X Clean the display surface using a commer-
cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD ! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.
display cleaner. The trim pieces have a chrome look but are
X Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber mostly made of anodized aluminum and can
cloth. lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use
a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning
the trim pieces.
Cleaning the plastic trim If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very
G WARNING dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are
unsure as to whether the trim pieces are
Care products and cleaning agents containing chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized
solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to Mercedes-Benz Center.
become porous. As a result, plastic parts may

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a
come loose in the event of air bag deploy- damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
ment. There is a risk of injury. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
Do not use any care products and cleaning products recommended and approved by
agents to clean the cockpit. Mercedes-Benz.
! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces: Cleaning the seat covers
Rstickers
Rfilms
General notes
Rscented oil bottles or similar items ! Do not use a microfiber cloth to clean covers
made out of real leather, artificial leather or
You can otherwise damage the plastic.
DINAMICA. If used often, these can damage
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or the cover.
sunscreen to come into contact with the plas-
tic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of
i Note that regular care is essential to ensure
that the appearance and comfort of the cov-
the surfaces.
ers is retained over time.
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free
cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. Genuine leather seat covers
X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod- Leather is a natural product.
ucts recommended and approved by It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for
Mercedes-Benz. example:
The surface may change color temporarily. Rdifferences in the texture
Wait until the surface is dry again.
Rmarks caused by growth and injury
Rslight nuances of color
Cleaning the steering wheel and selec- These are characteristics of leather and not
tor lever material defects.
X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
leather care agents that have been recom-
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Z
276 Care
! To retain the natural appearance of the Cleaning the headliner and carpets
leather, observe the following cleaning
instructions: X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or
dry shampoo.
RClean genuine leather covers carefully with
X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning
a damp cloth and then wipe the covers
down with a dry cloth. agents recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
RMake sure that the leather does not
become soaked. It may otherwise become
rough and cracked.
ROnly use leather care agents that have
been tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified
Seat covers of other materials
! Observe the following when cleaning:
Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).

Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub
carefully and always wipe entire seat sec-
tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave
the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results
depend on the type of dirt and how long it
has been there.
Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth.
Make sure that you wipe entire seat sec-
tions to avoid leaving visible lines.
Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNING
Seat belts can become severely weakened if
bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of
an accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical

cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by
heating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80 †)
or in direct sunlight.
X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.
Where will I find...? 277
Where will I find...? Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

Vehicle tool kit
General notes
The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stowage
well under the trunk floor (Y page 247).
Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency

spare wheel
: Towing eye
; Tire sealant filler bottle
= Tire inflation compressor
? Fuse allocation chart
X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 247).
Breakdown assistance
i Example: equipment and country-specific
variations possible.
: Vehicle tool kit tray
; Stowage well Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel
= "Minispare" emergency spare wheel (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
The vehicle tool kit contains:
RFolding wheel chock
RFuse allocation chart
RJack
RAlignment bolt
ROne pair of gloves
RLug wrench
RTowing eye
i Example: equipment and country-specific : Towing eye

variations possible. ; One pair of gloves
= Jack
? Folding wheel chock
A Alignment bolt
B Sheet for faulty wheel
C Tire inflation compressor
D Lug wrench
E Fuse allocation chart
278 Flat tire
i Example: equipment and country-specific changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting
variations possible. in the wheel change should, for example,
stand behind the barrier.
Vehicles with alloy wheels and hub caps X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic
conditions when doing so.
On vehicles with alloy wheels and hub caps, a X Close the driver's door.
socket is also provided.
Flat tire MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat

properties)
Preparing the vehicle
General notes
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-
RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat proper-
acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-
ties) (Y page 278) cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehi- or more tires. The affected tire must not show
cles with MOExtended tires any clearly visible damage.
Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 277) You can recognize MOExtended tires by the
Ran emergency spare wheel (Y page 317) MOExtended marking which appears on the
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It next to the tire size designation, the load-bear-
is therefore recommended that you additionally ing capacity and the speed index (Y page 307).
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. tion with an active tire pressure loss warning
winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from system or with an active tire pressure monitor.
a qualified specialist workshop. If a pressure loss warning message appears
Information on changing and mounting wheels in the multifunction display:
(Y page 312). Robserve the instructions in the display mes-
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and sages (Y page 221).
level ground, as far away as possible from Rcheck the tire for damage.
traffic. Rif driving on, observe the following notes.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehi-
(Y page 141). cle is partially laden. When the vehicle is fully
X If possible, bring the front wheels into the laden it is approximately 19 miles (30 km).
straight-ahead position. In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-
X Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that "nor- tance possible depends upon:
mal" level is selected (Y page 159). RVehicle speed
RRoad condition
ROutside temperature
or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO: The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
X Open the driver's door. may be reduced by extreme driving conditions
The vehicle electronics now have status 0. or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a
This is the same as the SmartKey having been moderate style of driving.
removed. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is
X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni- counted from the moment the tire pressure loss
tion lock (Y page 123). warning appears in the multifunction display.
X Make sure that the passengers are not endan- You must not exceed a maximum permissible
gered as they do so. Make sure that no one is speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
near the danger area while a wheel is being
Flat tire 279
When replacing one or all tires, please observe TIREFIT kit

the following specifications for your vehicle's
tires: Important safety notes
Rsize
TIREFIT is a tire sealant.
Rthe type and
You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to
Rthe "MOExtended" mark 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tempera-
with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may be tures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).
used as a temporary measure. Make sure that
you use the proper size and type (summer or G WARNING
winter tires). In the following situations, the tire sealant is
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:
is therefore recommended that you additionally
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. than those mentioned above.
winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from Rthe wheel rim is damaged.
a qualified specialist workshop.
Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or
on a flat tire.
G WARNING Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified
When driving in emergency mode, the driving specialist workshop.
characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-
ing, accelerating quickly and when braking. G WARNING
There is a risk of an accident. The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-
Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. tion. It must not come into contact with your
Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not
and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away
off-road). This applies in particular to a laden from children. There is a risk of injury.
vehicle. If you come into contact with the tire sealant,
Stop driving in emergency mode if: observe the following:
Ryou hear banging noises. RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin
Rthevehicle starts to shake. immediately with water.
Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with
RESP® is intervening constantly. your eyes, immediately rinse them thor-

oughly with clean water.
Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.
RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately
After driving in emergency mode, have the
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink
wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,
workshop with regard to their further use. The
and seek medical attention immediately.
defective tire must be replaced in every case.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with tire sealant.
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
! After use, excess tire sealant may run out of

the filler hose. This could cause stains.
Z
280 Flat tire
Therefore, place the tire sealant bottle with

filler hose in the plastic bag which is con-
tained in the TIREFIT kit.
Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist
workshop.
! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor

for longer than eight minutes at a time without
a break. It may otherwise overheat.
The tire inflation compressor can be operated X Pull connector ? with cable and hose A out
again once it has cooled down. of the tire inflation compressor housing.
X Screw hose A onto flange B of tire sealant
Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instruc-
tions on the sticker on the tire inflation com- bottle :.
pressor. X Place tire sealant bottle : head downwards
into recess ; of the tire inflation compres-
Using the TIREFIT kit sor.
X Do not remove any foreign objects which have

penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.

X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompa-
nying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation
compressor from the stowage well under-
neath the trunk floor (Y page 277).
X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty

tire.
X Screw filler hose D onto valve C.
X Insert plug = into the cigarette lighter socket

(Y page 252) or into another 12 V socket in
your vehicle (Y page 253)
X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the
instrument cluster within the driver's field of lock (Y page 123).
vision. X Press on and off switch = on the tire inflation
X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the compressor to position I.
valve on the wheel with the defective tire. The tire inflation compressor is switched on.
The tire is inflated.
First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The
pressure can briefly rise to approximately
500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tire inflation com-
pressor during this phase.
X Let the tire inflation compressor run for a
maximum of five minutes. The tire should then
Flat tire 281
have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa You should therefore adapt your driving style
(1.8 bar/26 psi). accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has the specified maximum speed with a tire that
been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pres- has been repaired using tire sealant.
sure reached" (Y page 281).
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has The maximum permissible speed for a tire
not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h).
pressure not reached" (Y page 281). The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be
If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's
areas as quickly as possible. Use plain water if field of vision.
possible. If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have been attained after five minutes:
them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
cleaner as soon as possible.
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
Tire pressure not reached Tire sealant may escape when the filler hose is
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not unscrewed.
been attained after five minutes: X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla-
tion compressor.
X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X Pull away immediately.
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
faulty tire. X Stop after driving for approximately ten
Tire sealant may escape when the filler hose is minutes and check the tire pressure with the
unscrewed. tire inflation compressor.
X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx-
The tire pressure must now be at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
imately 30 ft (10 m).
X Pump up the tire again. G WARNING
After a maximum of five minutes the tire pres- If the required tire pressure is not reached
sure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/
26 psi). after driving for a short period, the tire is too
badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair
G WARNING the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a
If the required tire pressure is not reached tire pressure that is too low can significantly
after the specified time, the tire is too badly impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
pressure that is too low can significantly specialist workshop.
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
acteristics. There is a risk of accident. In cases such as the one mentioned above, con-
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or
specialist workshop. 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least
Tire pressure reached 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the driver's
G WARNING side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in the
fuel filler flap for values.
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant
X To increase the tire pressure: switch on the
impairs the driving characteristics and is not
tire inflation compressor.
suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of
accident.
Z
282 Battery (vehicle)
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper-

ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.
You could lose control of the vehicle, for
example:
Rwhen braking
Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuvers
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
adapted to the road conditions
In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-
X To reduce the tire pressure: depress pres-
sure release button E next to pressure gauge dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop
F. immediately. Do not drive any further. You
should have all work involving the battery car-
X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire.
Tire sealant may escape when the filler hose is
unscrewed. For further information about ABS (Y page 64)
and ESP® (Y page 69).
X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the
sealed tire. G WARNING
X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire infla- Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation
tion compressor. of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-
The filler hose remains attached to the tire sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an
sealant bottle.
explosion.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work-
shop and have the tire changed there. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle
X Have the tire sealant bottle and the filler hose body to remove any existing electrostatic
replaced as soon as possible at a qualified build-up.
X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every The highly flammable gas mixture forms when
four years at a qualified specialist workshop. charging the battery as well as when jump-start-
ing.
Always make sure that neither you nor the bat-
tery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of
Battery (vehicle) electrostatic charge can be caused, for exam-
ple:
Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic
Special tools and expert knowledge are required fibers
when working on the battery, e.g. removal and Rdue to friction between clothing and seats
installation. You should therefore have all work
Rif you push or pull the battery across the car-
involving the battery carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop. pet or other synthetic materials
Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth
G WARNING
G WARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and During the charging process, a battery produ-
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or
lead to function restrictions applying to sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can
safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys- ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the
Battery (vehicle) 283
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a Observe the service intervals in the Mainte-
connected battery does not come into con- nance Booklet or contact a qualified specialist
workshop for more information.
tact with vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat- ! Always have work on batteries carried out at
a qualified specialist workshop. Should it, in
tery.
exceptional circumstances, be absolutely
RIt is important that you observe the descri- necessary to disconnect the 12-volt battery
bed order of the battery terminals when yourself, observe the following:
connecting and disconnecting a battery. Rsecure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the away.
battery poles with identical polarity are Rswitch off the ignition.
connected. Ralways disconnect the negative terminal
RIt is particularly important to observe the clamp first, followed by the positive termi-
nal clamp.
described order when connecting and dis-
After the battery has been disconnected, the
connecting the jumper cables.
transmission is locked in position P.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery
After the work has been done, install the bat-
terminals while the engine is running. tery and replace the cover of the positive ter-
minal clamp firmly.
G WARNING Comply with safety precautions and take pro-
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. tective measures when handling batteries.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do Risk of explosion.
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
the battery. Keep children away from batter-
ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with Fire, open flames and smoking are
plenty of clean water and seek medical atten- prohibited when handling the bat-
tion. tery. Avoid creating sparks.
H Environmental note Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact

with skin, eyes or clothing.
Batteries contain dangerous
Wear suitable protective clothing,
substances. It is against the
especially gloves, apron and face-
law to dispose of them with guard.
the household rubbish. They Rinse any acid spills immediately
must be collected separately with clear water. Contact a physician
and recycled to protect the if necessary.
environment. Wear eye protection.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged
Keep children away.
batteries to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop or a special
collection point for used bat-
teries. Observe this Operator's Manual.
! Have the battery checked regularly at a

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use batteries which have
been tested and approved for your vehicle by
Z
284 Battery (vehicle)
Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
increased impact protection to prevent vehicle not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
occupants from suffering acid burns should the
battery be damaged in the event of an accident. the battery. Keep children away from batter-
In order for the battery to achieve the maximum ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with
possible service life, it must always be suffi- plenty of clean water and seek medical atten-
ciently charged. tion.
Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may
discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. G WARNING
In this case, have the battery disconnected at a A discharged battery can freeze at tempera-
qualified specialist workshop. You can also
tures below freezing point. When jump-start-
charge the battery with a charger recommended
by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified special- ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases
ist workshop for further information. can escape from the battery. There is a risk of
Have the battery condition of charge checked an explosion.
more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a charging it or jump-starting.
lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist
workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle ! Only charge the battery using the jump-
parked for a long period of time. starting connection point.
Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle
and do not require any electrical consumers. The jump-starting connection point is in the
The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus engine compartment (Y page 285).
conserving battery power. X Open the hood.
If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if X Connect the battery charger to the positive
you reconnect the battery, you will have to: terminal and ground point in the same order
Rset the clock; see the Digital Operator's Man-
as when connecting the donor battery in the
ual jump-starting procedure (Y page 285).
On vehicles with a multimedia system, the Keep away from fire and open flames. Do not
time is set automatically. lean over a battery. Never charge the battery if it
Rreset the function for folding the exterior mir-
is still installed in the vehicle, unless you use a
rors in/out automatically, by folding the mir- battery charger which has been tested and
rors out once (Y page 101). approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger
unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehi-
cles and tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the
Charging the battery charging of the battery in its installed position.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
! Only use battery chargers with a maximum for further information and availability. Read the
charging voltage of 14.8 V. battery charger's operating instructions before
G WARNING charging the battery.
During charging and jump-starting, explosive If the warning and indicator lamps do not light up
on the instrument cluster when temperatures
gases can escape from the battery. There is a are low, it is probably because the discharged
risk of an explosion. battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating charge the battery nor jump-start the vehicle.
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient The service life of a thawed-out battery may be
ventilation while charging and jump-starting. shorter. The starting characteristics can be
impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have
Do not lean over a battery. the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Jump-starting 285
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine com-
partment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the
battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of
clean water and seek medical attention.
G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-
tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be
damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
If the indicator and warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the
discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge the battery nor jump-start the
vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be
impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified
Z
286 Jump-starting
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables.
Observe the following points:
RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-
start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.
ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for
a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.
Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal clamp
do not come into contact with other metal sections.
Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is
running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
X Apply the parking brake firmly.
X Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be
off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it
(Y page 123).
X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.
X Open the hood.
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting
device.
X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.
X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the
jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
Towing and tow-starting 287
X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using the
jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first.
X Start the engine.
X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from pos-
itive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first.
X Close cover : of positive clamp ; after removing the jumper cables.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.
i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified
Towing and tow-starting ! When Active Brake Assist, Distance Pilot

DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated,
Important safety notes the vehicle brakes automatically in certain
situations.
G WARNING To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or these systems in the following or similar sit-
no longer available if: uations:
Rthe engine is not running.
Rin the car wash
Rthe brake system or the power steering is
malfunctioning. ! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the
Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply
towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could be
damaged.
or the vehicle's electrical system.
If your vehicle is being towed, much more ! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, this
could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover
force may be necessary to steer or brake. the vehicle with a crane.
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, ! When towing, pull away slowly and
smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the
make sure that the steering moves freely. vehicles could be damaged.
G WARNING ! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This

could damage the vehicle.
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle
and its weight is greater than the permissible ! When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,
gross weight of your vehicle, the: use the key instead of the Start/Stop button.
Otherwise, the automatic transmission may
Rthe towing eye could detach itself shift to position P when the driver's or front-
Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll- passenger door are opened, which could lead
over. to damage to the transmission.
There is a risk of an accident. ! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of
30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,
(50 km/h) must not be exceeded.
its weight should not be greater than the per-
If the vehicle has to be towed more than
missible gross weight of your vehicle. 30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be
raised and transported.
Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight
of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden-
tification plate (Y page 322).
Z
288 Towing and tow-starting
! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its

weight must not exceed the maximum per-
missible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle.
It is better to have the vehicle transported than
to have it towed away.
If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage,
have it transported on a transporter or trailer.
The automatic transmission must be in position
N when the vehicle is being towed.
The battery must be connected and charged.
Otherwise, you:
Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to
position N.
In the event of damage to the electrical sys-
tem All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles
If the battery is defective, the automatic trans-
mission will be locked in position P. To shift the
automatic transmission to position N, you must
provide power to the vehicle's electrical system

in the same way as when jump-starting
(Y page 285).
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or
trailer.
Disarm the automatic locking feature before the
vehicle is towed (Y page 82). You could other-
wise be locked out when pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye
G WARNING Mercedes-AMG vehicles
The exhaust tail pipe may be very hot. There is The brackets for the screw-in towing eye are
a risk of burns when removing the rear cover. located in the bumpers. They are at the front and
Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particular at the rear, behind the covers.
care when removing the rear cover. X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool
kit (Y page 277).
X Pull cover : out of the bumper in the direc-
tion of the arrow by inserting your fingers into
the recess.
X Press the mark on cover ; inwards in the
direction of the arrow.
X Remove cover ; from the opening.
X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it
will go and tighten it.
Towing and tow-starting 289
Removing the towing eye Towing the vehicle with the rear axle
X Unscrew and remove the towing eye. raised
X Position cover : on top of the bumper and ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
press it in at the bottom until it engages. with either the front or the rear axle raised, as
X Attach cover ; to the bumper and press until doing so will damage the transmission.
it engages.
! Vehicles with automatic transmission must
X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.
not be towed with the rear axle raised. The
vehicle/trailer combination may otherwise
swerve or even roll over.
Towing a vehicle with both axles on
the ground
Transporting the vehicle
It is important that you observe the safety
instructions when towing away your vehicle 4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with auto-
(Y page 287). matic transmission
The automatic transmission automatically shifts
to position P when you open the driver's or front-
passenger door or when you remove the Smart-
Key from the ignition lock. In order to ensure
that the automatic transmission stays in posi-
tion N when towing the vehicle, you must
observe the following points:
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
lock.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the Smart-
Key instead of the Start/Stop button
(Y page 124).
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, the
front and rear axles must be stationary and on
X Shift the automatic transmission to position the same transportation vehicle. Positioning
N. over the connection point of the transport
X Release the brake pedal. vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may
X Release the parking brake. otherwise be damaged.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 107). All vehicles
X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the igni-
! You may only secure the vehicle by the
tion lock. wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
In order to signal a change of direction when axle or steering components. Otherwise, the
towing the vehicle with the hazard warning vehicle could be damaged.
lamps switched on, use the combination switch The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle
as usual. In this case, only the turn signals for onto a trailer or transporter for transporting pur-
the desired direction flash. After resetting the poses.
combination switch, the hazard warning lamp
starts flashing again. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X Shift the automatic transmission to position
N.
Z
290 Fuses
As soon as the vehicle has been loaded: Always replace faulty fuses with the specified
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by new fuses having the correct amperage.
applying the parking brake.
X Shift the automatic transmission to posi- Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the
tion P. same rating, which you can recognize by the
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0in the ignition
color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the
lock and remove it. fuse allocation chart.
X Secure the vehicle.
The fuse allocation chart is located in the vehicle
tool kit in the stowage compartment under the
trunk floor (Y page 277).
If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
Notes on 4MATIC vehicles cause traced and rectified at a qualified special-
ist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed Center.
with either the front or the rear axle raised, as
doing so will damage the transmission. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for
If the vehicle has transmission damage or dam- Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the
age to the front or rear axle, have it transported correct fuse rating for the system concerned.
on a transporter or trailer. Otherwise, components or systems could be
damaged.
In the event of damage to the electrical sys-
tem ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
If the battery is defective, the automatic trans- fuse box when the cover is open.
mission will be locked in position P. To shift the
! When closing the cover, make sure that it is
automatic transmission to position N, you must lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seep-
provide power to the vehicle's electrical system ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-
in the same way as when jump-starting ation of the fuses.
(Y page 285).
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
trailer. faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-
nents on the circuit and their functions stop
operating.
Tow-starting (emergency engine
starting) Before changing a fuse
! Vehicles with automatic transmission must Pay attention to the important safety notes
not be started by tow-starting. This could oth- (Y page 290).
erwise damage the transmission.
i You can find information on "Jump-starting" X Switch off all electrical consumers.
under (Y page 285).
X Make sure that the ignition is switched off
(Y page 123).
or
Fuses
X When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey
Important safety notes to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it
(Y page 123).
G WARNING X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if (Y page 141).
you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper- All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
age, the electric cables could be overloaded. must be off.
This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an
accident and injury.
Fuses 291
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: Fuse box in the trunk
RFuse box in the engine compartment on the
left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in (Y page 290).
the direction of travel
RFuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side of
the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of
travel
Fuse box in the engine compartment

(Y page 290).
G WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by X Open the trunk lid.
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. X To open: release cover : at the top right and
Always switch off the windshield wipers and left-hand sides with a flat object.
the ignition before opening the hood. X Open cover : downwards in the direction of
the arrow.
X Make sure that the windshield wipers are
turned off.
X Open the hood (Y page 265).
X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from
the fuse box.
X To open: take lines : out of the guides.
X Move lines : to one side.
X Open retaining clamps ;.
X Remove the fuse box cover forwards.
X To close: check whether the seal is lying cor-
rectly in the cover.
X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box into
the retainer.
X Fold down the cover and close clamps ;.
X Secure lines : in the guides.
X Close the hood.
Z
292 Operation
Important safety notes Further information regarding wheels and tires

can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations"
(Y page 317).
G WARNING You can ask for information regarding permitted
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, wheel-tire combinations at an authorized
the wheel brakes or suspension components Mercedes-Benz Center.
may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci- Information on tire pressure can be found:
dent. Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
Always replace wheels and tires with those on the B-pillar on the driver's side
that fulfill the specifications of the original (Y page 302)
part. Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
(Y page 139)
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the
Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 295)
correct:
Rdesignation
Rmodel Operation
When replacing tires, make sure to use the Information on driving
correct:
Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is
Rdesignation heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.
Rmanufacturer While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises
Rmodel and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pull-
ing to one side. This may indicate that the
wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that
G WARNING a tire is defective, reduce your speed immedi-
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer- ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to
Wheels and tires
ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle. check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden
There is a risk of accident. tire damage could also be causing the unusual
handling characteristics. If you find no signs of
Tires without run-flat characteristics: damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a
Rdo not drive with a flat tire. qualified specialist workshop.
Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your When parking your vehicle, make sure that the
tires do not get deformed by the curb or other
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or obstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive over
consult a qualified specialist workshop. obstacles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuse
Tires with run-flat characteristics: angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels
or tires.
Rpay attention to the information and warn-
ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires with
run-flat characteristics). Regular checking of wheels and tires
Accessories that are not approved for your vehi- G WARNING
cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor-
rectly can impair the operating safety. Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
Before purchasing and using non-approved sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
accessories, visit a qualified specialist work- your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
shop and ask about: Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
Rsuitability and replace any damaged tires immediately.
Rlegal stipulations
Rfactory recommendations
Check wheels and tires for damage at least once
a month. Check wheels and tires after driving
Operation 293
off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels Minimum tire tread depth for:
can cause a loss of tire pressure.
RSummer tires: â in (3 mm)
Pay particular attention to damage such as:
RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
Rcuts in the tires
Rpunctures in the tires For safety reasons, replace the tires before
Rtears in the tires the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
Rbulges on tires tire tread depth is reached.
Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width of
the tire (Y page 293). If necessary, turn the
front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the
inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the
valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount
anything onto the valve other than the standard
valve cap or other valve caps approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any
other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure
monitoring systems.
Marking : shows where the bar indicator
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires par- (arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tire
ticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pres- tread.
sure as necessary (Y page 295).
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law.
Observe the notes on the emergency spare Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread.
wheel (Y page 317). They are visible once a tread depth of approx-
The service life of tires depends, among other imately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this
Wheels and tires

things, on the following factors: is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be
RDriving style replaced.
RTire pressure
RDistance covered
Selecting, mounting and replacing
tires
Notes on tire tread ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type
and make.
G WARNING Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-
Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.
The tire is no longer able to dissipate water. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with
This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 278).
of hydroplaning increases, in particular where ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the
speed is not adapted to suit the driving con- wheels.
ditions. There is a risk of accident. RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the
first 60 miles (100 km). They only reach their
If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires full performance after this distance.
may exhibit different levels of wear at differ- RDo not drive with tires which have too little
ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you tread depth, as this significantly reduces the
should regularly check the tread depth and traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).
the condition of the tread across the entire RReplace the tires after six years at the latest,
width of all tires. regardless of wear.
Observe the notes on the emergency spare
wheel (Y page 317).
Z
294 Winter operation
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat M+S tires

properties)
G WARNING
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-
M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-
cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
or more tires. and do not provide sufficient traction. There is
MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc- a risk of an accident.
tion with an active tire pressure loss warning M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in
system or with an active tire pressure monitor (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-
Benz. At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use winter
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are
flat tire (Y page 278). identified by the M+S marking.
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide
is therefore recommended that you additionally the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount Only these tires will allow driving safety systems
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in
winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from winter. These tires have been developed specif-
a qualified specialist workshop. ically for driving in snow.
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all
wheels to maintain safe handling characteris-
Winter operation tics.
General notes Always observe the maximum permissible
speed specified for the M+S tires you have
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified mounted.
Wheels and tires
specialist workshop at the onset of winter. When you have mounted the M+S tires:
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" X Check the tire pressures (Y page 298).
X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pres-
sure loss warning system (Y page 299).
X Restart the tire pressure monitor
Driving with summer tires
(Y page 302).
At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer Information about driving with an emergency
tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and spare wheel (Y page 317).
braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle
to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold
temperatures could cause cracks to form,
thereby damaging the tires permanently. Snow chains
Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for
this type of damage. G WARNING
If snow chains are installed to the front
G WARNING wheels, they may drag against the vehicle
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres- body or chassis components. This could
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of cause damage to the vehicle or the tires.
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. There is a risk of an accident.
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
Tire pressure 295
To avoid hazardous situations: Tire pressure

Rnever install snow chains to the front Tire pressure specifications
wheels
Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the Important safety notes
rear wheels. G WARNING
! On vehicles with AIRMATIC, you must drive Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
at raised vehicle level if snow chains have following risks:
been mounted. The vehicle may otherwise be Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load
damaged.
and vehicle speed increase.
! On some tire sizes there is not enough space Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or
for snow chains. To avoid damage to the vehi-
unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
cle or tires, observe the "Wheel and tire com-
binations" section under "Tires and wheels". traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use snow chains that have ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.
been specially approved for your vehicle by There is a risk of an accident.
Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
standard of quality. For more information, con-
tact a qualified specialist workshop. and check the pressure of all the tires includ-
If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear ing the spare wheel:
the following points in mind: Rmonthly, at least
RSnow chains may not be mounted on all Rif the load changes
wheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheel- Rbefore beginning a long journey
tire combinations (Y page 317).
Runder different operating conditions, e.g.
Wheels and tires

ROnly use snow chains when driving on roads
completely covered by snow. Remove the off-road driving
snow chains as soon as possible when you If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
come to a road that is not snow-covered.
RLocal regulations may restrict the use of snow The data on the Tire and Loading Information
chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if placard and tire pressure table shown here are
you wish to mount snow chains. examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehi-
RDo not exceed the maximum permissible cle-specific and may deviate from the data
speed of 31 mph (50 km/h). shown here. The tire pressure specifications
that are valid for your vehicle can be found on
i You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pull- the Tire and Loading Information placard and
ing away with snow chains installed: tire pressure table on the vehicle.
RAll vehicles (except Mercedes‑AMG vehi-
cles) (Y page 70) General notes
RMercedes-AMG vehicles: (Y page 71)
You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a The recommended tire pressures for the tires
controlled manner, achieving an increased mounted at the factory can be found on the
driving force (cutting action). labels described here.
Operation with an emergency spare wheel:
Information about driving with an emergency information on operation with an emergency
spare wheel (Y page 317). spare wheel can be found in the general notes in
the "Emergency spare wheel" section
(Y page 318).
Further information on tire pressures can be
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
296 Tire pressure
Tire and Loading Information placard
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully

laden" are defined in the table for different num-
: Recommended tire pressures
bers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The
The Tire and Loading Information placard is on actual number of seats may differ.
the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 302).
The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for cold
tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid
for the maximum permissible load and up to the
maximum permissible vehicle speed.
Tire pressure table

The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel
filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tires
permitted at the factory for this vehicle; see
Wheels and tires
illustration (example).
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim
diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18.
Rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be
found on the tire sidewall (Y page 307).
If the tire pressures have been set to the lower
values for lighter loads and/or lower road
speeds, the pressures should be reset to the
higher values:
Rif you want to drive with an increased load
and/or
Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds
The tire pressures for increased loads and/or
The tire pressure table contains the recommen- higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure
ded pressures for cold tires for various operat- table, may have a negative effect on driving
ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con- comfort.
ditions. If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can
If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the fol- lead to an excessive build up of heat and a sud-
lowing tire pressure information is only valid for den loss of pressure.
that tire size; see illustration (example). For more information, contact a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Tire pressure 297
Important notes on tire pressure too low for the current operating conditions. If
you check the tire pressure when the tires are
G WARNING warm, the resulting value will be higher than if
the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the reduce the tire pressure to the value specified
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise
pressure that is too low may result in a tire be too low.
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. Observe the recommended tire pressures for
RCheck the tire for foreign objects. cold tires:
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
valve is leaking. on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap
If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-
(Y page 139)
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tires

If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and Underinflated tires
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure
G WARNING
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-
sure monitors keep the tire valve open. This Tires with pressure that is too low can over-
can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,
risk of an accident. they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-
ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-
Only screw the standard valve cap or other
ing properties and the driving characteristics.
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle onto the tire valve.
Wheels and tires

Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire tires, including the spare wheel.
pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does
not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire Underinflated tires may:
pressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec- Roverheat,leading to tire defects
tronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure
Radverselyaffect handling
can be checked in the on-board computer.
Rwear excessively and/or unevenly
The tire temperature and pressure increase
when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption
on the driving speed and the load.
Therefore, you should only correct tire pres- Overinflated tires
sures when the tires are cold.
The tires are cold: G WARNING
Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires Tires with excessively high pressure can burst
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours because they are damaged more easily by
and road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than also suffer from irregular wear, which can
1 mile (1.6 km) severely impair the braking properties and the
The tire temperature changes depending on the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an
outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the accident.
tire load. If the tire temperature changes by
18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the
approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take tires, including the spare wheel.
this into account when checking the pressure of
warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is
Z
298 Tire pressure
Overinflated tires may: Checking tire pressures manually

Rincrease the braking distance
To determine and set the correct tire pressure,
Radversely affect handling proceed as follows:
Rwear excessively and/or unevenly X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be
Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort checked.
Rbe more susceptible to damage X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
the valve.
Maximum tire pressures X Read the tire pressure and compare it to the
recommended value on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the tire pressure table
(Y page 295).
X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire
pressure to the recommended value.
X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To
do so, press down the metal pin in the valve,
using the tip of a pen for example. Then check
the tire pressure again using the tire pressure
checker.
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
X Repeat these steps for the other tires.
: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-
sure
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire Tire pressure loss warning system
inflation pressure. Always observe the recom- (Canada only)
mended tire pressure for your vehicle when
adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 295). General notes
Wheels and tires
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe- While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure
cific and may deviate from the values in the loss warning system monitors the set tire pres-
illustration. sure using the rotational speed of the wheels.
This enables the system to detect significant
pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of
Checking the tire pressures a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure,
a corresponding warning message will appear in
Important safety notes the multifunction display.
You can recognize the tire pressure loss warning
Observe the notes on tire pressure by the Run Flat Indicator Active Press
(Y page 295). 'OK' to Restart message which appears in
Information on air pressure for the tires on your the Serv. menu of the multifunction display.
vehicle can be found: Information on the message display can be
Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information found in the "Restarting the tire pressure loss
placard on the B-pillar warning system" section (Y page 299).
Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
(Y page 139) Important safety notes
Rin the "Tire pressure" section The tire pressure warning system does not warn
you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe
the notes on the recommended tire pressure
(Y page 295).
The tire pressure loss warning does not replace
the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An
even loss of pressure on several tires at the
Tire pressure 299
same time cannot be detected by the tire pres- X Press the 9 or : button on the steering
sure loss warning system. wheel to select the Tire Pressure menu.
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you X Press the a button.
of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is The Run Flat Indicator Active Press
penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a 'OK' to Restart message appears in the
sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a multifunction display.
halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering
If you wish to confirm the restart:
movements.
The function of the tire pressure loss warning X Press the a button.
system is limited or delayed if: The Tire Pressure Now OK? message
appears in the multifunction display.
Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's
X Press the 9 or : button to select Yes.
tires.
Rroad conditions are wintry.
The Run Flat Indicator Restarted mes-
Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.
sage appears in the multifunction display.
Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (corner-
After a teach-in period, the tire pressure loss
ing at high speeds or driving with high rates of warning system will monitor the set tire pres-
acceleration). sures of all four tires.
Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehi-
cle or on the roof). If you wish to cancel the restart:
X Press the % button.
Restarting the tire pressure loss warn- or
ing system X When the Tire Pressure Now OK? message
appears, press the 9 or : button to
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system if select Cancel.
you have:
Rchanged the tire pressure The tire pressure values stored at the last
Wheels and tires

Rchanged the wheels or tires restart will continue to be monitored.
Rmounted new wheels or tires
X Before restarting, make sure that the tire
pressures are set properly on all four tires for Tire pressure monitor
the respective operating conditions.
The recommended tire pressure can be found General notes
on the Tire and Loading Information placard If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-
on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Addition- cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire
ally, a tire pressure table is attached to the pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure mon-
fuel filler flap. The tire pressure loss warning itor warns you if the pressure drops in one or
system can only give reliable warnings if you more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only
have set the correct tire pressure. If an incor- functions if the corresponding sensors are
rect tire pressure is set, these incorrect val- installed in all wheels.
ues will be monitored.
Information on tire pressures is displayed in the
X Also observe the notes in the section on tire
multifunction display. After a few minutes of
pressures (Y page 295). driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 shown in the Service menu of the multifunction
in the ignition lock (Y page 123). display, see illustration (example).
wheel to select the Serv. menu.
Z
300 Tire pressure
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-
tem detects a malfunction, the warning lamp
will flash for approximately a minute and then
For information on the message display, refer to remain continuously illuminated. This
the "Checking the tire pressure electronically" sequence will be repeated every time the vehi-
cle is started as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-
minated, the system may not be able to detect
G WARNING or signal low tire pressure as intended.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
should be checked at least once every two reasons, including the installation of incom-
weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure patible replacement or alternate tires or
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
on the Tire and Loading Information placard from functioning properly. Always check the
on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres- TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
your vehicle has tires of a different size than ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires
the size indicated on the Tire and Loading and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
Information placard or, if available, the tire function properly.
pressure label, you should determine the
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
Wheels and tires
proper tire pressure for those tires. pressure to that recommended for cold tires
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has which is suitable for the operating situation
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring (Y page 295). Note that the correct tire pressure
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- for the current operating situation must first be
sure telltale when one or more of your tires taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If there is
a substantial loss of pressure, the warning
are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, threshold for the warning message is aligned to
when the low tire pressure telltale lights up, the reference values taught-in. Restart the tire
you should stop and check your tires as soon pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of
as possible, and inflate them to the proper the cold tires (Y page 302). The current pres-
pressure. Driving on a significantly underin- sures are saved as new reference values. As a
flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can result, a warning message will appear if the tire
pressure drops significantly.
lead to tire failure.
The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's notes on the recommended tire pressure
handling and stopping ability. Please note that (Y page 295).
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi- of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is
bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a
underinflation has not reached the level to sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a
halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres- movements.
sure telltale.
Tire pressure 301
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning If the vehicle has been parked for over
lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating 20 minutes, the Tire pressures will be
pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the displayed after driving a few minutes
warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates message appears.
whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire After a teach-in process, the tire pressure mon-
pressure monitor is malfunctioning: itor automatically detects new wheels or new
Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire
pressure on one or more tires is significantly pressure value to the individual wheels is not
too low. The tire pressure monitor is not mal- possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active
functioning. display message is shown instead of the tire
Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a pressure display. The tire pressures are already
minute and then remains lit constantly, the being monitored.
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, the
In addition to the warning lamp, a message system may continue to show the tire pressure
appears in the multifunction display. Observe of the wheel that has been removed for a few
the information on display messages minutes. If this occurs, note that the value dis-
(Y page 221). played for the position where the spare wheel is
mounted is not the same as the current tire
It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction pressure of the emergency spare wheel.
of the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. A
malfunction will be indicated by the tire pres-
sure warning lamp flashing for approximately Tire pressure monitor warning mes-
one minute and then remaining lit. When the sages
malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure
warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure
driving. loss in one or more tires, a warning message is
shown in the multifunction display. The yellow
The tire pressure values indicated by the on- tire pressure warning lamp then lights up.
board computer may differ from those meas-
ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. The RIf the Correct Tire Pressure message
Wheels and tires

tire pressures shown by the on-board computer appears in the multifunction display, the tire
refer to those measured at sea level. At high pressure in at least one tire is too low. The tire
altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a pressure must be corrected when the oppor-
pressure gauge are higher than those shown by tunity arises.
the on-board computer. In this case, do not RIf the Check Tires message appears in the
reduce the tire pressures. multifunction display, the tire pressure in one
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can or more tires has dropped significantly. The
be affected by interference from radio transmit- tires must be checked.
ting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction message
radios) that may be being operated in or near the appears in the multifunction display, the tire
vehicle. pressure in one or more tires is dropping sud-
denly. The tires must be checked.
Checking the tire pressure electroni- Observe the instructions and safety notes in the
cally display messages in the "Tires" section
(Y page 221).
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated,
in the ignition lock (Y page 123). the tire pressures may be displayed for the
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified
wheel to select the Service menu. after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pres-
X Press the 9 or : button to select sures are displayed for the correct positions.
Tire Pressure.
The current tire pressure of each tire is shown
in the multifunction display.
Z
302 Loading the vehicle
Restarting the tire pressure monitor Radio type approval for the tire pres-
sure monitor
When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all
existing warning messages are deleted and the
warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the cur- Country Radio type approval number
rently set tire pressures as the reference values USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433A
for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure
FCC ID: MRXGG4
monitor will automatically detect the new refer-
ence values after you have changed the tire FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4
pressure. However, you can also define refer- Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433A
ence values manually as described here. The tire
pressure monitor then monitors the new tire IC: 2546A-GG4
pressure values. IC: 2546A-MC34MA4
X Set the tire pressure to the value recommen-
ded for the corresponding driving situation on
the Tire and Loading Information placard on Loading the vehicle
the driver's side B-pillar (Y page 295).
You can find more tire pressure values for Instruction labels for tires and loads
various operating conditions in the tire pres-
sure table inside the fuel filler flap G WARNING
(Y page 295). Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
all four wheels. steering and driving characteristics and lead
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
in the ignition lock. Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
wheel to select the Service menu.
your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
Wheels and tires
exceeding the maximum load.

Tire Pressure.
X Press the a button. Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the
The multifunction display shows the current maximum possible load.
tire pressure for the individual tires or the
Tire pressures will be displayed (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is
after driving a few minutes message. on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire
and Loading Information placard shows the
X Press the : button.
maximum permissible number of occu-
The Use Current Pressures as New Ref‐ pants and the maximum permissible vehicle
erence Values message appears in the mul- load. It also contains details of the tire sizes
tifunction display. and corresponding pressures for tires
If you wish to confirm the restart: mounted at the factory.
X Press the a button. (2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-
The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted mes- pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle iden-
sage appears in the multifunction display. tification plate informs you of the gross
vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the
After driving for a few minutes, the system
vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the
checks whether the current tire pressures are
fuel and the cargo. You can also find infor-
within the specified range. The new tire pres-
mation about the maximum gross axle
sures are then accepted as reference values
weight rating on the front and rear axle.
and monitored.
The maximum gross axle weight rating is
If you wish to cancel the restart: the maximum weight that can be carried by
X Press the % button. one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed
The tire pressure values stored at the last the maximum load or the maximum gross
restart will continue to be monitored. axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.
Loading the vehicle 303
Number of seats
: B-pillar, driver's side
Maximum number of seats : indicates the

Maximum permissible gross vehicle maximum number of occupants allowed to
weight rating travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard.
i The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the illustration
are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-
specific and can differ from the details shown.
The number of seats in your vehicle can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
Wheels and tires

Determining the correct load limit
X Specification for maximum gross vehicle Step-by-step instructions
weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading
Information placard: "The combined weight of The following steps have been developed as
occupants and cargo should never exceed required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
XXX kilograms or XXX lbs." Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pur-
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle
and luggage must not exceed the specified Safety Act of 1966".
value. X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
i The specifications shown on the Tire and exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s
Loading Information placard in the illustration Tire and Loading Information placard.
are examples. The maximum permissible X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific
and may differ from that in the illustration. the driver and passengers that will be riding in
You can find the valid maximum permissible your vehicle.
gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the
the Tire and Loading Information placard. driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or
XXX lbs.
X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage load capa-
city. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
Z
304 Loading the vehicle
able cargo and luggage load capacity is cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). available cargo and luggage load capacity cal-
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of culated in step 4.
luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying
seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of
1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load
limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 302).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Step 1
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Combined maximum 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
weight of occupants
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)
Step 2
Number of people in 5 3 1
the vehicle (driver and
Wheels and tires
occupants)
Distribution of the Front: 2 Front: 1 Front: 1
occupants Rear: 3 Rear: 2
Weight of the occu- Occupant 1: 150 lbs Occupant 1: 200 lbs Occupant 1: 150 lbs
pants (68 kg) (91 kg) (68 kg)
Occupant 2: 180 lbs Occupant 2: 190 lbs
(82 kg) (86 kg)
Occupant 3: 160 lbs Occupant 3: 150 lbs
(73 kg) (68 kg)
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
(63 kg)
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
(54 kg)
Gross weight of all 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
occupants
All about wheels and tires 305
Step 3
Permissible load (maxi- 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
mum gross vehicle 750 lbs (340 kg) = 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) =
weight rating from the 750 lbs (340 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg) 1350 lbs (612 kg)
Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard minus
the gross weight of all
occupants)
Vehicle identification plate All about wheels and tires

Even if you have calculated the total cargo care- Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-
fully, you should still make sure that the gross ards
vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight
rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-
the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on ards
the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 302).
Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all pas-
sengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if
applicable) must not exceed the permissible
gross vehicle weight.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi-
mum permissible weight that can be carried by
one axle (front or rear axle).
Wheels and tires

To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the
maximum permissible values (gross vehicle
weight and maximum gross axle weight rating),
have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu-
pants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable) Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S.
weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge. government specifications. Their purpose is to
provide drivers with uniform reliable information
on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers
have to grade tires using three performance fac-
tors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and
= temperature grade. These regulations do not
apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in
North America are provided with the corre-
sponding quality grading markings on the side-
wall of the tire.
Quality grades can be found, where applicable,
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width.
Example:
RTreadwear grade: 200
RTraction grade: AA
RTemperature grade: A
Z
306 All about wheels and tires
All passenger car tires must conform to the stat- are not icy or covered with snow. Take appro-
utory safety requirements in addition to these priate care when driving.
grades. Further information on winter tires (M+S tires)
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe- (Y page 294).
cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration. Temperature
Treadwear G WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
government course. For example, a tire graded tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
150 would wear one and one-half times as well in combination, can cause excessive heat
on the government course as a tire graded 100. build-up and possible tire failure.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
may depart significantly from the norm due to and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
variations in driving habits, service practices generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
and differences in road characteristics and cli- heat when tested under controlled conditions
mate. on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-
tained high temperature can cause the material
Traction of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
G WARNING failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
The traction grade assigned to this tire is meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
based on straight-ahead braking traction Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
Wheels and tires
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor- higher levels of performance on the laboratory
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char- test wheel than the minimum required by law.
acteristics.
! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to

the drive train.
The traction grades – from highest to lowest –
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas-
ured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
road is always lower than on dry road surfaces.
tions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread
depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.
Observe the legally required minimum tire tread
depth (Y page 293). Winter tires can reduce the
braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in
comparison with summer tires. The braking dis-
tance is still much further than on surfaces that
Tire labeling tire load rating and speed rating required for
your vehicle.
Overview
: Tire width
; Nominal aspect ratio in %
= Tire code
? Rim diameter
A Load bearing index
B Speed rating
: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(Y page 310) General: depending on the manufacturer's
; Department of Transportation, Tire Identifi- standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may
cation Number (Y page 309) not contain any letters or may contain one letter
= Maximum load rating (Y page 309) that precedes the size description.
? Maximum tire pressures (Y page 298) If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-
tion (as shown above): these are passenger
Wheels and tires

A Manufacturer vehicle tires according to European manufac-
B Tire material (Y page 310) turing standards.
C Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity If "P" precedes the size description: these are
and speed rating (Y page 307) passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. man-
D Load index (Y page 309) ufacturing standards.
E Tire name If "LT" precedes the size description: these are
The markings described above are on the tire in light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing
addition to the tire name (sales designation) and standards.
the manufacturer's name. If "T" precedes the size description: compact
emergency wheels with high tire pressure that
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate are only designed for temporary use in an emer-
from the data in the example. gency.
Tire width:tire width : shows the nominal tire
Tire size designation, load-bearing width in millimeters.
capacity and speed rating Aspect ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio
between the tire height and tire width and is
G WARNING shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calculated
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa- by dividing the tire width by the tire height.
city and the approved maximum speed could Tire code:tire code = specifies the tire type.
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diag-
is a risk of accident. onal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim
Z
flange. The rim diameter is specified in the size description, depending on the man-
inches (in). ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a RIf a service specification is available, the max-
numerical code that specifies the maximum imum speed is limited according to the speed
load-bearing capacity of a tire. rating in the service specification. Example:
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is
specified load limit. The maximum permissible the service specification. The letter "Y" rep-
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and resents the speed rating. The maximum
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph
the driver's side (Y page 302). (300 km/h).
Example: If the size description of your tire includes
Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum "ZR" and there are no service specifications,
load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear. ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out
For further information on the maximum tire the maximum speed.
load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 309). RThe size description for all tires with maxi-
For further information on the load bearing mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)
index, see "Load index" (Y page 309). must include "ZR",and the service specifica-
tion must be given in parentheses. Example:
Speed rating:speed rating B specifies the 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indi-
approved maximum speed of the tire. cates that the maximum speed of the tire is
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire man-
from the data in the example. ufacturer about the maximum speed.
All-weather tires and winter tires
Regardless of the speed rating, always observe
the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your Index Speed rating
driving style to the traffic conditions.
Summer tires Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
Wheels and tires
Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) the driving characteristics of winter tires. In
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also
have the i snowflake symbol on the tire
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the require-
ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa-
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association of
Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
snow. They have been especially developed
ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) for driving on snow.
ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h) An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehi-
cle from exceeding the following speeds:
ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h) Rall vehicles (except AMG vehicles): 130 mph
(210 km/h)
ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of RAMG vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h)
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in RAMG vehicles with Performance Package:
186 mph (300 km/h)
1 Or M+S i for winter tires.

The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory Maximum load rating
may be higher than the maximum speed that the
electronic speed limiter permits.
Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
required speed rating for your vehicle can be
found in the "Tires" section (Y page 317).
Further information about reading tire data can
be obtained from any qualified specialist work-
shop.
Load index
Maximum tire load : is the maximum permis-

sible weight for which the tire is approved.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissible
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (Y page 302).
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.
In addition to the load bearing index, load
index : may be imprinted after the letters that
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
identify speed index B on the sidewall of the US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man-
Wheels and tires

tire (Y page 307). ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on
RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the the sidewall of each tire produced.
example above), represents a standard load
(SL) tire
RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire
RLight Load: represents a light load tire
RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends
on the maximum load that the tire can carry at
a certain pressure
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
The TIN is a unique identification number. The

TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders
to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-
relevant matters. It makes it possible for the
purchaser to easily identify the affected tires.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica-
tion code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and
manufacturing date A.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol : marks that the tire complies with the
Z
requirements of the U.S. Department of Trans- Bar

portation. Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds
Manufacturer identification code: manufac- per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)
turer identification code ; provides details on are the equivalent of 1 bar.
the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code
with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code DOT (Department of Transportation)
with four symbols. DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the
For further information about retreaded tires, U S Department of Transportation.
see (Y page 317).
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size. Normal occupant weight
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by The number of occupants for which the vehicle
the manufacturer as a code to describe specific is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).
characteristics of the tire. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A
A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires
provides information about the age of a tire. The with regards to tread quality, tire traction and
first and second positions represent the week of temperature characteristics. The quality grad-
manufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal- ing assessment is made by the manufacturer
endar week. Positions three and four represent following specifications from the U.S. govern-
the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that ment. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of
is marked "2614" was manufactured in week 26 the tire.
in 2014.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate Recommended tire pressures
from the data in the example. The recommended tire pressure applies to the
tires mounted at the factory.
Tire characteristics The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for cold
tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maxi-
Wheels and tires
mum permissible vehicle speed.

The tire pressure table contains the recommen-
ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-
ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-
ditions.
Increased vehicle weight due to optional
equipment
The combined weight of all standard and
optional equipment available for the vehicle,
regardless of whether it is actually installed on
This information describes the type of tire cord the vehicle or not.
and the number of layers in sidewall : and
under tire tread ;. Rim
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate mounted.
from the data in the example.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Definition of terms for tires and loading The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight
rating. The actual load on an axle must never
Tire ply composition and material used exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross
Describes the number of plies or the number of axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle
layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's
and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon, side.
polyester and other materials.
Speed rating Maximum load rating

The speed rating is part of the tire identification. The maximum tire load is the maximum permis-
It specifies the speed range for which the tire is sible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is
approved. approved.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) Maximum permissible tire pressure
The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.
the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel,
accessories installed, occupants, luggage and Maximum load on one tire
the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by
vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehi- dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by
cle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehi- two.
cle identification plate on the B-pillar on the
driver's side. PSI (pounds per square inch)
A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross Aspect ratio
weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the Relationship between tire height and tire width
vehicle including all accessories, occupants, in percent.
fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if
applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is tire pressure
specified on the vehicle identification plate on Pressure inside the tire applying an outward
the B-pillar on the driver's side. force to every square inch of the tire's surface.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight The tire pressure is specified in pounds per
square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar.
The maximum weight is the sum of: The tire pressure should only be corrected when
Rthe curb weight of the vehicle the tires are cold.
Rthe weight of the accessories
Wheels and tires

Cold tire pressure
Rthe load limit
The tires are cold:
Rthe weight of the factory installed optional
Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires
equipment
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours
Kilopascal (kPa) and
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre- Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than
sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is 1 mile (1.6 km)
bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of
1 bar. Tread
The part of the tire that comes into contact with
Load index the road.
In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of Bead
the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely
more precisely. on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the
bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from
Curb weight the wheel rim.
The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and Sidewall
coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys- The part of the tire between the tread and the
tem and optional equipment if these are instal- bead.
led in the vehicle, but does not include passen-
gers or luggage.
Z
312 Changing a wheel
Weight of optional extras mounted as described under "Mounting a

The combined weight of those optional extras wheel" (Y page 313).
that weigh more than the replaced standard
parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These
optional extras, such as high-performance Rotating the wheels
brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-per-
formance battery, are not included in the curb G WARNING
weight and the weight of the accessories. Interchanging the front and rear wheels may
TIN (Tire Identification Number) severely impair the driving characteristics if
the wheels or tires have different dimensions.
This is a unique identifier which can be used by
a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example The wheel brakes or suspension components
for a product recall, and thus identify the pur- may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-
chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur- dent.
er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels
the manufacturing date.
and tires are of the same dimensions.
Load bearing index
The load bearing index (also load index) is a code ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
monitor, electronic components are located
that contains the maximum load bearing capa-
in the wheel.
city of a tire.
Tire-mounting tools should not be used near
Traction the valve. This could damage the electronic
Traction is the result of friction between the tires components.
and the road surface. Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Treadwear indicators Always observe the instructions and safety
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib- notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
Wheels and tires
uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level (Y page 313).
with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm) The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
has been reached. differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Occupant distribution Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in
designated seating positions. the center.
Total load limit On vehicles that have the same size front and
rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels accord-
Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg ing to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's
(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no
the vehicle. warranty book is available, the tires should be
rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to
10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this may
Changing a wheel be required earlier. Do not change the direction
of wheel rotation.
Flat tire Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the
The "Breakdown assistance" section brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rota-
(Y page 278) contains information and notes on ted. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary,
how to deal with a flat tire. Information on driv- restart the tire pressure loss warning system
ing with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat (Y page 299) or the tire pressure monitor
tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires (Y page 302).
with run-flat characteristics" (Y page 278).
Vehicle with emergency spare wheel: in the
event of a flat tire, the emergency spare wheel is
Changing a wheel 313
Direction of rotation Securing the vehicle to prevent it from

rolling away
Tires with a specified direction of rotation have
additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro-
planing. These advantages can only be gained if
the tires are installed corresponding to the
direction of rotation.
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its
correct direction of rotation.
Storing wheels
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires
from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel. If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it
can be found in the tire-change tool kit
(Y page 277).
Mounting a wheel The folding wheel chock is an additional safety
measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling
Preparing the vehicle away, for example when changing a wheel.
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and X Fold both plates upwards :.
level ground. X Fold out lower plate ;.
X Apply the parking brake. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the
X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead openings in base plate =.
position.
Wheels and tires

X Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that "nor-
mal" level is selected (Y page 159).
The vehicle electronics now have status 0.
This is the same as the SmartKey having been
removed.
X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-
tion lock (Y page 123). X Place chocks or other suitable items under
the front and rear of the wheel that is diago-
X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove
nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle
(Y page 277).
X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. Raising the vehicle
G WARNING
If you do not position the jack correctly at the
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-
ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack
Z
must be positioned vertically, directly under

the jacking point of the vehicle.
! The jack is designed exclusively for jacking

up the vehicle at the jacking points. Other-
wise, your vehicle could be damaged.
Observe the following when raising the vehicle:
RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-
cific jack that has been tested and approved
by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold the X To remove: take socket ; and lug wrench
vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being = from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 277).
changed. It must not be used for performing X Position socket ; on hub cap :.
maintenance work under the vehicle. X Position lug wrench = on socket ;.
RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and down-
X Using lug wrench =, turn hub cap : coun-
hill slopes. ter-clockwise and remove it.
RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from roll-
X To install: before installing, check hub cap :
ing away by applying the parking brake and
and the wheel area for soiling and clean if
inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the
necessary.
parking brake while the vehicle is raised.
X Put hub cap : in position and turn until it is in
RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
the right position.
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,
flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a X Position socket ; on hub cap :.
slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be X Attach lug wrench = to socket ; and
used, e.g. rubber mats. tighten hub cap :.
Wheels and tires
RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objects The tightening torque must be
as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not 18 lb-ft (25 Nm).
be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity
due to the restricted height. i Note that the hub cap should be tightened
RMake sure that the distance between the to the specified torque of 18 lb-ft (25 Nm).
underside of the tires and the ground does not Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
exceed 1.2 in (3 cm). the hub cap installed at a qualified specialist
RNever place your hands and feet under the
workshop.
raised vehicle.
RDo not lie under the vehicle.
RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lid
when the vehicle is raised.
RMake sure that no persons are present in the
vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
Vehicles with alloy wheels and hub caps: the
wheel bolts are covered by a hub cap. Before you
can unscrew the wheel bolts, you must remove
the hub cap. X Using lug wrench =, loosen the bolts on the
wheel you wish to change by about one full
turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.
Changing a wheel 315
ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore,

you should proceed carefully and get a sec-
ond person assist to you. Alternatively, you
can use a second alignment bolt.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty
surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could
otherwise be damaged when you screw them
in.
Jacking points
X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-

pletely.
X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread
instead of the wheel bolt.
X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
X Position jack A at jacking point ?.
X Remove the wheel.
Wheels and tires

Mounting a new wheel
G WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of
X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly damage to the threads, contact a qualified
beneath the jacking point. specialist workshop immediately. Have the
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
X Turn crank B clockwise until jack A sits
completely on jacking point ?. The base of replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
the jack must lie evenly on the ground.
X Turn crank B until the tire is raised a maxi- G WARNING
mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground. If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
Removing a wheel over. There is a risk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramic-
when the vehicle is on the ground.
brake disc: during removal and repositioning
of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the
Z
Always pay attention to the instructions and Lowering the vehicle

safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section
(Y page 312). G WARNING
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea- and bolts are not tightened to the specified
sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.
only use wheel bolts which have been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective Have the tightening torque immediately
wheel. checked at a qualified specialist workshop
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramic- after a wheel is changed.
brake disc: during removal and repositioning
of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ! Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel:
ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore, before lowering the vehicle, inflate the col-
you should proceed carefully and get a sec- lapsible spare wheel with the tire inflation
ond person assist to you. Alternatively, you compressor. The wheel rim could otherwise
can use a second alignment bolt. be damaged.
X Turn the crank of the jack counter-clockwise
! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold until the vehicle is once again standing firmly
the wheel securely against the wheel hub on the ground.
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
X Place the jack to one side.
Wheels and tires
X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur-

faces. X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise
X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the align- pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A).
ment bolt and push it on. The specified tightening torque is 96 lb-ft
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-
(130 Nm).
tight. X Turn the jack back to its initial position.
X Unscrew the alignment bolt. X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools
X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
in the trunk again.
tight. X Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted
X Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel:
wheel and adjust it if necessary.
inflate the collapsible spare wheel Observe the recommended tire pressure
(Y page 319). (Y page 295).
Only then lower the vehicle. When you are driving with the collapsible spare
wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning
system or the tire pressure monitor cannot func-
tion reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss
warning system or tire pressure monitor when
the defective wheel has been replaced with a
new wheel.
Emergency spare wheel 317
Vehicles with a tire pressure control sys- The recommended pressures for various oper-
tem: all installed wheels must be equipped with ating conditions can be found:
functioning sensors. Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
Wheel and tire combinations Observe the notes on recommended tire pres-
sures under various operating conditions
You can ask for information regarding permitted (Y page 295).
wheel-tire combinations at an authorized Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
Mercedes-Benz Center. the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- recommendations of the tire manufacturer in
mends that you only use tires and wheels the vehicle document wallet.
which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip
specifically for your vehicle. the vehicle with:
These tires have been specially adapted for Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (left
use with the control systems, such as ABS or and right)
ESP®, and are marked as follows: Rthe same type of tires at a given time (summer
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics) ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer- Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with
tain AMG tires) run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 278).
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
only be used on wheels that have been spe- not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
cifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. is therefore recommended that you additionally
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount
Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.
Wheels and tires

and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from
characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise a qualified specialist workshop.
emissions or fuel consumption, may other-
wise be adversely affected. In addition, when
driving with a load, tire dimension variations
could cause the tires to come into contact Emergency spare wheel
with the bodywork and axle components. This
could result in damage to the tires or the vehi- Important safety notes
cle.
G WARNING
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam-
age resulting from the use of tires, wheels or The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type of
accessories other than those tested and the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel
approved. and the wheel to be replaced may differ.
Information on tires, wheels and approved Mounting an emergency spare wheel may
combinations can be obtained from any quali- severely impair the driving characteristics.
fied specialist workshop. There is a risk of an accident.
! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec- To avoid hazardous situations:
ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ-
Radapt your driving style accordingly and
ous damage cannot always be detected on
retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz drive carefully.
cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded Rnever mount more than one spare wheel or
tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if emergency spare wheel that differs in size.
you have no information about their previous
usage. Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare
wheel of a different size briefly.
Z
318 Emergency spare wheel
Rdo not switch ESP® off. "Minispare" emergency spare wheel/

Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare collapsible spare wheel
wheel of a different size replaced at the Opening the stowage well
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions
as well as the tire type must be correct.
When using an emergency spare wheel or spare

wheel of a different size, you must not exceed
the maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Snow chains must not be mounted on emer-
gency spare wheels.
General notes
You can ask for information regarding permitted The emergency spare wheel can be found in the
emergency spare wheels at an authorized stowage well under the trunk floor.
Mercedes-Benz Center. X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 247).
You should regularly check the pressure of the X Remove stowage space :.
emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to
long trips, and correct the pressure as neces-
sary (Y page 295). The value on the wheel is Removing the "Minispare" emergency
valid. spare wheel
An emergency spare wheel may also be moun-
ted against the direction of rotation. Observe
the time restriction on use as well as the speed
Wheels and tires
limitation specified on the emergency spare

wheel.
Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear. This also applies to the
emergency spare wheel.
i When you are driving with the collapsible
spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss
warning system or the tire pressure monitor
cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire
pressure loss warning system or tire pressure X Turn stowage well ; counter-clockwise and
monitor when the defective wheel has been remove it together with vehicle tool kit
replaced with a new wheel. tray :.
Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: after X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare wheel
mounting an emergency spare wheel, the sys- =.
tem may still display the tire pressure of the
removed wheel for a few minutes. The value Always observe the instructions and safety
displayed for the mounted emergency spare notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
wheel is not the same as the current tire pres- (Y page 313).
sure of the emergency spare wheel.
Emergency spare wheel 319
Removing the collapsible spare wheel Inflating the collapsible spare wheel
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
! Inflate the collapsible spare wheel using the
tire inflation compressor before lowering the
vehicle. The wheel rim could otherwise be
damaged.
! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor
for longer than eight minutes at a time without
a break. It may otherwise overheat.
The tire inflation compressor can be operated
again once it has cooled down.
Comply with the manufacturer's safety instruc-
tions on the tire inflation compressor label and
on the tire sealant bottle.
The emergency spare wheel can be found in the X Mount the collapsible spare wheel as descri-
stowage well under the trunk floor. bed (Y page 313).
X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 247). The collapsible spare wheel must be mounted
X Reach into cutout : in the tool holder and lift before it is inflated.
it up. X Remove the tire inflation compressor from
X Remove collapsible spare wheel ;. the stowage space under the trunk floor
(Y page 277).
Always observe the instructions and safety
notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
(Y page 313).
Stowing a used collapsible spare
Wheels and tires

wheel
! Only place the collapsible spare wheel in the
vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise, moisture
may get into the vehicle.
Take the following steps to stow a used collaps-
ible spare wheel. Otherwise, it will not fit into the
spare wheel well. Mercedes-Benz recommends X Pull connector ? and the hose out of the
that you have this work performed at a qualified housing.
specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized X Remove the cap from the valve on the col-
Mercedes-Benz Center. lapsible spare wheel.
X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve. X Screw union nut : of the hose onto the valve.
X Use the back of the valve cap to unscrew the X Make sure on/off switch A of the tire infla-
valve insert from the valve and release the air. tion compressor is set to 0.
i Fully deflating the tires can take a few X Insert connector ? into a 12 V socket
minutes. (Y page 253) in your vehicle.
X Screw the valve insert back into the valve. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
X Screw the valve cap back on.

lock (Y page 123).
X Press on/off switch A on the tire inflation
X Remove the protective sheet from the vehicle
tool kit and pull it over the collapsible spare compressor to I.
wheel. The tire inflation compressor is switched on.
The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is shown
X Stow the collapsible spare wheel in the emer-
on pressure gauge =.
gency spare wheel well under the trunk.
X Inflate the tire to the specified tire pressure.
Z
320 Emergency spare wheel
The specified tire pressure is printed on the

yellow label of the emergency spare wheel.
X When the specified tire pressure has been
reached, press on/off switch A on the elec-
tric air pump to 0.
The tire inflation compressor is switched off.
lock.
X If the tire pressure is higher than the specified
pressure, press pressure release valve but-
ton ; until the correct tire pressure has been
reached.
X Unscrew air hose union nut : from the valve.
X Screw the cap onto the valve of the collapsi-
ble spare wheel again.
X Stow connector ? and the hose in the lower
section of the tire inflation compressor.
X Stow the tire inflation compressor in the vehi-
cle.
Wheels and tires
Vehicle electronics 321
Information regarding technical data In particular, the following conditions must be

complied with:
i The data stated here specifically refers to a Ronly approved wavebands may be used.
vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an Robserve the maximum permissible output
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the in these wavebands.
data for all vehicle variants and trim levels. Ronly approved antenna positions may be
used.
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
Vehicle electronics may cause damage to your health and the health
of others. Using an exterior antenna takes into
Installing two-way radios and mobile account current scientific discussions relating
phones (RF transmitters) to the possible health hazards that may result
from electromagnetic fields.
G WARNING The following antenna positions may be used if
The electromagnetic radiation from modified RF transmitters have been properly installed:
or incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters can
interfere with the vehicle electronics. This can
compromise the operational safety of the
vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
You should have all work to electrical and
electronic equipment carried out at a qualified
G WARNING
The electromagnetic radiation from incor-
rectly operated RF transmitters can interfere
with the vehicle electronics, for example: Approved antenna positions
: Front roof area
Rif the RF transmitter is not connected with ; Rear roof area
an exterior antenna
Technical data
= Rear fender
Rthe exterior antenna has been installed ? Trunk lid
incorrectly or is not a low-reflection type
When installing an antenna on the front roof
This can compromise the operational safety area of vehicles with a sliding sunroof, observe
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. the sweeping range of the roof.
Have the low-reflection exterior antenna On the rear fenders, it is recommended to posi-
mounted at a qualified specialist workshop. tion the antenna on the side of the vehicle clos-
est to the center of the road.
When operating RF transmitters in the vehi-
cle, always connect them with the low-reflec- Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609
when retrofitting RF transmitters (Road Vehicles
tion exterior antenna. - EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket
radio frequency transmitting equipment).
! The operating permit may be invalidated if Observe the legal requirements for accessory
the instructions for installation and use of RF parts.
transmitters are not observed. If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio
equipment, use the power supply or antenna
connections intended for use with the basic wir-
ing. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Sup-
plement when installing.
Z
322 Identification plates
Deviations with respect to frequency bands, Identification plates

maximum transmission outputs or antenna
positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. Vehicle identification plate with vehi-
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the cle identification number (VIN)
base of the antenna must not exceed the fol-
lowing values:
Frequency band Maximum
transmission
output
Short wave 100 W
3 - 54 MHz
4 m waveband 30 W
74 - 88 MHz
2 m waveband 50 W
144 - 174 MHz X Open the front left-hand door.
You will see vehicle identification plate :.
Trunked radio system/ 10 W
Tetra
380 - 460 MHz
70 cm waveband 35 W
400 - 460 MHz
Mobile communications 10 W
(2G/3G/4G)
The following can be used in the vehicle without

restrictions:
RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis-
Technical data
Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)

sion output of up to 100 mW
: VIN
RRF transmitters with transmitter frequencies
in the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maxi- ; Vehicle model
mum transmission output of up to 2 W
(trunked radio/Tetra)
RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
There is no restriction for antenna positions on
the outside of the vehicle for the following fre-
quency bands:
RTrunked radio system/Tetra
R70 cm waveband
R2G/3G/4G
Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)

: VIN
; Paint code
i The data shown on the vehicle identification
plate is used only as an example. This data is
different for every vehicle and can deviate
Service products and filling capacities 323
from the data shown here. You can find the Service products and filling capaci-
data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle ties
identification plate.
Vehicle identification number (VIN) G WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and haz-
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the labels
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
containers. Always keep service products out
of the reach of children.
Dispose of service products in an environ-
X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost mentally responsible manner.
position.
X Fold floor covering : upwards. Service products include the following:
You will see VIN ;. RFuels
The VIN can also be found in the following loca- RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
tions: RCoolant
Ron the lower edge of the windshield RBrake fluid
(Y page 323) RWindshield washer fluid
Ron the vehicle identification plate
RClimate control system refrigerant
(Y page 322)
Components and service products must match.
Only use products recommended by Mercedes-
Benz. Damage which is caused by the use of
Technical data
Engine number products which have not been recommended is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or
goodwill gestures. They are listed in this
Mercedes-Benz Operator's Manual in the appro-
priate section.
Information on tested and approved products
can be obtained at a Mercedes-Benz Service
Center or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
You can recognize service products approved by
Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on
the containers:
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
: Emission control information plate, includ- RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
ing the certification of both federal and Cali-
Other designations or recommendations indi-
fornian emissions standards
cate a level of quality or a specification in
; Engine number (stamped into the crank- accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB
case) 229.5). They have not necessarily been
= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Z
324 Service products and filling capacities
Other identifications, for example: Tank capacity

R0 W-30
Missing values were not available at time of
R5 W-30 going to print.
R5 W-40
Model Total capa-
city
Fuel Mercedes‑AMG vehicles
Important safety notes All other models 21.1 US gal
(80.0 l)
G WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel Model Of which
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- reserve
sion.
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine All other models Approx.
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before 2.4 US gal
refueling. (9.0 l)
G WARNING Gasoline
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
Fuel grade
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
You must make sure that fuel does not come gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
vapors. Keep fuel away from children. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
If you or others come into contact with fuel, result in damage to the fuel system and the
engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop
observe the following:
and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
Technical data
RWash away fuel from skin immediately completely.

using soap and water. ! Only refuel using unleaded premium grade
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.
immediately rinse them thoroughly with i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.
clean water. Seek medical assistance with- Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can
out delay. refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
! Only use the fuel recommended. Operating
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- the vehicle with other fuels can lead to dam-
ing. age to the fuel system, engine and exhaust
RImmediately change out of clothing which system.
has come into contact with fuel. ! Do not use the following:
RE15(gasoline with 15% ethanol)
RE85(gasoline with 85% ethanol)
RE100 (100% ethanol)
RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)
RM100 (100% methanol)
RGasoline with metalliferous additives obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz

RDiesel Center.
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom- Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use bran-
mended for your vehicle. ded fuels that have additives.
! To ensure the longevity and full perform- The fuel quality available in some countries may
ance of the engine, only premium-grade not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the
unleaded gasoline must be used. fuel injection system as a result. In such cases,
and in consultation with an authorized
If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed
and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline with the cleaning additive recommended by
of a lower grade, observe the following pre- Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes
cautions: and mixing ratios specified on the container.
ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regular
unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with pre-
mium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as Engine oil
possible.
RDo not drive at the maximum speed. General notes
RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine
speeds over 3,000 rpm.
You will usually find information about the fuel
grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label
on the pump, ask the staff for assistance.
i For further information, consult a qualified
specialist workshop or visit
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
As a temporary measure, if the recommended
fuel is not available, you may also use regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per-
formance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid ! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a spec-
driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration. ification other than is necessary to fulfill the
Technical data
Never refuel using gasoline with a lower AKI. prescribed service intervals. Do not change
Information on refueling (Y page 139). the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve
longer replacement intervals than those pre-
CLS 400, CLS 400 4MATIC scribed. You could otherwise cause engine
damage or damage to the exhaust gas after-
i In some countries, the available gasoline treatment.
may not be sufficiently low in sulfur. This fuel
can temporarily produce unpleasant odors, Follow the instructions in the service interval
especially on short journeys. As soon as sul- display regarding the oil change. Otherwise,
fur-free fuel (sulfur content < 10 ppm) is used you may damage the engine and the exhaust
for refueling, the odors are reduced. gas aftertreatment.
When handling engine oil, observe the important
Additives safety notes on service products (Y page 323).
! Operating the engine with fuel additives The engine oils are matched to the performance
added later can lead to engine failure. Do not of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals.
mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not You should therefore only use engine oils and oil
include additives for the removal and preven- filters that are approved for vehicles with main-
tion of residue buildup. gasoline must only be tenance systems.
mixed with additives recommended by For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,
Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
for use on the product label. More information Or visit the website
about recommended additives can be http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Z
326 Service products and filling capacities
The table shows which engine oils have been Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-
approved for your vehicle. Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval 331.0.
Gasoline engines MB-Freigabe or
MB-Approval Information about approved brake fluid can be
obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or
All models 229.5 on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a
for Mercedes‑AMG vehicles. qualified specialist workshop and the replace-
ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.
i MB approval is indicated on the oil contain-
ers.
Coolant
Filling capacities
The following values refer to an oil change Important safety notes
including the oil filter.
G WARNING
Model Capacity If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-
CLS 400 6.9 US qt (6.5 l) ponents in the engine compartment, it may
CLS 400 4MATIC ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Let the engine cool down before you add anti-
CLS 550 8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled
CLS 550 4MATIC
next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the
Mercedes‑AMG 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) antifreeze from components before starting
vehicles the engine.
Additives ! Only add coolant that has been premixed

with the desired antifreeze protection. You
! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. could otherwise damage the engine.
This could damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found
Technical data
in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser-

vice Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the
Brake fluid Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture in countries where high temperatures prevail.
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake sufficiently protected from corrosion and
fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the overheating.
brake system when the brakes are applied i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a
hard. This would impair braking efficiency. qualified specialist workshop and the replace-
There is a risk of an accident. ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.
You should have the brake fluid renewed at Comply with the important safety notes for ser-
the specified intervals. vice products when handling coolant
(Y page 323).
Comply with the important safety notes for ser-
vice products when handling brake fluid
(Y page 323).
The brake fluid change intervals can be found in
the Maintenance Booklet.
The coolant is a mixture of water and anti- nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of
freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the fol- fire and injury.
lowing tasks:
Make sure that no windshield washer con-
RAnti-corrosion protection
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
RAntifreeze protection
RRaising the boiling point ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for
If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB
-35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could dam-
during operation is approximately 266 ‡ age the plastic lenses of the headlamps.
(130 †).
! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit
The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitor washer fluid should be mixed together. The
concentration in the engine cooling system spray nozzles may otherwise become
should: blocked.
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine
Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other-
cooling system against freezing down to
wise, the level sensor may give a false reading.
approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).
Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down
When handling washer fluid, observe the impor-
tant safety notes on service products
to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be
(Y page 323).
dissipated as effectively.
Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ At temperatures above freezing:
corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of
with MB Specifications for Service Products water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB
310.1. SummerFit.
i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate At temperatures below freezing:
antifreeze and anti-corrosion protection.
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of
i The coolant is checked with every mainte- water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.
nance interval at a qualified specialist work- For the correct mixing ratio refer to the infor-
shop. mation on the antifreeze reservoir.
Technical data
Filling capacities i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-
merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all
Model Capacity year round.
CLS 400 Approx. 10.9 US qt

CLS 400 4MATIC (10.3 l) Climate control system refrigerant
CLS 550 Approx. 11.5 US qt Important safety notes
CLS 550 4MATIC (10.9 l)
The climate control system of your vehicle is fil-
Mercedes‑AMG Approx. 11.4 US qt led with refrigerant R‑134a.
vehicles (10.8 l) The instruction label regarding the refrigerant
type used can be found on the radiator cross
member.
Windshield washer system ! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oil
approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.
Important safety notes The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with
any other PAG oil that is not approved for
G WARNING R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if control system may be damaged.
it comes into contact with hot engine compo-
Z
328 Vehicle data
Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant or Vehicle data

replacing component parts, may only be carried
out by a qualified specialist workshop. All appli- General notes
cable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639,
must be adhered to. Please note that for the specified vehicle data:
Always have work on the climate control system Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of:
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. - tires
- load
Refrigerant instruction label - condition of the suspension
- optional equipment
Roptional equipment reduces the maximum
payload.
Dimensions and weights
Example: refrigerant instruction label

: Warning symbol
; Refrigerant filling capacity
= Applicable standards
? PAG oil part number
A Type of refrigerant
Warning symbol : advises you about: Model : Opening height
RPossible dangers
Mercedes‑AMG 71.1 in
RHaving service work carried out at a qualified
Technical data
vehicles (1805 mm)

specialist workshop
CLS 400 70.5 in
Filling capacities CLS 400 4MATIC (1790 mm)
Mercedes‑AMG Capacity CLS 550 70.3 in
vehicles CLS 550 4MATIC (1786 mm)
Refrigerant 22.6 ± 0.4 oz
(640 ± 10 g) Mercedes‑AMG
vehicles
PAG oil 4.2 oz
(120 g) Vehicle length 195.6 in (4967 mm)
Vehicle width 81.7 in (2075 mm)
All other models Capacity including exterior
mirrors
Refrigerant 20.8 ± 0.4 oz
Vehicle height 56.3 in (1431 mm)
(590 ± 10 g)
Wheelbase 113.1 in (2874 mm)
PAG oil 4.2 oz
(120 g) Turning radius 36.9 ft (11.25 m)
Vehicle data 329
Mercedes‑AMG
vehicles
Maximum roof load 220 lb (100 kg)
Maximum trunk 220 lb (100 kg)
load
All other models

Vehicle width 81.7 in (2075 mm)
including exterior
mirrors
Vehicle height 55.8 in (1418 mm)
Wheelbase 113.1 in (2874 mm)
Maximum roof load 220 lb (100 kg)
Maximum trunk 220 lb (100 kg)
load
Model Vehicle length

CLS 400 194.4 in (4937 mm)
CLS 400 4MATIC
CLS 550 195.0 in (4952 mm)
CLS 550 4MATIC
Model Turning radius
Technical data
CLS 400 36.7 ft (11.18 m)
CLS 400 4MATIC 37.8 ft (11.51 m)
CLS 550 36.8 ft (11.21 m)
CLS 550 4MATIC 37.8 ft (11.53 m)
Z
330
331
332

MY17 CLS Operator

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MY17 CLS Operator

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MY17 CLS Operator

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CLS

! Notes on material damage alert you to dan-

Welcome to the world of Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 93

Driving and parking .......................... 122

Opening and closing ........................... 76

Stowage and features ...................... 242

Features .............................................. 248

Maintenance and care ...................... 265

Breakdown assistance ..................... 277

Wheels and tires ............................... 292

Technical data ................................... 321

1, 2, 3 ... Parking .......................................... 167

Switching the function on/off Automatic engine start (ECO start/

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic

Washing by hand ........................... 271 Maximum cooling .......................... 119

Controller ........................................... 237 Daytime running lamps

Doors Driving system

see also Digital Operator's Man- Engine

Hazard warning lamps ...................... 107 Indicators

Kickdown Switching the exterior lighting

Search & Send ............................... 258 Mobile phone

NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Displaying a service message ........ 270

see PARKTRONIC Protection against theft

Rear window blind ............................ 251 Route guidance

Seat heating .................................... 97 Side windows

Speedometer Under driver's seat/front-

see also Digital Operator's Man- Average weight of the vehicle

Storing ........................................... 313 Instrument cluster display ............. 178

Introduction Operating the Digital Operator's Man-

cle. The Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies in

Operating safety ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:

Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a

Diagnostics connection Always have the following work carried out at an

The following text is reproduced as required of content/asportal/en/communication/

1966. Data stored in the vehicle

federal regulation governs. As of February 2013,

Function Page Function Page

Multifunction steering wheel

i Vehicles with multimedia system i Vehicles with multimedia system

Function Page Function Page

Center console, lower section

Center console, lower section (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Function Page Function Page

Overhead control panel

Door control panel

Function Page Function Page

switched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-

and must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-

Seat belt adjustment

Introduction door or side window. You may otherwise be in

Important safety notes the rear seats.

G WARNING Knee bags

Side impact air bags

Front side impact air bags : and rear side

Pelvis air bags

Window curtain air bags Requirements

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

If OCS determines that: repaired immediately at a qualified specialist

That person could, for example, come into G WARNING

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)